FILE 20220926 171007 DRG420-450 Operators Manual English

Reachstacker 42 – tonnes
Publ. no IDRG03.02GB
Operator's manual in original OPERATOR’S MANUAL
DRG 420 –
1 Foreword ................................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 About the operator's manual.............................................................................................. 1
1.2 About the documentation kit .............................................................................................. 4
1.3 Inspection and maintenance .............................................................................................. 5
2 Safety ..................................................................................................................................... 6
2.1 Safety and emergency equipment ..................................................................................... 8
2.2 CE marking ........................................................................................................................ 9
2.3 ANSI/ITSDF marking ....................................................................................................... 10
2.4 Keep in mind ..................................................................................................................... 11
2.5 Fire................................................................................................................................... 18
3 Overview............................................................................................................................... 20
3.1 Description ....................................................................................................................... 20
3.2 Plates ............................................................................................................................... 25
4 Instruments and controls ...................................................................................................... 33
4.1 Warning and indicator lights............................................................................................. 37
4.2 Ignition key lock and start and stop button for the engine................................................ 39
4.3 Switches .......................................................................................................................... 41
4.4 Travel direction selector and parking brake ..................................................................... 57
4.5 Multi-function lever........................................................................................................... 59
4.6 Load handling .................................................................................................................. 60
4.7 Pedals .............................................................................................................................. 64
4.8 Steering wheel ................................................................................................................. 65
4.9 Driver's seat ..................................................................................................................... 69
4.10 Heating / Air conditioning ................................................................................................. 71
4.11 Control system ................................................................................................................. 73
4.12 Optional equipment.......................................................................................................... 99
5 Handling ............................................................................................................................. 106
5.1 Running-in ...................................................................................................................... 110
5.2 Daily inspection............................................................................................................... 111
5.3 Error codes ..................................................................................................................... 112
5.4 Operating ....................................................................................................................... 153
5.5 Load handling ................................................................................................................ 170
5.6 Customer settings via display ........................................................................................ 199
6 Inspection and maintenance............................................................................................... 212
6.1 Daily inspection.............................................................................................................. 213
6.2 Maintenance .................................................................................................................. 216
6.3 Service ........................................................................................................................... 248
7 Transporting the machine ................................................................................................... 250
7.1 Towing............................................................................................................................ 251
7.2 Lifting and transporting the machine.............................................................................. 253
7.3 Service position.............................................................................................................. 266
7.4 Long-term storage.......................................................................................................... 267
8 Environment and standards................................................................................................ 270
9 Specifications ..................................................................................................................... 272
10 Terminology ........................................................................................................................ 284
11 Index.................................................................................................................................... 287
Operator’s manual DRG 420 – IDRG03.02GB

IDRG03.02GB Operator’s manual DRG 420 –
1 Foreword 1
1 Foreword
1.1 About the operator's manual
General
Thank you for choosing Kalmar as your machine supplier. We hope
that we will meet your expectations.
This Operator's manual contains information that you must keep in

mind for safe handling and optimal use of your new Kalmar machine.
Operator's manual, purpose

The operator's manual describes how the machine should be operated
and maintained in a correct manner.
Cargotec will not accept any responsibility for machine modifications

without permission from Cargotec. Further, Cargotec will not accept
any responsibility if other lifting devices, tools or work methods are
used other than those described in this manual.
Storage
The operator's manual should always be kept in the machine.
About machine version

The information in this publication corresponds with the machine's
design and appearance on delivery from Cargotec. Deviations may
arise due to customer adaptations.
Cargotec reserves the right to make changes to specifications and

equipment without prior notice. Information provided in the manual
applies at the date of issue.
Copyright
Cargotec Sweden AB
Duplication of the content in this manual, in whole or in part, is strictly

prohibited without written permission from Cargotec Sweden AB.
All duplication by any means, such as copying, printing, etc., is

prohibited.
Manufacturer
This machine is manufactured by Cargotec Sweden AB, SE-340 10
Lidhult, Sweden.

2 1 Foreword – Reading instructions
1.1.1 Reading instructions

Warning information
This manual contains descriptions of warnings that apply to your safety.
Warnings provide information about potential dangers that, if the
warnings are not followed, could result in injury or product damage.
DANGER
Situation that could lead to severe personal injury or
death if regulation is not followed.
WARNING
Situation that could lead to personal injury if regulation
is not followed.
CAUTION
Situation that could lead to product damage if
regulation is not followed.
Important information
Important information is denoted with NOTE and is intended to
facilitate the work process, handling or to increase understanding of
the information.
NOTE
Important information not related to safety.
Read the operator's manual

The symbol to the left is used in certain cases on the machine and
refers to important information in the Operator's manual.
000262
Read the operator's manual
Read the Maintenance manual

The symbol to the left is used in certain cases on the machine and
001128
refers to important information in the Maintenance manual.
Read the Maintenance manual

1 Foreword – Reading instructions 3
Optional equipment
There is a range of optional equipment available for the machine.
000264
Each description of optional equipment in the manual is marked with
a symbol, and contains an explanatory text. The symbol is positioned
Indicates optional equipment visibly by the text and image in question.
See the machine card for complete specifications of the machine's

product alternatives and optional equipment.

4 1 Foreword – About the documentation kit
1.2 About the documentation kit

Documentation kit
The following documentation is supplied for the machine:
• Operator's manual (in cab with machine).
• Maintenance manual.
• Spare parts catalogue with machine card.
There is supplementary documentation that can be ordered for the

machine:
• Workshop manual.
• Supplier documentation for engine, transmission, and drive axle.
Ordering documentation
The documentation is ordered from the dealer for Cargotec.
Always indicate publication number when ordering. The publication

number is printed down to the left on the cover and at the bottom of
all pages in the manual.

1 Foreword – Inspection and maintenance 5
1.3 Inspection and maintenance

General
Maintenance must be managed properly in order for the machine to
operate satisfactorily and at the lowest cost. Intervals for inspection
and maintenance refer to operation under normal environmental and
working conditions.
Maintenance described in this operator's manual can be performed by

the operator, see Chapter 6 Inspection and maintenance. It describes
the daily inspections that comprise ongoing checks and actions that the
operator should carry out when starting a shift.
Maintenance
For other maintenance not included in this operator's manual (service
and repairs), contact an authorised workshop.

6 2 Safety
2 Safety
General
Safety rules are intended to reduce the risk of personal injuries as well
as damage to the load or other property.
Only personnel trained for this machine may handle, operate, perform
service or be in its vicinity during its use.
The safety information in this operator's manual is intended for your

information and safety. It cannot, and is not intended to, cover all
possible events during operation. Responsible operators with the
right training is the only way to ensure the safe and prolonged use
of the machine.
The machine was thoroughly tested and adjusted before it left the
factory. This does not preclude the possibility that it has been damaged
during delivery. The machine must undergo a thorough inspection in
order to ensure correct function before being put into service.
Important to read the operator's manual

Incorrect operation may lead to injury and product, and/or property
damage. For this reason, please read this operator's manual very
carefully before using the machine. The operator's manual contains
important information about your Kalmar machine, the machine's
handling, safety during work and about the machine's daily inspection.
000262
In addition, you will obtain a lot of valuable information that makes

it easier for you at work.
The operator's manual should always remain in the machine. If it is lost

a replacement must be acquired immediately.
NOTE
Never use a machine that does not have an operator's manual.
Ask your foreman or supervisor if there is anything in the text you do

not understand or if you feel information is missing in any area.

2 Safety – Safety 7
Intended use
• The machine must only be used for what it is designed and
manufactured for, i.e. to lift and transport goods whose weight
and load centre/centre of gravity do not exceed the machine's
maximum permitted load capacity. If it is used in any other way
or in potentially dangerous environments (e.g. an explosive
environment, an area with asbestos dust) then special safety rules
must be followed and the machine must be equipped for such
operations.
• The machine should not be modified or changed without permission
from Cargotec. In the event of modifications approved by Cargotec
the signs on the machine and documentation affected must be
adapted to apply to the modification.
In the event of modification or conversion without Cargotec's
permission Cargotec's product liability ceases to apply. Modification
and conversion may only be made if the knowledge exists to
verify and test the modifications and conversions. Modifications
and conversions must be documented (date and action) and the
organisation responsible must be stated with name and address.
Signs and stickers must be updated in accordance with the
machine's new design.
• The machine may not be operated on public roads unless it has
been adapted according to national road safety regulations.
• It is always the machine owner's responsibility to ensure that the
machine has approved fire-fighting equipment in accordance with
the regulations in force.
• The machine is designed for use in outdoor temperatures -30 °C
to 40 °C, relative humidity 10 to 90%, and max. wind speeds 12.2
m/s. In the event of deviations from this, contact Cargotec.
Operator requirements
• The machine may only be operated by specially trained operators
who have the work supervisor's permission to operate the machine.
• Laws and regulations regarding driver's licenses, operator ID, etc.
must always be followed.
• The operator must be aware of and follow all local safety rules.
• The operator must follow the manufacturer's instructions.
• The operator should read and understand the machine's warning
and information plates as well as understand and be able to use
the machine's safety and warning equipment.
Prohibited operation
Machine operation is prohibited:
• If safety and warning equipment such as rear view mirrors,
headlights, etc., do not function correctly.
• In case of defective brakes, steering or lifting equipment.
• If there are unauthorised persons or vehicles within the machine's
work area.
• If the machine has been repaired, modified or adjusted without the
supervisor's/work management's permission.
• If the machine is equipped with tyres not approved by Cargotec.
• Overload system for load handling is not working.

8 2 Safety – Safety and emergency equipment
2.1 Safety and emergency equipment

General
A good working environment has safety and emergency equipment to
make the operator's work easier and safer.
The machine may be equipped with the following safety equipment:
1. Revolving beacon. 13. Switch in driver's seat.

2. Revolving beacon . Locks the transmission in neutral position and blocks
3. Buzzer automatic spreading 20' – 40' . the load handling functions if the operator leaves the
operator's station. In addition, a warning is activated if the
4. Back-up camera with distance warning . operator leaves the operator's station without applying
Camera at boom nose . (Not shown in the figure.) the parking brake.
Camera at twistlocks . (Not shown in the figure.) 14. Fire extinguisher .
Camera at lift shoe (for bottom lift) . (Not shown in the A fire extinguisher may also be located externally.
figure.) If the machine is equipped with fire extinguisher then it
5. Buzzer in cab to indicate alarm, overload or forgotten must be approved in accordance with European standard
action, for example, leaving cab without applying the EN3. The fire extinguisher must be selected so that
parking brake. it is designed for use against fires in: fibrous fuels
(Class A), liquid fuels (Class B), gaseous fuels (Class
6. Personnel proximity system that alerts when personnel C) and electrical appliances. Adapted fire extinguishing
warning tags are detected in the proximity of the machine equipment can be ordered from Cargotec.
.
Fire extinguishing system . (Not identified in the figure)
7. Tyre pressure monitoring system that alerts if incorrect
tyre pressure is detected . Can be activated automatically, manually on the display in
the cab or with switch on the chassis.
8. Horn.
9. Electrically powered loud air horn . 15. Reverse alarm.
10. External rear view mirrors. 16. Back-up light.
Used to provide improved visibility while manoeuvring and 17. Emergency exit, right-hand door and rear window
load handling. A rear view mirror on each side. ( ).
11. Control breaker for hydraulics. 18. Machine with vertically adjustable cab (not shown in
the figure) .
Cuts off all power supply and control signals to hydraulics.
- Lock against opening the left-hand door when the cab
12. Seat belt, 2-point. is raised.
Seat belt, 3-point . - Lock against opening the right-hand door lock.
Seat belt, passenger seat . - Control for emergency lowering of the cab on the control
valve.
- Ladder on the cab frame to evacuate the cab.

2 Safety – CE marking 9
2.2 CE marking
CE marking
(Declaration of Conformity, only applies to machines marketed
within EU/EEA.)
This machine is CE marked. This means that upon delivery it fulfils the
applicable "Essential Health and Safety Requirements" specified in
the EU Machine Directive, 2006/42/EC, as well as other EU directives
relevant to this machine type.
As proof that the requirements are fulfilled, the machine is provided

with an EC Declaration of Conformity, issued by Cargotec for every
machine. The EC declaration also includes tools and options produced
by Cargotec. The documentation is a valuable document that must be
properly preserved and saved for at least 10 years. The documentation
013981 must always follow with the machine when it is sold.
Machine plates for CE marking, machine and See example of EC Declaration after 11 Index.
attachment
Anyone making modifications that affect the safety of the machine
also assumes responsibility for them. If the machine is used for other
purposes or with other tools than what is specified in these instructions,
safety must be ensured in each individual case. The machine owner
is responsible that the machine is used in accordance with the
instructions in the operator's manual. In some cases the application
area may require a new CE marking and issue of new EC declaration
of conformity.
For additional information, see standards under chapter 8 Environment

and standards.

10 2 Safety – ANSI/ITSDF marking
2.3 ANSI/ITSDF marking

ANSI/ITSDF marking
(Only applies to machines for the North American market.)
This machine is ANSI/ITSDF marked. This means that upon delivery it

fulfils the basic safety requirements of ANSI/ITSDF B56.1.
Anyone making modifications that affect the safety of the machine also
assumes responsibility for them.
If the machine is used for other purposes or with other tools than what
is specified in these instructions, safety must be ensured in each
individual case. The machine owner is responsible that the machine is
used in accordance with the instructions in the operator's manual.
For additional information, see standards under chapter 8 Environment

and standards.
Machine plates for ANSI/ITSDF marking, machine
and attachment

2 Safety – Keep in mind 11
2.4 Keep in mind

Interrupted operation and/or parking
CAUTION
Always turn off the electric power when the machine is
left, e.g. when parking or at the end of the shift.
Risk of fire!
Turn off the electric power with the battery
disconnector.
For machines with SCR-system (emission control with AdBlue):
NOTE
Wait for two minutes before the system voltage is disconnected
with the battery disconnector so that the SCR system has time to
be drained of AdBlue, this is particularly important in cold weather.
NOTE
Never leave the operator's station without first applying the parking
brake (ON position).
NOTE
Always remove the start key if the machine is to be left unattended.
During work shifts
DANGER
The attachment is a tool that handles heavy loads.
Extreme hazard to personal health and risk of property
damage!
Never walk under hanging loads. Make sure that no
persons stand or walk under a raised work attachment,
regardless of whether it is loaded or not.
DANGER
External equipment may only be used if it is approved
by Cargotec.
damage!
Only use equipment that is approved by Cargotec.

12 2 Safety – Keep in mind
DANGER
The parking brake should never be applied when the
machine is moving, unless an emergency requires it.
Very heavy braking. Risk of machine tipping, load
tipping over, being dropped or damage to property
or extreme danger!
Stop the machine before applying the parking brake.
DANGER
The machine's work area is large and visibility from
the operator's cab is restricted.
damage!
Keep in mind:
• Always check that no persons are in the way of the
machine or its equipment. Also check that the area
upwards is free. If there are unauthorised persons
or vehicles within the work area then the machine
must be stopped.
• The operator must always face in the travel
direction and should operate with special care
where persons or vehicles may appear.
• The operator must adapt the speed to the load and
ground conditions, visibility, and wind conditions,
etc.
• The operator must pay extra attention and operate
with special care near electric power lines,
viaducts, docksides, ramps, doorways, etc.
• Always operate carefully so that the attachment
does not collide with posts, power lines, etc.
• Use available visibility-enhancing equipment such
as rear view mirrors and camera ( ).

WARNING
Transporting loads is associated with major risks.
Risk of roll-over and tipping over! Chance of load
damage to property! Extreme danger!
Respect the lifting capacity of the machine and
exercise the greatest caution during load handling:
• The machine must only be operated on even
surfaces, intended for the machine's total weight
and ground pressure.
• All transporting of loads must take place in
transport position. Exercise caution when
operating, think about the width and height so
that the boom or attachment does not collide with
poles, cables, etc.
• Do not transport the load in a higher position than
necessary since this may cause the machine to roll
or tip over.
• Always operate with the load facing uphill on an
uphill or downhill grade, never operate or turn
across a grade.
• Operate the machine in reverse if the transported
load obscures visibility to the front.
• No personnel may encroach or stand under a
raised load.
• The operator must avoid forceful acceleration
and heavy braking to prevent risk of tipping and
roll-over.
• The operator must always adjust the speed when
turning to prevent skidding and risk of roll-over or
tipping over.
In the event of tipping or roll-over, hold onto the
steering wheel and remain in the cab. Do NOT
attempt to jump out of the cab until any movement
of the machine has finished.
When handling special loads local regulations may
apply. Learn about them and follow them.
WARNING
The machine's load capacity is limited!
Risk of roll-over and tipping over!
It is forbidden to exceed the machine's load capacity.
See the rating plate and load diagrams. The machine's
stability limit can be exceeded if the overloading
system is not working.

WARNING
The strength of the roof window may be significantly
reduced in case of exposure to substances containing
aromatic hydrocarbons, ketones, esters, or chlorinated
hydrocarbons.
Low strength! Danger!
Check the surface layer of the roof window and
clean only with washer fluid or mild detergent. Rinse
thoroughly with lukewarm water afterwards. Replace a
damaged roof window that shows cracks or scratches
immediately!
WARNING
Lifting loads in very windy conditions is associated
with great difficulties.
Avoid lifting loads at wind speeds higher than 12.2 m/s.
WARNING
The machine emits exhausts during operation.
Health hazards and fatal danger in poorly ventilated
facilities!
If possible, avoid operating the machine indoors
in poorly ventilated premises. Use exhaust venting
equipment!
WARNING
Work position on the machine is located up high.
Risk of falling and bodily injury!
Always use steps and handles when you go up or
down from the machine. Always turn to face the
machine. Do not jump!
WARNING
Cab doors must always be closed when operating.
Risk of personal injury and crushing in case of
roll-over and tipping!
Always close the doors during the work shift.

WARNING
Passengers may only be carried in the cab provided
that there is a seat available for passengers. Do not
carry passengers on the machine outside the cab or
on the load.
Risk of personal injury!
A passenger in the cab must use a permanently
mounted extra passenger seat and seatbelt.
WARNING
The cab is equipped with longitudinal sliding, manual
or hydraulic ( ). The cab must ALWAYS be in the rear
position while operating the machine.
Warning - risk of crushing!
For manual sliding cab, always make sure that the cab
is locked in its rearmost position before operating,
and that the locks on both sides are secured with the
lock pins.
For hydraulic longitudinal displacement, the cab may
be positioned as desired (locking is automatic) when
stationary.
WARNING
The machine's hydraulic system includes accumulators
with high pressure.
Always exercise extreme caution when working
with the hydraulic system and avoid unnecessarily
remaining close to hydraulic components or hoses.
The accumulators must be drained prior to work in the
hydraulic system (see Maintenance manual).
WARNING
Handle batteries and connectors with great care during
charging and boosting (jump starting). Do not mix
up the battery terminals! Follow the instructions for
starting with a booster battery!
Danger of short circuit! Warning - risk of hydrogen gas
forming! Danger of sparks and fire! Hydrogen gas is
very explosive!
Batteries must always be equipped with covers over
terminals and connections. Connect positive terminals
first. Then connect the negative terminals in order to
avoid sparks that could ignite the hydrogen gas.

CAUTION
The machine uses oils and lubricants.
Health hazard in the event of protracted skin contact!
Avoid skin contact with oils and lubricants. Use
protective gloves.
CAUTION
AdBlue can irritate with skin and eye contact and if
inhaled.
Health hazard!
Handle carefully and avoid skin contact, wear
protective gloves. In the event of any contact with
the skin and spillage on clothing, wash the skin with
large quantities of water and change contaminated
clothing and gloves. In the event of eye contact, rinse
thoroughly with water for several minutes and seek
medical advice if necessary. If inhaled, breathe fresh
air and seek medical advice if necessary.
WARNING
Fire extinguishers contain dry chemicals.
Risk of breathing difficulties when using in an enclosed
space!
Use the fire extinguisher from the outside and into the
area to be extinguished. After use, ventilate the space
thoroughly.
CAUTION
Cracks or scratches result in reduced strength of the
roof window.
Low strength!
Replace a damaged roof window immediately.

CAUTION
The parking brake can be used as an EMERGENCY
BRAKE.
Brake shoe linings wear out and lose their braking
performance! Risk of unwanted movement by the
parked machine!
After emergency braking with the parking brake the
brake shoe linings must be checked as soon as
possible and replaced if necessary. Braking action of
the parking brake may be lost as the brake shoe linings
may have been worn down.
If the parking brake has been released mechanically
then it must always be reset to restore the machine's
parking brake function.
WARNING
Optional equipment such as two-way radio, remote
control door opener, etc. may emit non-ionising
radiation. Such equipment transmits within the
frequency band 100 - 500 MHz.
Danger of interference to active medical devices (e.g.
pacemakers).
Do not use two-way radios, remote control door
opener, etc. when someone with an implanted active
medical device is in the cab.
NOTE
Cargotec will not assume any responsibility for installed optional
equipment, which is not installed by Cargotec or an installer
approved by Cargotec.

18 2 Safety – Fire
2.5 Fire
Action in the event of fire
DANGER
In the event of fire the operator's safety must not be
compromised.
If given the opportunity, take the following action at
the slightest sign of fire:
1. Stop the machine and turn the ignition key to stop
position.
2. Leave the cab.
3. Switch off the system voltage with the battery
disconnector.
4. Alert the rescue services.
5. Try to extinguish the fire.
If this is not possible, leave the machine and the
risk area.
DANGER
Smoke can be extremely toxic.
Smoke subdues, suffocates and can kill people!
Smoke can cause damage to lungs and respiratory
organs even in small quantities.
Avoid breathing fumes, do not stand in the smoke.
Use breathing apparatus for fire fighting and work
with burnt material.

2 Safety – Fire 19
Fire prevention measures
DANGER
Residue from fuel, oils, grease or other flammable
materials on the engine or in the engine compartment
is a fire hazard.
Fire hazard!
Remove residue of flammable materials in the engine
compartment as soon as they are detected. Be extra
careful on hot surfaces such as exhaust systems,
manifolds or turbochargers. If leakage of oil, fuel or
coolant is detected, the reason should be investigated
and the fault corrected before starting the engine.
Make it a habit to make a visual inspection of the engine and engine

compartment during the daily inspection. This helps to quickly detect
if anything abnormal has happened or is about to happen. Look
particularly closely for oil, fuel, AdBlue or coolant leakage, loose bolts,
worn or poorly tensioned drive belts, loose connections, damaged
hoses and electrical cables. The inspection only takes a few minutes
and can prevent serious faults and costly repairs.
CAUTION
High-pressure washing of sensitive components may
lead to short-circuiting and cause malfunction.
Product damage!
Do not use a high-pressure washer on the cab, radiator,
battery compartment, electric components, control
units, connectors, cable joints, cylinder seals, stub
axles, axle seals and chains.
Action after fire

When handling a machine damaged by fire, or exposed to excessive
heat, the following safety regulations must always be followed:
• Check that the fire has been fully extinguished. Re-extinguish if
necessary.
• Make sure that system voltage is switched off with the battery
disconnector.
• Make sure that the machine is in a secure location, service position.
• Check for that there are no leaks which could cause damage to
the surrounding environment.
• Never touch the burned components with bare hands in order to
avoid coming into contact with molten polymer material.
• Use breathing apparatus, thick gloves and protective safety
goggles.
• Contact Cargotec.

20 3 Overview
3 Overview
3.1 Description
General
Machine DRG 420-450 is a reachstacker for handling containers
and trailer goods (with bottom lift attachment). It has a maximum lift
capacity from 42 to 45 tonnes, depending on machine model, and a
lifting height of 5 or 6 containers (9'6" container).
3.1.1 Identification of the machine

Type designation of reachstacker
Each machine from Cargotec has a type designation. Example: Type
designation DRG 450-65S5XS indicates the following:
• D - Diesel engine
• R - Reachstacker
• G – Generation
• 450 - Lift capacity, 1st row, decitonne
• 65 – Axle distance, decimetre
• S – Spreading, adjustable top lift
• 5 - Max. no. of containers when stacking
• X – Extra counterweight
• S – Support jacks
• HC - High Cube, stacking of 6 high with 9'6” containers
• Z - Lift hook
Machine card
Cargotec machines are adaptable in different ways with product
alternatives and optional equipment. This is in order to satisfy as broad
a customer base as possible.
A machine card is supplied together with the spare parts catalogue.

The machine card contains complete specifications of the machine's
product alternatives and optional equipment.
The machine card must be updated when the machine is modified

and Cargotec must be informed.

3 Overview – Overview description 21
3.1.2 Overview description

General
This section provides a short presentation of the machine's parts, which
are pointed out in the overview figure below.
1. Steering axle 5. Attachment

2. Engine 6. Boom
3. Transmission 7. Cab
4. Drive axle
Engine
The engine is a straight 6-cylinder turbocharged low emission engine
with intercooler. The engine provides the power for propulsion and
hydraulics.
The machine is equipped with one of the following engine options:

• Volvo TAD1151VE Stage 3A/Tier 3
• Volvo TAD1171VE Stage 4/Tier 4f
• Volvo TAD1172VE Stage 4/Tier 4f
• Cummins QSM11 Stage 3A/Tier 3
Transmission
The transmission is fully automatic with torque converter. It has 5
forward gears and 3 reverse gears. The hydraulic pumps for working
hydraulics are mounted on the transmission.
The machine is equipped with one of the following transmission

alternatives:
• ZF 5WG261
• ZF 5WG311
Drive axle
The drive axle (front axle) is equipped with a differential and hub
reductions of the planetary gear type.

22 3 Overview – Overview description
Brakes
The machine has a brake circuit and is equipped with hydraulically
operated brakes. The brake units consist of fully enclosed oil-cooled
disc brakes with external cooling.
The parking brake is electro-hydraulically operated and brakes with a
disc brake. The disc brake acts on the drive axle's input shaft. The
parking brake is applied by spring force and released by hydraulic
pressure. Parking brake application is automatic if the ignition key
lock is switched off.
Steering
The machine is steered with the rear axle. A double-acting hydraulic
cylinder acts on the wheel pair. The steering is linear, that is, the
steering angle is dependent on the number of steering wheel turns.
Load handling
The boom and attachment are used for load handling. The boom is
operated vertically (angle) and longitudinally (length).
The attachment is available in different versions. The attachment holds
the load secure. Securing the load and operating the attachment takes
place electro-hydraulically.
One of the following alternatives is selected for the machine:
• Top lift attachment.
• Top lift-attachment with hydraulic levelling .
• Top lift attachment with overheight legs .
• Bottom lift-attachment (for handling both containers and trailers)
.
• Tool changer (handles load handling with different subattachments)
.
• Lift hook .
• Extended tilt function top lift-attachment .
Electrical system
The electrical system consists of electrical and electromagnetic
components such as battery, switches, cable harnesses, solenoid
valves, fuses and relays.
Control system
The machine has a computer-based control and monitoring system for
monitoring and controlling the machine's functions as well as handling
all functions in the machine, such as power electronics, drivetrain and
hydraulic system. The control system facilitates maintenance and
troubleshooting.
Cab
The cab is available in one version. Controls, instrumentation and
equipment are based on common modules whose functions are
customisable.
The cab consists of a supporting frame to withstand falling objects in
accordance with applicable standards. It is equipped with filtered inlet,
recirculation as well as heating or air conditioning.
The roof window is made of high-strength material and withstands
heavy blows, e.g. from falling objects.
The cab can be moved longitudinally, either manually or hydraulically
( ). As an alternative to longitudinal displacement, the cab can be
vertically adjusted hydraulically ( ).

3 Overview – Overview description 23
Hydraulic system
The hydraulic system is divided in two parts, working hydraulics and
brake system.
The working hydraulics include hydraulics for steering, load handling

and cab functions. The working hydraulics are supplied from two
variable load-sensing axial piston pumps (a single pump and a double
pump) and a fixed gear pump for cleaning and cooling the hydraulic oil.
The hydraulic oil is cleaned with a low-pressure filter in the hydraulic
tank and/or high pressure filter ( ) after the hydraulic pumps.
The brake system is separated from the working hydraulics with its own
tank, fixed gear-pump, high-pressure filter, accumulators and cooler.
Other equipment
Standard equipment
1. Interior lighting 10. Door handle for cab instep

2. Wiper, roof 11. Bottle holder in left-hand door side.
3. Interior rear view mirror Mesh pocket in right-hand door side; storage compartment
4. Wiper, windscreen 12. Storage compartment in right-hand arm rest
5. Steering wheel console with three individually 13. Cover lid
adjustable shafts with electrically adjustable height
14. Work lights attachment, 2 lights
position
15. Work lights boom, 2 lights
6. Storage compartment in front panel.
16. Work lights cab roof, 2 lights
Cup holder for storage compartment in the front
panel. The cup holder can be mounted in any storage 17. Revolving beacon
compartment.
18. Reverse alarm (right-hand side)
7. Storage compartment for paper in the seat console
19. Opening window right and left-hand door
The operator's manual is stored in the rear compartment
20. Tinted laminated windscreen
on the seat.
21. Steps and hand rail for entry to the cab with non-slip
8. Work console with four individually adjustable shafts
plate on the steps and lower edge of the door sill
with electrically adjustable height and length position
22. External rear view mirrors
9. Refrigerated storage compartment right-hand side front
panel 23. Horn

24 3 Overview – Overview description
Optional equipment
1. Audio system 18. Revolving beacon

2. Sun visor, rear window 19. Work lights bottom lift attachment, 2 lights
3. Sun visor, roof window 20. Rear view mirrors fitted above the front wings
4. Location for two-way radio 21. Extra work lights front wings, 2 or 4 lights
5. Combined wiper, windscreen and roof 22. Extra work lights boom, 2 lights
6. Sun visor, front windscreen 23. Timer diesel heater
7. Display for fire extinguishing system 24. Mud flaps, front and rear
8. Writing table with light 25. Raised air intake with pre-cleaner
9. Socket 12/24 VDC or 5V USB 4 pcs 26. Central lubrication, machine
10. Extra cup holder for the storage compartment in the Central lubrication attachment (right-hand side)
front panel
27. Noise insulation under engine compartment
11. Seat for passenger with 2-point seat belt, to the left
28. Lockable tank cap
of the driver's seat
29. Fire extinguisher
12. Back-up camera with monitor
30. Auxiliary heater (electrical connection)
Distance warning function for back-up camera
Equipment kit 1: start interlock, engine and cab heater
Camera at boom nose (Not shown in the figure.)
Equipment kit 2: start interlock, engine and cab heater,
Camera at twistlocks (Not shown in the figure.)
tank warmer hydraulics and brake system
Camera at lift shoe (for bottom lift) (Not shown in the
31. Steps and hand rail by the mudguard
figure.)
32. Electrically powered loud air horn
13. Storage compartment behind the driver's seat console
33. Extra work lights attachment, 2 lights
14. Printer 34. Radio control (Not shown in the figure.)
15. Air-suspension driver's seat with 3-point seat belt and 35. Pause heater (Not shown in figure)
electrical heating
36. Tool box (Not shown in figure.)
Head rest
37. Non-slip plate on tank and wings (Not shown in
Arm rest left-hand side figure)
16. Alcolock
17. Emergency hammer for evacuation through the rear
windscreen

3 Overview – Plates 25
3.2 Plates
Product plates Europe
The following shows what product plates should be fitted on the
machine when operating in Europe. When ordering spare parts and in
case of enquiries always state model designation and serial number
in accordance with the plates. The plates' part numbers are stated
on each respective plate.
1. Machine plate (example), A54516.XXXX

T = Machine type
M = Machine model
S/N = Serial number/Year of manufacture
Q = Machine's classed lift capacity acc. ISO3691-2
P = Engine power
W = Machine's operating weight (without load)
L = Distance between leading edge of wheels and load's centre of
gravity
H = Classed lifting height
013981
Field H and L indicate how big a load the machine can handle at a
specified attachment height (H) and distance from the machine's
leading edge (L).
Machine plate can only be ordered with complete engraving.
2. Type plate for attachment (example)
Weight = Attachment weight.
Type = Attachment type
Serial No. = Serial number.
Manufacturing Year = Year of manufacture.
Type plate can only be ordered with complete engraving.
3. Additional plate for optional equipment (example), A54516.XXXX

Plate design depends on type of optional equipment. The example
plate is for a machine with support jacks.
M = Machine model
S/N= Serial number/Year of manufacture.
gravity
013982

leading edge (L).
Plate can only be ordered with complete engraving.

26 3 Overview – Plates
Additional plate for the lifting tool, A33607.2200

plate is for a machine with lift tongs.
M = Machine model
gravity
leading edge (L).
Additional plate for the lifting tool and optional equipment, A33607.2300
plate is for a machine with lift tongs and support jacks.
M = Machine model
gravity
leading edge (L).

Warning and information plates

The following figures show the warning texts and information texts
that are located on the machine. The operator must be aware of the
warnings and should also follow the instructions and information given
on the plates.
Make sure warning and information symbols on the machine and its
components are always easy to see and are legible. Plates that have
been damaged, illegible or painted over must be replaced immediately.
Frame, cab
Frame, cab
1. Lift point, 423049.0100
Attaching point for lifting device when lifting the machine and boom.
For lifting the machine (1a):
• front part of frame
000276
• rear part of frame by boom mounting

For lifting boom (1b):
• front part of boom
• rear part of boom
2. Transport lock A38769.0100.
Fastening point for machine transport lock.
016612

3. Warning! A26939.0100
Warning! Read the operator's manual for information.
Emergency lowering, see section 6.2.10 Hydraulic system for
information.
Boom removal and installation, see section 7.2.2 Transporting the
machine for information.
000277
4. Functions, control lever, A61054.xxxx
5. Warning! A55488.0100
Emergency cab lowering.
011834
6. Warning! A55488.0300
Lock for vertically adjustable cab.
014505
7. Warning! A30536.0300
No passengers allowed. Passengers may only travel in the cab
provided that it is equipped with a permanently mounted passenger
seat.
000280
8. Warning! A30770.0100
Air conditioning. Filling of refrigerant requires special competence
and authorisation (follow national legislation and local rules).
000281

9. Warning! A30770.0200
Air conditioning. Located on right frame member.
Filling of refrigerant requires special competence and authorisation
(follow national legislation and local rules).
000282
10. Warning! A54527.0200
Air conditioning. Filling of refrigerant requires special competence
and authorisation (follow national legislation and local rules).
1 = Refrigerant, type
2 = Amount, kg
3 = Pressure, bar
1
2
014528
11. Warning! A30531.0200

Risk of crushing.
005225
12. Plate for non-ionising radiation, A57336.0100 .

Must be fitted on machines equipped with two-way radio or other
form of customised optional equipment in the cab that may emit
non-ionising radiation. The sign can be ordered from Cargotec if
necessary.
012968
Safety
Safety
13. Warning! A32442.0100
Do not jump. Always stay in the machine when there is a risk of
roll-over and hold on to the steering wheel.
000284
Electrical system
Electrical system
14. Plate battery voltage, A30534.0200
Switch off the battery voltage (with battery disconnector) when
removing/installing boom. Otherwise sparks and short-circuiting
may occur.
001979
A30534.0200

Engine
Engine
15. Filling point, fuel, 450202.0100
000286
450202.0100
16. Filling point, AdBlue (filler cap)
17. Warning! A30530.0100

Rotating fan.
000287
18. Warning! A30532.0100

Hot surfaces.
000288
19. Warning! Filling point, coolant, A57775.0100

Use only ready-mixed recommended coolant.
013692
20. Filling point, engine oil, A32439.0600

Power transmission, wheels
Power transmission, wheels

21. Filling point, transmission oil, A32439.0700
22. Inflation pressure, factory-fitted tyres

A32049.0100 1.0 MPa
000290
NOTE
Read chapter 6 Inspection and maintenance regarding safety when
handling wheels.
If factory-fitted tyres are replaced with another tyre brand then only
the equivalent tyre size must be fitted, designed for the same air
pressure and approved for use on the product.
23. Warning! A57480.0300

Risk of explosion when working with tyres and rims, see section
6.2.11 Tyres and rims for information.
Brake system
Brake system
24. Filling point, oil for brake system, 450203.0100
000292
Hydraulic system
Hydraulic system
25. Filling point hydraulic oil, 450203.0100
000292

26. Pressure hydraulics, A54518 (example below)

Indication of the machine's set pressures. The figures are
engraved.
27. Warning! A30529.0100

Pressure. Always release the pressure from the accumulators
before working on the hydraulic system.
Work with the hydraulic system shall always be performed by
authorised personnel!
000294
Attachment
Attachment
28. Warning! A30533.0200
Rotating parts.
000853
29. Warning! A32440.0100

Do not walk or stand under a suspended load.
000296

4 Instruments and controls 33
4 Instruments and controls

General
Do not operate the machine before you know the position and function
of instruments and controls, and completely understand how they are
used!
This chapter gives general information about instruments, switches,

controls and other equipment in the machine's cab.
NOTE
Thoroughly read the following chapter about instruments and
controls.
Cab overview
1. Travel direction selector and parking brake 8. Right-hand dashboard panel, rear section
2. Multi-function lever 9. Arm rest and storage box
3. Steering wheel 10. Driver's seat
4. Steering wheel panel 11. Accelerator
5. Display with function keys 12. Brake pedals
6. Right-hand dashboard panel, front section 13. Joystick or mini steering wheel
7. Right-hand dashboard panel, centre section
Rear cab section, see Rear cab section, page 36.
Roof panel cab, see Roof panel, page 36.

34 4 Instruments and controls – Instruments and controls
Steering wheel panel
Steering wheel panel

14. Ignition key lock
14
21 22 23 30 16 17 15. Engine start and stop button
16. Indicator light, parking brake
17. Indicator light, high beams
18
18. Indicator light for active errors
24 19
19. Indicator light for direction indicators
25 20 20. Warning lamp, by-pass of safety system
21. Switch for windscreen wiper, windscreen, continuous
26
Switch for combined windscreen wiper, windscreen/roof window,
continuous
012692
27 28 29 32 31 33 15 22. Switch for windscreen wiper, windscreen, intermittent wiping
Steering wheel panel Switch for combined windscreen wiper, windscreen/roof window,
intermittent wiping
23. Switch for windscreen flusher
24. Switch for windscreen wiper, roof, intermittent wiping
25. Switch, windscreen wiper roof, continuous
26. Switch, windscreen wiper rear, continuous
27. Switch for windscreen wiper, rear, intermittent wiping
28. Light sensor
29. No function
30. Switch for manual shifting up
31. Switch for manual shifting down
32. Switch for automatic shifting
33. Travel direction indicator, Forward Neutral Reverse
Right-hand dashboard panel, front section
34 35 36 37 38 39 40 34. Control breaker for hydraulics

43
35. Switch for pause heater
36. Recirculation switch
37. Switch for defroster
38. Switch for reduced fan speed
41 42 44 45 46 39. Switch for automatic regulation of air conditioning

40. Switch for increased fan speed
41. Switch for increased temperature
42. Switch for reduced temperature
012693
43. Switch for cooling

47 48 49 50 51 52 44. Switch for air distribution, to the floor
45. Switch for air distribution, to the operator
46. Switch for air distribution, to the roof
47. Switch for by-pass of safety system
48. Switch for heated rear view mirror
Switch for heated rear windscreen
49. Control lever for electrically-operated mirrors
50. Switch, support jacks
51. Spare
52. Switch for audio system mute

4 Instruments and controls – Instruments and controls 35
Right-hand control panel, centre section
Right-hand control panel, centre section

53. Control lever
a Travel direction selector, Forward - Neutral - Reverse
b Control for side shift / spreading / rotation / tilt ( )
c Switch to open the twistlocks
d Switch for alternative function
e Switch for tilt lock
f Switch for levelling lock
54. Switch for radio control
55. Switch, bottom lift attachment, front legs
56. Switch, bottom lift attachment, rear legs
57. Switch for automatic spreading 20'-40'
Right-hand dashboard panel, centre section 58. Switch for 30'-stop
59. Spare
60. Switch for twistlocks, automatic/manual
61. Switch, bottom lift attachment, clamping position
Switch for lowering overheight legs
62. Cab movement switch
63. Spare
64. Switch for horn
Right-hand control panel, rear section
Right-hand control panel, rear section

65. Switch for work lights on cab
66. Switch for work lights on boom
67. Switch for work lights on attachment
68. Switch for extra work lights on frame
69. Switch for back-up light
70. Switch for length adjustment of the right-hand control panel
71. Switch for height adjustment of steering wheel
When the service menus are active, the buttons can be used for
selecting up/down in the menus.
72. Switch for height adjustment of the right-hand control panel
When the service menus are active, the buttons can be used for
selecting right/left in the menus.
73. Function keys and navigation wheel for control system
74. Switch for headlights
75. Switch, interior lighting
76. Switch, revolving beacon
77. Switch for flashing hazard lights
Right-hand dashboard panel, rear section and display

36 4 Instruments and controls – Instruments and controls
Rear cab section
Rear cab section

78. Cover lid
79. Electronic box with fuses and relays
Connector VDI
80. Key lock, by pass
81. Tag reader for operator identification
82. Timer diesel heater
Rear cab section

Roof panel
Roof panel
83. Light sensor
84. Indicator light, lowered support jacks
85. Indicator light for locked twistlocks
86. Indicator light, contact
Roof panel 87. Indicator light for unlocked twistlocks
Control for load handling

For more information on controls for load handling and their functions,
see Operator's manual section 4.6 Load handling.

4 Instruments and controls – Warning and indicator lights 37
4.1 Warning and indicator lights

General
This section describes the warning lamps and indicator lights in the
cab. They indicate the status of subsystems/systems. An illuminated
warning lamp should be attended to immediately. An illuminated
indicator light informs of imminent action.
Warning lamps and indicator lights are grouped in the steering wheel
panel. The brightness of the lamps is adjusted according to the
ambient lighting conditions. All lamps light up briefly when the ignition
is switched on .
Numbers in brackets refer to the positions in Cab overview, page 33.
Indicator light, parking brake (16)

The light (red) is activated when the parking brake is applied.
If the indicator light flashes, the parking brake has been applied
000311
automatically (not by the operator) when the machine has stopped,

or released by the operator without the service brake pedal being
depressed.
The service brake pedal must be pressed down and the lever moved to
the released position to release the parking brake, provided that the
brake system is adequately pressurised.
To activate the parking brake it is sufficient to move the lever to the
position for applying the parking brake.
The service brake must be activated when the parking brake is
released otherwise the indicator light for the parking brake flashes
(position 16) and the event menu is displayed, see Event menu release
the parking brake, description, page 91.
Indicator light, high beams (17)
The light (blue) is activated when the high beams are on.
000309
Indicator light for active error codes (18)

The indicator light (orange) shows that the control system has one or
more active error codes.
000299
Indicator light, direction indicators (19)

The lamp (green) flashes when the direction indicators or hazard lights
are on.
000310
Warning lamp, by-pass of safety system (20)

The warning light (orange) shows the by-pass of safety functions.
NOTE
000300
By-pass takes place as long as the switch for by-pass of safety

system (position 47) is activated.

38 4 Instruments and controls – Warning and indicator lights
Travel direction indicator, Forward Neutral

Reverse (33)
Travel direction indicator for F (Forward), N (Neutral) or R (Reverse)
is activated to indicate the selected direction.
000403
Indicator light, lowered support jacks (84)
000315 The indicator light (green) is switched on when the support jacks are
fully lowered.
Indicator light for locked twistlocks (85)

The indicator light (green) is activated when the twistlocks are locked
and with that the load.
000312
Indicator light, contact (86)

The indicator light (orange) is activated when the attachment has
contact with the load.
012697
Indicator light for unlocked twistlocks (87)

The indicator light (red) is switched on when the twistlocks are unlocked
and release the load.
000314

4 Instruments and controls – Ignition key lock and start and stop button for the engine 39
4.2 Ignition key lock and start and

stop button for the engine
General
This section describes starting and stopping the engine.
Ignition key lock function
0 Ignition voltage and drivetrain are switched off, the key can
be removed.
Voltage to certain functions such as interior lighting, pause
heater, alcolock and standby voltage control units.
I Ignition voltage switched on and drivetrain activated for
starting.
016968
14. Ignition
Start and stop button's function

The start button is used to engage the starter and is held down until
the engine starts. The ignition must be in the I position in order for
the start button to work. The engine can also be stopped by holding
the button down for one second.
NOTE
The machine is equipped with an electric restart interlock, which
prevents engagement of the starter motor when the engine is
rotating.
Conditions for the starter motor to engage are that the transmission
is in neutral position and that the engine is not already running.
012816
15
15. Start button

40 4 Instruments and controls – Ignition key lock and start and stop button for the engine
Alcolock function
The machine may be equipped with an alcolock. In order to start the

machine the operator must blow into the alcolock, which then measures
the alcohol content in the breath. A successful breath test permits
the machine to be started.
For information about handling statistics, maintenance, etc., see the

manufacturer's instructions.
016631
Alcolock

4 Instruments and controls – Switches 41
4.3 Switches
General
This section describes the switches in the cab. Each switch controls
a function.
The switches on the panels have white pilot lights that change to
a green or red function light when the function is activated. The
brightness of the switches is adjusted according to the ambient lighting
conditions. All function lights in the switches light up briefly when the
ignition is switched on. Only the functions that are available on the
machine will display a white pilot light followed by a function light.
A white light in a switch indicates a function that can be activated.

The switch changes colour when a function is activated. When the
colour has changed to green, this indicates that the function has been
switched on.
Switch for combined windscreen wiper,

windscreen/roof window, continuous (21)
Switch (green) for combined windscreen wiper on the front

012705
windscreen/roof window. Continuous wiping. Wiping stops when the

operator leaves the seat. Reactivated when the operator sits in the
driver's seat.
Wiping windscreen/roof window activated/deactivated with the press

of a button.
The switch is connected in parallel with the Switch, windscreen wiper

roof, continuous (position 25).
NOTE
Do not use the wipers on dry or dirty windscreens without first
activating the windscreen washers. The roof window is especially
sensitive to scratching and can be damaged by dry wiping.
Switch for windscreen wiper, windscreen,

continuous (21)
Switch (green) for the windscreen wiper on the front windscreen.
Continuous wiping. Wiping stops when the operator leaves the seat.
Reactivated when the operator sits in the driver's seat.
012705
Wiping windscreen is activated/deactivated with the press of a button.
NOTE

42 4 Instruments and controls – Switches
Switch for combined windscreen wiper,

windscreen/roof window, intermittent (22)
Switch (green) for combined windscreen wiper on the front
012706
windscreen/roof window. Intermittent wiping. Wiping stops when the
operator leaves the seat. Reactivated when the operator sits in the
driver's seat.
Intermittent wiping windscreen/roof window activated/deactivated with

the press of a button.
The event menu appears when intermittent wiper mode is activated,

see Event menu intermittent wiper, description, page 93.
Two time intervals can be selected:

• Short interval - one press of the button.
• Long interval - a further press of the button.
• Switch off - a further press of the button.
The switch is connected in parallel with the Switch, windscreen wiper

roof, intermittent (position 24).
NOTE
Switch for windscreen wiper, windscreen,

intermittent (22)
Switch (green) for the windscreen wiper on the front windscreen.
Intermittent wiping. Wiping stops when the operator leaves the seat.
Reactivated when the operator sits in the driver's seat.
012706
Intermittent wiping windscreen is activated/deactivated with the press

of a button.


NOTE

Switch for windscreen flusher (23)

Switch (green) for washing the screens. Washing occurs in the screens
where the wiper is activated.
012707
Pressing the button when no wipers are activated activates the front
wipers or the combined wipers on the front windscreen/roof window
and washing on each screen.
Wiping temporarily changes over to continuous wiping with window

flushing.
Windscreen washing is active as long as the button is pressed down.
Event menu appears with a low washer fluid level, see Event menu low
washer fluid level, description, page 90.
NOTE
Switch, windscreen wiper roof, interval (24)

Switch (green) for windscreen wiper on roof window. Intermittent
wiping. Wiping stops when the operator leaves the seat. Reactivated
when the operator sits in the driver's seat.
012715
Intermittent wiping is activated/deactivated with the press of a button.


The switch is connected in parallel with the Switch for combined

windscreen wipers front windscreen/roof window, intermittent (22).
NOTE
Switch, windscreen wiper roof, continuous (25)

Switch (green) for windscreen wiper on roof window. Continuous
012714
Wiping is activated/deactivated with the press of a button.
The switch is connected in parallel with the Switch for combined

windscreen wipers front windscreen/roof window, continuous (21).
NOTE

Switch, windscreen wiper rear, continuous (26)

Switch (green) for windscreen wiper on rear window. Continuous
012713
Wiping is activated/deactivated with the press of a button.
NOTE
Switch, windscreen wiper rear, interval (27)

Switch (green) for windscreen wiper on rear window. Intermittent
012712
Intermittent wiping is activated/deactivated with the press of a button.

NOTE
Switch for manual shifting up (30)

Switch (green) to shift up one gear. Shifting up takes place from
the current gear. If automatic shifting is selected, it is automatically
switched off if the switch for manual shifting up or down is activated.
012708
At the same time the switch colour for manual shifting up and down
goes from white to green.
The current gear is shown in the operating menu.
Switch for manual shifting down (31)

Switch (green) to choose to shift down one gear. Shifting down takes
place from the current gear. If automatic shifting is selected, it is
automatically switched off if the switch for manual shifting up or down
012709
is activated. At the same time the switch colour for manual shifting up
and down goes from white to green.
Downshift is activated with the press of a button. Manual shifting is

activated.
The current gear is shown in the operating menu.
Switch for automatic shifting (32)

Switch (green) for selecting automatic shifting.
Automatic shifting is activated by pressing a button. Feature automatic

012710
shifting is disabled if the switch for manual shifting up or shifting down

is activated.

Switch for pause heater (35)
Switch (green) for pause heater. The cab fan emits heat from the
012716
engine's cooling system during short-term parking of the machine.
Instructions for use:

a. Park the machine. Let the engine idle.
b. Set desired temperature (position 41, 42).
c. Press in the switch for pause heater (position 35).
d. Switch off the ignition with the ignition key lock.
The pause heater is now activated and strives to maintain preset
temperature for the cab.
If the cab temperature drops down to the set temperature, or pause
heater has been running for the preset time, the pause heater
stops running when the engine's cooling system can no longer
deliver the heat needed.
NOTE
The higher the preset cab temperature, the shorter the operating
time for the pause heater.
Recirculation switch (36)

Recirculation switch (green) If this function is activated, air circulates
inside the compartment without fresh air being taken from outside and
is used to prevent bad air, or unpleasant odours from entering the cab.
012717
Recirculation is activated/deactivated with the press of a button.
Switch for defroster (37)

The switch (green) for the defroster can be used to quickly demist the
windscreens. When the defroster is activated the function controls fan,
temperature and damper position.
012718
The defroster is activated/deactivated by pressing a button or with any

of the other switches for the system. The defroster function switches
off automatically.
Switch for reduced fan speed (38)

Switch (green) to lower fan speed in the cab. When the fan speed
is controlled with the switch the automatic fan control is disengaged.
The automatic function is reactivated with the switch for automatic
regulation of air conditioning (position 39).
012719
Reduced fan speed is activated with the press of a button.
The fan speed is displayed in the operating menu.
The event menu appears when the fan speed drops, see Event menu
raise/lower fan speed, description, page 91.

Switch for automatic regulation of air conditioning

(39)
Switch (green) for automatic fan speed control, temperature control
and air distribution in the cab. With AUTO mode enabled, the control
system attempts to maintain the temperature set on the display. Fan
012720
speed, temperature control and air distribution in the cab take place
automatically.
Automatic regulation is reactivated with the press of a button if manual

control is selected with the buttons for air distribution or fan speed.
Temperature setting and fan speed are shown in the operating menu.
Switch for increased fan speed (40)

Switch (green) to increase the fan speed in the cab. When the
fan speed is controlled with the switch the automatic fan control is
disengaged. The automatic function is reactivated with the switch for
automatic regulation of air conditioning (position 39).
012721
Increased fan speed is activated with the press of a button.
The fan speed is displayed in the operating menu.
The event menu appears when the fan speed increases, see Event
menu raise/lower fan speed, description, page 91.
Switch for increased temperature (41)

Switch (red) to increase the cab temperature. Setting takes place in
steps of 0.5 °C.
012723
Temperature increase is activated with the press of a button.
The temperature range is 16 °C to 28 °C. Setting of max. temperature

switches off automatic climate control (control of fan, heat and air
distribution) and sets the heat valve in the max. position.
If necessary, cab air is cooled or heated to the set temperature.
Desired cab temperature is displayed in the operating menu.
The event menu appears when the cab temperature is increased,

Event menu raise/lower cab temperature, description, page 91.
Switch for reduced temperature (42)

Switch (blue) to decrease the cab temperature. Setting takes place in
steps of 0.5 °C.
012722
Temperature decrease is activated with the press of a button.
The temperature range is 16 °C to 28 °C. Setting of min. temperature

switches off automatic climate control (control of fan, heat and air
distribution) and sets the heat valve in the min. position.
If necessary, cab air is cooled or heated to the set temperature.
Desired cab temperature is displayed in the operating menu.
The event menu appears when the cab temperature is decreased,

Event menu raise/lower cab temperature, description, page 91.

Switch for cooling (43)

Cooling function switch (green).
Cooling is activated/deactivated with the press of a button.
012727
The system's cooling function does not start if the fan is switched off or
if the doors are open. The fan stops after a short period if the doors are
opened. If the doors are not closed after a further short period then the
cooling compressor will also be switched off.
Switch for air distribution, to the floor (44)

Switch (green) for air distribution, to the floor. When the air distribution
is controlled with the switch the automatic air distribution is disengaged.
012724
Air distribution toward the floor is activated/deactivated by pressing a
button. The air distribution can be combined toward the floor, operator
and roof.
Switch for air distribution to the operator (45)

Switch (green) for air distribution to the operator. When the air
distribution is controlled with the switch the automatic air distribution is
disengaged. The automatic function is reactivated with the switch for
012725
automatic regulation of air conditioning (position 39).

Air distribution to the operator is activated/deactivated with a press
of the button. The air distribution can be combined toward the floor,
operator and roof.
Switch for air distribution to the roof (46)

Switch (green) for air distribution to the roof. When the air distribution is
controlled with the switch the automatic air distribution is disengaged.
012726

Air distribution toward the roof is activated/deactivated by pressing a
button. The air distribution can be combined toward the floor, operator
and roof.
Switch for by-pass of safety system (47)

Bypassing the machine's safety features. Rocker switch.
As an option, the by pass can be equipped with a code lock or key lock
012733
for certain functions . Refer to the detailed description, see Bypass

0 1 with code lock, page 48.
The operator may, if the situation so requires, disconnect all safety
features on the machine.
Position 0, normal function.
Position 1, bypass of the safety system permits the following:
• Lowering of load in the event of overload.
• Locking or opening of twistlocks without full contact.
• Spreading 20'-40' with locked twistlocks.
• Lifting without indication of locked or open twistlocks.
• Bottom lift without full contact.
• Lifting past height limitation on machines with limited lifting height,
see Height limitation, page 193.
The machine's overload system can still limit the lifting height.
• Rotation of attachment free of machine with rotation stop, see
Rotation stop, page 185.

• Side shift of attachment free of machine with side shift stop, see
Side shift stop, page 184.
• Controlling the load outside the LC-range (load centre) on
machines with LC-limitation, see LC-limitation, page 193.
The machine's overload system can still limit load position in
relation to the machine.
• Selection of travel direction without the sensor in the driver’s seat
indicating that someone is sitting in the seat, speed is limited to
10 km/h.
(The machine adopts neutral position when no one is sitting in
the driver’s seat.)
• Release of the parking brake in the event of a fault in the parking
brake or without the sensor in the driver’s seat indicating that
someone is sitting in the seat.
• Use of load handling functions at reduced speed without the sensor
in the driver’s seat indicating that someone is sitting in the seat.
Warning lamp for by-pass (position 20), shows when the by-pass of
safety features is activated.
WARNING
Safety features are blocked.
No safety system is engaged!
Only use bypass in emergency situations!
WARNING
By-pass of load handling functions must not be used
during normal load handling.
damage.
Only use the bypass in emergency situations.
Bypass with code lock
Bypass with code lock means a code must be entered via the display
when certain functions are to be bypassed. The functions that can
have a code lock are divided into five groups Service technicians can
activate or disable the code lock for each group individually.
The right code must be entered in the service and settings menu in
order to activate the bypass, see 5.6.5 Menu for services and settings,
page 210. When the menus are unlocked the bypass works for all
functions.
By pass with key
By pass with key means that you can use a key to by pass certain
functions. These functions are divided into different groups. Service
technicians can activate or disable the key lock for each group
individually.
To activate the by pass, the key must be inserted in the lock and
turned. Following which, the normal switch for by-pass (position 47)
can be used to by-pass key activated functions.

Switch for electrically heated rear view mirrors

(48)
Switch (green) for electrically heated rear view mirrors. Rocker switch.
012792
0 1 Position 0 – Function for electrically heated rear view mirrors
deactivated.
Position 1 - The function electrically-heated rear view mirrors is

activated for a preset time.
If both the machine and cab are equipped with electrically heated
mirrors all of these are activated with the same switches.
If the cab is equipped with electrically heated mirrors and screens the
functions are activated with the same switches.
The event menu appears when the electrically heated mirrors

are activated and deactivated, see Event menu heating rear view
mirrors/rear windscreen, description, page 92.
Switch for electrically heated rear windscreen (48)
Switch (green) for electrically heated rear windscreen. Rocker switch.

012792
0 1 Position 0 – The function for rear windscreen heating is deactivated.
Position 1 - The function electrically-heated rear windscreen is

activated for a preset time.
If the cab is equipped with electrically heated mirrors and screens the
functions are activated with the same switches.
The event menu appears when the electrically heated rear windscreen
is activated and deactivated, see Event menu heating rear view
mirrors/rear windscreen, description, page 92.
Control lever for electrically-operated mirrors (49)
Control lever for setting the machine's mirrors.
Select left (L) or right (R) mirrors using the control lever.
Set the mirror with the help of the control lever.

015219

Switch for support jacks (50)
Switch (green) for support jacks. Rocker switch. Lowering/raising can

be either manual (the switch must be held depressed throughout the
lowering/raising) or automatic (a short press activates lowering/raising
to end position down or up). The setting can only be changed during a
service.
Position 1 - Support jacks are lowered. When the jacks are lowered,
this is indicated by the indicator light for the support jacks (position 84).
Position 0 – Support jacks are stationary.
Position 2 - Support jacks are raised.
For support jack operation to be permitted requires a number of

conditions to be met, see Support jacks, page 188.
Switch for audio off (audio system) (52)
Switch (green) for audio off in the cab, e.g. dampening of the audio
012731
system's volume.
0 1
Position 0 – Function audio off is deactivated.
Position 1 – Function audio off is activated.
Switch for radio control function (54)
Switch for radio control function. Rocker switch.
The parking brake must be activated before the radio control function
is activated.
Position 0 – Radio control function is deactivated.
Position 1 – Radio control function is activated. Pop-up flashes in the

display.
When the control unit is activated and has contact with the radio control
function, the pop-up changes over to a steady light in the display, see
Radio control, page 196.
Switch, bottom lift attachment, front legs (55)
Switch (green) controls the front legs on the bottom lift attachment.
The front legs hold the load together with the rear pair of legs. Rocker
switch.
Position 1 - Front legs are lowered. The switch must be pressed and
held throughout the movement.
Position 0 – Legs are stationary.
Position 2 - Front legs are raised. The switch must be pressed and
See Instructions for bottom lift attachment, page 174.

Switch, bottom lift attachment, rear legs (56)
Switch (green) controls the rear legs on the bottom lift attachment.
The rear legs hold the load together with the front pair of legs. Rocker
switch.
Position 1 - Rear legs are lowered. The switch must be pressed and
Position 2 - Rear legs are raised. The switch must be pressed and
Switch for automatic spreading 20' to 40' (57)
Switch (yellow) for automatic spreading of attachment to 40'. This

function is used to give automatic spreading of attachment at
instantaneous function selection with the control lever.
To stop an ongoing automatic 20' to 40' spreading, activate spreading

in or out of with the control lever.
Position 0 – Automatic spreading 20' to 40' not activated.
Position 1 – Automatic spreading 20' to 40' is activated. (If the function

for 30' stop is activated, spreading stop takes place .)
See Automatic spreading 20'–40', page 183.
NOTE
Automatic spreading can only be activated with closed doors and
released parking brake.
Switch for spreading stop at 30' (58)
Switch (green) for spreading stop for attachment at 30' or 35'.
This function is used to adjust the spreading of the attachment to the

container size (needs adapted). The distance for the spreading stop is
preset in the control unit.
Dampening comes into force shortly before the preset value for the
stop. In order to continue spreading, repeat the continuous spreading
function with the joystick to the desired position (end position is 40').
Position 0 – Spreading stop not activated.
Position 1 – Spreading stop activated. During the ongoing spreading,

stopping is performed automatically at 30' or 35".

Switch for twistlocks, automatic/manual locking

(60)
Switch (green) for locking the twistlocks. The switch is spring-loaded in
position 2.
Position 1 - Twistlocks are locked automatically when there is contact

with the load. The parking brake must be OFF, see position 1 and
indicator light for parking brake, position 16.
Position 0 - Locking of twistlocks not activated.
Position 2 - Twistlocks are locked manually. Button spring-returns.
See Instructions for top lift attachment, page 173.
Switch, bottom lift attachment, clamping position

(61)
Switch (green) controls clamping position of the leg pairs on the bottom
lift attachment. Rocker switch.
Position 1 - Leg pair releases the load. The switch must be pressed
and held throughout the movement.
Position 2 - Leg pair clamps the load. The switch must be pressed and
Switch for lowering overheight legs (61)
The switch (green) controls the legs on a top lift attachment with
overheight legs. Each leg has a twistlock which must all indicate
unlocked twistlocks, see indicator light for unlocked twistlocks (position
87), to enable operation of the legs. Rocker switch.
Position 1 - Legs are lowered. The switch must be pressed and held
throughout the movement.
Position 2 - Legs are raised. The switch must be pressed and held
See Overheight legs, page 188.

Switch, hydraulic sliding cab (62)
Switch (green), hydraulic sliding cab. Rocker switch. The operator's

door(s) must be closed and the control breaker for hydraulics not
activated.
Position 1 - The cab moves forward. The switch must be pressed and
Position 0 – Cab is stationary.
Position 2 - The cab moves backward. The switch must be pressed

and held throughout the movement.
See Hydraulic sliding cab, page 194.
NOTE
The cab can only be moved if the doors are closed.
Switch for hydraulic vertically adjustable cab (62)
Switch (green) for hydraulic vertically adjustable cab. Rocker switch.

The operator's door(s) must be closed and the control breaker for
hydraulics not activated.
Position 1 - The cab is lowered. The switch must be pressed and held
Position 0 – Cab is stationary.
Position 2 - The cab is raised. The switch must be pressed and held
When the cab is moved from the lowest position, machine speed is
limited to 10 km/h.
See Hydraulic vertically adjustable cab, page 195.
NOTE
The cab can only be moved if the doors are closed.
Switch for horn (64)

Horn switch on the joystick. Rocker switch.
Switch for work lights on cab (65)

Switch (green) for work lights on the cab. Also activates headlights,
rear lights and side running lights.
012760
Work lights on the cab are activated/deactivated with the press of a

button.
Work lights are turned off after idling for 5 minutes, extra work lights
after 2 minutes. Work lights are turned on again at throttle application,
gearshifting or activation of any load handling function.

Switch for work lights on boom (66)

Switch (green) for work lights on the boom. Also activates headlights,
rear lights and side running lights.
012762
Work lights on the boom are activated/deactivated with the press of a
button.
The work lights on the boom are switched off after 5 minutes of running
at idling speed. Work lights are turned on again at throttle application,
Switch for work lights on attachment (67)

Switch (green) for work lights on the attachment. Also activates
headlights, rear lights and side running lights.
012763
Extra work lights are activated/deactivated with the press of a button.
Work lights are turned off after idling for 5 minutes, extra work lights
after 2 minutes. Work lights are turned on again at throttle application,
Switch for extra work lights on frame (68)
Switch (green) for extra work lights on lamp cluster housings on front
012764
mudguards. Also activates headlights, rear lights and side running

lights.
Extra work lights on the frame are activated/deactivated with the press
of a button.
Extra work lights on the frame are switched off after 2 minutes of
running at idling speed. Work lights are turned on again at throttle
application, gearshifting or activation of any load handling function.
Switch for back-up light (69)

Switch (green) for back-up light.
Back-up light is activated/deactivated by pressing the button when

012765
travel direction reverse is selected. The function of the back-up lights

is reset after ignition off/on to be switched on when travel direction
reverse is selected.
Switch for length adjustment of the right-hand

control panel (70)
Switch (white) for length adjustment of the right-hand control panel.
Length adjustment is activated with the press of a button.

012766

Switch for height adjustment of steering wheel

(71)
Switch (white) for height adjustment of steering wheel.
Height adjustment is activated with the press of a button.
012768
Switch for height adjustment of the right-hand
control panel (72)
Switch (white) for height adjustment of the right-hand control panel.
Height adjustment is activated with the press of a button.

012767
Function keys and navigation wheel for control

system (73)
Function keys and navigation wheel for control system, see 4.11
Control system, page 73.
Switch for headlights (74)

Switch (green) for headlights. Also activates tail lights and side running
lights.
012771
The headlights are activated/deactivated with the press of a button.
Switch, interior lighting (75)

Switch (green) for interior lighting in cab.
The lighting is activated/deactivated with the press of a button.

012772
Switch for revolving beacon (76)

Switch (green) for revolving beacon used to attract attention in
connection with hazards.
012773
The revolving beacon is activated/deactivated with the press of a

button.

Switch for flashing hazard lights (77)

Switch (red) for flashing hazard lights used to attract attention in
connection with parking hazard.
012774
The warning beacon is activated/deactivated with the press of a button.

4 Instruments and controls – Travel direction selector and parking brake 57
4.4 Travel direction selector and

parking brake
General
This section describes the travel direction selector (position 1) that is
used to choose the direction and for the parking brake.
1
015215
1. Travel direction selector on steering column
Selecting direction of travel

Travel direction is selected with the travel direction selector on:
F P • steering column
• control lever, see Control lever (53), page 61
• mini-wheel, see Mini-wheel, page 66
• joystick control, see Joystick control, page 67
N The lever is spring-loaded and the selected direction of travel is shown
on the steering wheel panel.
The current gear is shown on the display.
Selecting direction of travel:

• F - Forward. Move the lever forward for forward drive.
015430
R • N - Neutral. Neutral. Move the lever up or down for neutral.

• R - Reverse. Move the lever backward for reverse drive.
Travel direction selector on steering column
Manual up and down shifting is performed using the switches for
manual shifting up (position 30) and manual shifting down (position 31).
Selection of automatic shifting is done with the switch for automatic
shifting (position 32).

58 4 Instruments and controls – Travel direction selector and parking brake
Parking brake
Activation of the parking brake is performed with the travel direction
F P selector. Lift the control upward toward the steering wheel and then
move it forward to the parking braking position. The parking brake
indicator light shows when the parking brake is activated, see Indicator
light, parking brake (16), page 37.
Deactivate the parking brake by pressing down the service brake pedal
N and then move the travel direction selector from the parking position
to neutral/gear position. The event menu appears when you try to
release the parking brake without the service brake being pressed
down or when the brake pressure is too low, see Event menu release
the parking brake, description, page 91.
015430
R DANGER
or extreme danger!

4 Instruments and controls – Multi-function lever 59
4.5 Multi-function lever

General
This section describes the functions of the multi-function lever (position
2 2).
015221
Light control
With headlights on: On machines with LED type headlights, the control
has no effect on the headlights.
With headlights off: The multi-function lever is used as a headlamp

015433
flasher. Move the control upward for high beam flash, return is
automatic.
On machines with high and low beam, the multi-function lever is

used for changing between high and low beam. Move the control
upward to switch between full and low beam.
On machines with work lights on the frame, you can choose to

control the work lights on the frame with the light control (on in high
beam position).
Horn
Move the lever inwards towards the steering wheel for horn.
The horn can also be activated with the switch on the control lever,
015431
see Control lever (53), page 61.
Direction indicators
Move the lever backward or forward to indicate left and right travel
indication respectively.
015432

60 4 Instruments and controls – Load handling
4.6 Load handling

General
This section describes the functions of the control for load handling.
The control governs functions for handling boom and attachments. It
is possible to vary the speed of the different hydraulic functions by
varying the extent of lever deflection, i.e. lift and extension, etc. It is
also possible to vary the speed of the hydraulic functions with the
engine speed (rpm).
Boom and the attachment movements are dampened automatically

near the end positions.
Lowering speed is dampened automatically as the attachment

approaches a container.
NOTE
Position of a control is need-adapted and may thus differ from this
section. See the plates on the machine.
Right-hand control panel

The control panel to the right of the operator is adjustable in several
ways for optimum ergonomics.
1. Panel position is longitudinal.
Adjust the control panel to the desired position, see Switch for
length adjustment of the right-hand control panel (70), page 54.
2. Panel position is vertical.
Adjust the control panel to the desired position, see Switch for
height adjustment of the right-hand control panel (72), page 55.
3. The angle of the rear section.
Pull the control (position A) upwards and adjust the panel manually
A. Control for adjusting the rear section to the desired position.
B. Control for adjusting the centre section 4. The angle of the centre section.
Pull the control (position B) upwards and adjust the panel manually
to the desired position.
5. The angle of the control lever's grip.
Contact service.

4 Instruments and controls – Control for load handling 61
4.6.1 Control for load handling

Control lever (53)
This section describes the functions of the control lever (position 53).
Some hydraulic functions are controlled by switches, see 4.3 Switches,
page 41.
It is possible to vary the speed of the different hydraulic functions, i.e.

lift, lower, etc., by varying the extent of the lever deflection. It is also
possible to vary the speed of the hydraulic functions with the engine
speed (rpm).
WARNING
In an emergency! In the event of undesired
activation/movement of a function.
Risk of personal injury and/or property damage!
IMMEDIATELY TURN OFF all working hydraulics by
pressing the CONTROL BREAKER for hydraulics.
NOTE
The operator must sit in the driver's seat, otherwise all hydraulic
functions are stopped.
For hydraulic vertically adjustable cab: The doors must be closed
if the cab is raised (i.e. not fully lowered), otherwise the hydraulic
function for boom down is interrupted. Machine speed is limited
when the cab leaves the fully lowered position.
On machines with tool changer, the controls may have changed

functions, depending on the lifting tool. See the separate supplements
for the lifting tool in question.

62 4 Instruments and controls – Control for load handling
Functions, control lever
Functions, control lever
53. Lift, lower [Straight lift]/Boom in, boom out [Levelling ] b. Side shift [Spreading] / Rotation [Tilt ]
LIFT – pull the whole control lever backward (Y-). SIDE SHIFT RIGHT - move the upper thumb control to
the right (X+).
LOWER – move the whole control lever forward (Y+).
SIDE SHIFT LEFT - move the upper thumb control to
BOOM OUT – move the whole control lever to the left (X-).
the right (X+).
SPREADING OUT - press the shift key and move the
BOOM IN – move the whole control lever to the left (X-). upper thumb control to the right (X+).
STRAIGHT LIFT UP – press the shift key and pull SPREADING IN - press the shift key and move the upper
the whole control lever backward (Y-). thumb control to the left (X-).
STRAIGHT LIFT DOWN – press the shift key and move ROTATION CLOCKWISE - move the upper thumb control
the whole control lever forward (Y+). forward (Y+).
LEVELLING CLOCKWISE - press the shift key ROTATION ANTICLOCKWISE - pull the upper thumb
and move the whole control lever to the right (X+). control backward (Y-).
TILT FORWARD – press the shift key and move the
LEVELLING ANTICLOCKWISE - press the shift key
upper thumb control forward (Y+).
and pull the whole control lever to the left (X-).
TILT BACKWARD – press the shift key and pull the
Speed varies with lever deflection and engine speed. upper thumb control backward (Y-).
a. Selecting direction of travel. The control is c. Opening the twistlocks.
spring-loaded, the current gear is shown in the display and
the selected direction of travel is shown on the steering Lower the attachment so that contact is obtained, and
wheel panel. depress the button to open twistlocks.
Travel direction FORWARD - move the lower thumb d. Alternative function "Shift key". The switch changes the
control forward. function of the other controls on the control lever.
Travel direction NEUTRAL – move the lower thumb e. Tilt lock
control up or down.
f. Levelling lock
Travel direction REVERSE - move the lower thumb control
backward. 64. Horn.

4 Instruments and controls – Light panel on boom 63
4.6.2 Light panel on boom

Light panel on boom for top lift attachment
There is a light panel on the boom that is helpful when handling
A B C loads with the top lift attachment. The panel uses coloured lights to
indicate if and when twistlocks are locked/unlocked, that is, if the load
is secured/not secured.
A. Twistlocks locked (load secured), green.
B. Contact attachment's four corners, orange.
C. Twistlocks unlocked (load not secured), red.
D. Overheight legs raised, white.
006497
NOTE
D The lights for load securing on the boom flash when there are
active fault codes on the sensors for load securing, which means
Light panel on boom, top lift attachment that the load securing functions are blocked.
On machines with second attachment, the lights can have changed

meanings. There may even be other types of light panels depending
on which attachments or lifting tools are used. See the separate
supplements for the attachment or lifting tool in question.
Light panel on boom for bottom lift attachment

There is a light panel on the boom that is helpful when handling loads
A B C with the bottom lift attachment. The panel uses coloured lights to
indicate if and when the legs have contact and clamping position, that
is, when the load is secured/not secured.
A. Twistlocks locked (load secured), green.
B. Contact attachment's four corners, orange.
C. Twistlocks unlocked (load not secured), red.
E H D. Contact left leg front, green.
E. Contact right leg front, green.
F. Contact left leg rear, green.
D I
G. Contact right leg rear, green.
H. Clamping position front leg pair, orange.
F K
I. Front leg pair raised, white.
000416
G J J. Clamping position rear leg pair, orange.

Light panel on boom, bottom lift attachment K. Front leg pair lowered, orange.
NOTE
When lifting, the lights D, E, F and G must illuminate before the load
has been lifted 300 mm, otherwise the lifting attempt is stopped.
Lower the load. The lights D, E, F and G must be unactuated before
a new lifting attempt is started.
NOTE
The lights for load securing on the boom flash when there are
that the load securing functions are blocked.

64 4 Instruments and controls – Pedals
4.7 Pedals
General
This section describes the machine's foot-operated functions.
NOTE
The default pedal height setting can be changed by adjusting the
angle of their console. The adjustment must be performed by a
service technician.
11
12 015214
11. Accelerator
12. Brake pedal
Accelerator (11)
The accelerator pedal (position 11) is electronic and controls the engine
speed via the CAN bus and the machine's control system.
Brake pedals (12)

The brake pedals (position 12) are hydraulic and connected to the
machine's hydraulic system. The brake pedals are used for service
brake.
The accumulator stores energy so that there is brake pressure even if

the engine stops. The event menu appears if the accumulator pressure
drops too low, see Event menu low accumulator pressure, description,
page 80.
The service brake is combined with declutching the transmission and

at a certain brake pressure the drive is fully declutched. The brake
pressure level is adjustable within specific minimum and maximum
values and adjustability is dependent on the machine model, contact
Cargotec service if values need to be adjusted.

4 Instruments and controls – Steering wheel 65
4.8 Steering wheel

General
This section describes controls for steering. The following alternatives
are available for steering the machine:
• adjustable steering wheel (position 3)
• joystick (position 13)
• mini steering wheel (position 13)
Steering wheel
Clockwise rotation of the steering wheel steers the machine to the
right, and vice versa.
The steering wheel's (position 3) inclination and height can be set to

the desired operating position.
1. Steering wheel angle in the longitudinal direction.
To adjust: Move the control on the steering column upward, angle
the steering wheel in the longitudinal direction and lock the control
when the steering wheel is in the desired position.
015216
2. Steering wheel angle in the lateral direction.

To adjust: To adjust: move the steering wheel's right-hand side
upward, angle the steering wheel sideways and lock the control
when the steering wheel is in the desired position.
3. Steering wheel's height.
To adjust: set the desired height with the Switch for height
adjustment of the steering wheel, see Switch for height adjustment
of steering wheel (71), page 55.
015217

66 4 Instruments and controls – Steering wheel
Mini-wheel
3 Mini-steering wheel control is an electro-hydraulic system, mounted in

the left arm rest, to steer the machine with an ergonomically designed
2 rotating plate. Clockwise rotation of the steering wheel steers the
machine to the right, and vice versa. The wheels always follow the
1 position of the mini-wheel. If the steering wheel is released, both the
4
mini-wheel and the wheels remain in the set position.
5 The standard steering wheel is equipped with sensors that detect any
steering wheel movement in an emergency situation. If the operator
starts to steer using the standard steering wheel, the mini steering
wheel is disengaged.
1. Direction indicators.
2. Mini-wheel.
The steering wheel's position on the arm rest is adjustable.
3. Switch for engaging the mini steering wheel.
Conditions: The speed must be below 3 km/h. If the speed
exceeds 3 km/h mini-wheel cannot be engaged.
6 NOTE
A sensor in the armrest mount on the driver's seat detects the
armrest angle. If the arm rest is angled upward, the mini steering
wheel function is deactivated at a certain angle and must be
activated again with the switch for engaging the mini steering wheel.
4. Travel direction selector F/N/R. The switch is spring-loaded, the

current gear is shown in the display and the selected direction of
travel is shown on the steering wheel panel.
Travel direction FORWARD – move the switch forward.
Travel direction NEUTRAL – move the switch up and down.
015422
Travel direction REVERSE – move the switch backward.

5. With headlights switched off: The switch is used for the headlamp
flasher.
If the switch is held depressed for more than 2 seconds then the
windscreen and roof wipers are activated and make one sweep.
Machines with high and low beam and headlights switched on:
The switch is used to change between high and low beam.
6. Arm rest. Can be folded up to easily enter and leave the driver's
seat.

4 Instruments and controls – Steering wheel 67
Joystick control
Joystick control functions as the mini steering wheel, with the difference
that the mini steering wheel is replaced by a lever that is moved
left/right in order to steer the machine.
The standard steering wheel is equipped with sensors that detect any
steering wheel movement in an emergency situation. If the operator
starts to steer using the standard steering wheel, joystick steering is
disengaged.
1. Joystick.
The joystick (1) can be rotated 180º to adjust the distance to the
switches (2–5).
2. Direction indicators.
3. Travel direction selector F/N/R. The switch is spring-loaded, the
current gear is shown in the display and the selected direction of
travel is shown on the steering wheel panel.
Travel direction FORWARD – move the switch forward.
Travel direction NEUTRAL - move the switch right or left.
Travel direction REVERSE – move the switch backward.
4. With headlights switched off: The switch is used for the headlamp
flasher.
If the switch is held depressed for more than 2 seconds then the
windscreen and roof wipers are activated and make one sweep.
Machines with high and low beam and headlights switched on:
The switch is used to change between high and low beam.
5. Switch for engaging the mini steering wheel.
Conditions: The speed must be below 3 km/h. If the speed
exceeds 3 km/h mini-wheel cannot be engaged.
NOTE
A sensor in the armrest mount on the driver's seat detects the
armrest angle. If the arm rest is angled upward, the mini steering
wheel function is deactivated at a certain angle and must be
activated again with the switch for engaging the mini steering wheel.

68 4 Instruments and controls – Steering wheel
Adjustment of the mini steering wheel/joystick

control
1. Adjusting the mini steering wheel longitudinally.
Adjust the mini steering wheel (position 1) to the desired position.
1
2. Adjusting the arm rest longitudinally.
To adjust: Loosen the knob (position 2) and adjust the arm rest to
the desired position. Lock the arm rest with the knob when the arm
rest is in the desired position.
015423
3. Height of the mini steering wheel/joystick control.

To adjust: Loosen the knob (position 3) and adjust the arm rest
to the desired position. Tighten the knob when the arm rest is in
the desired position.
4. Longitudinal angle of the mini steering wheel/joystick control.
To adjust: Loosen the Allen screw (position 4) and angle the
bracket for mini steering wheel/joystick control to the desired
position. Tighten the Allen screw when the bracket is in the desired
015424
position.
4
3
5. Sideways position of the mini steering wheel/joystick control.

To adjust: Loosen the Allen screw (position 5) and turn the arm
rest and bracket for the mini steering wheel/joystick control to the
desired position. Tighten the Allen screws when the armrest and
bracket are in the desired position.
015425

4 Instruments and controls – Driver's seat 69
4.9 Driver's seat

General
This section describes the driver's seat (position 10) in the cab.
Driver's seat
Standard seat
Standard seat
The driver's seat is equipped with several controls for adjustment as
11 follows (adjustment is easier when nobody is sitting in the seat):
1. Seat belt, 2-point.
Seat belt, 3-point .
2. Seat tilt.
3. Horizontal suspension (forward/backward) .
4. Seat length.
10 5. Height of seat.
Mechanical elevation of seat height:
1
9 Turn the knob clockwise or anticlockwise until desired height is
obtained.
Air suspension elevation of seat height:
2
Lift the control up to increase seat height or alternatively press
8 the control down to reduce seat height. The suspension adapts
automatically to the bodyweight of the operator.
3 An indicator shows green when the correct height is reached. The
7 indicator turns red when the seat's suspension is set outside the
comfort mode.
4 6. Longitudinal adjustment.
Release the seat using the lever and move the seat forwards or
5 6 backwards.
7. Back rest angle.
Release the lock with the lever, set the desired tilt angle and
release the lever to lock in the desired position.
8. Adjusting arm rest, left .
9. Lower back (lumbar) support.
Turn knob until desired firmness in lumbar support is obtained.
10. Seat heating .
017255
11. Adjusting the head rest .

Driver's seat with adjustment possibilities

70 4 Instruments and controls – Driver's seat
Optional seat Grammer
Optional seat Grammer
The driver's seat is equipped with several setting controls, they have
the following functions:
1. Seat heating.
2. Upper lumbar support.
Press + or - until the required firmness in the lumbar support is
reached.
3. Lower lumbar support.
Press + or - until the required firmness in the lumbar support is
reached.
4. Back rest angle.
Release the lock with the lever, set the desired tilt angle and
5. Horizontal suspension (forward/backward).
Control forward = locked.
Control backward = suspension.
To lock the suspension, move the control forward and then press
the seat backward until a click is heard when the suspension locks.
6. Longitudinal adjustment.
Release the seat with the lever, set the desired distance and
7. Height and angle of the seat
Angle setting: Set the vertical dampening (position 8) to the softest
position, sit on the seat, pull the control upward and release
directly. The suspension adapts automatically to the bodyweight.
Height control: Move the control upward to increase the seat
height or downward to lower the seat height.
8. Vertical dampening (up/down).
Control to the left = soft.
Control straight up = medium.
Control to the right = hard.
9. Seat length.
Release the length with the control, set the desired length and
release the control to lock in the desired position.
10. Seat tilt.
Release the tilt with the control, set the desired tilt and release the
control to lock in the desired position.
11. Seat belt, 2-point (not shown in the figure).
Seat belt, 3-point (not shown in the figure).

4 Instruments and controls – Heating / Air conditioning 71
4.10 Heating / Air conditioning

General information on air conditioning
This section describes the Air conditioning function, ECC.
38 39 40 43
The air conditioning system automatically regulates air flow and air
distribution in the cab and it constantly aims towards regulating the
37 temperature to a selected comfort level by heating or cooling the air in
the cab to the selected temperature.
36
The air conditioning system receives heat from the engine's cooling
system and provides heat when the engine is warm. Cooling
35 performance is generated by the cooling compressor (for ECC).
The system is controlled by fan, heat and air distribution as well as

function for recirculation and defroster:
012820
41 42 44 45 46 • Automatic control of the fan speed, temperature control and air
distribution in the cab is activated by switch (position 39). With
Panel for heating and air conditioning system AUTO mode enabled, the control system attempts to maintain
the temperature selected on the display. Both fan speed and
temperature control are automatic.
• Heat (and cooling performance for ECC) is controlled
with temperature switches (position 41, 42). Cooling is
activated/deactivated with the switch for cooling (position 43).
When adjusting the temperature the event menu appears on the
display, Event menu raise/lower cab temperature, description,
page 91.
• If necessary, the airflow can be adjusted manually with the switch
for the fan (position 38, 40). When adjusting the fan speed the
event menu appears on the display, Event menu raise/lower fan
speed, description, page 91.
• If necessary, the air distribution can be adjusted manually with the
switch for the air distribution (position 44, 45, 46). The fresh air
intake is equipped with a fine filter. Filter replacement is indicated
on the display by a filter monitor.
NOTE
Filter replacement is first indicated in the event of high fan capacity
use.
• If necessary, the recirculation of cab air can be activated/deactivated

with the switch for recirculation (position 36).
• Defroster for fast demisting of windows is activated/deactivated
with the switch for defroster (position 37).
• The pause heater is activated/deactivated with the pause heater
switch (position 35) .
NOTE
Operator's door and windows shall be closed for satisfactory
function of the system.
A short while after one of the doors has been opened, the fan is
switched off. After an additional period the air conditioning system's
cooling compressor shuts off (cooling function and air- drying
015218
stops). Close the door and the cooling compressor and fan are
activated again. The function can be turned off via the machine's
settings in the service menus.
Fresh air inlet for cab The current settings for the heating/air conditioning system are shown
in the display.
For information on the switches, see 4.3 Switches, page 41.
For information on the display, see 4.11 Control system, page 73.

72 4 Instruments and controls – Heating / Air conditioning
Diesel heater
As an option the machine can be equipped with diesel heater for

heating the cab and the engine without the engine being started. The
diesel heater heats and circulates the engine's coolant. The diesel
heater is controlled by a separate timer, with the display mounted on
the panel below the rear window on the left-hand side of the cab.
When the coolant has reached the required temperature, the cab fan is
activated in order to heat the cab. If the battery voltage becomes too
low then the heater is switched off automatically.
A. Menu bar For setting the diesel heater's timer, see Setting the diesel heater, page
167.
B. Status field (Main menu)
Input field (Submenu)
C. Selection front / rear
D. Button 1
E. Button 2

4 Instruments and controls – Control system 73
4.11 Control system

General
This section describes the control system (position 73) and the
information that can be obtained from the operating menus (position 5).
The machine is equipped with an electronic system for control and

monitoring of the machine's different functions.
The system gives the operator information in the form of:

• Error code information
Three levels of error code information can be shown. In the event
of a new error code, error code information is shown over the
entire display. See 5.3 Error codes, page 112.
• Operating information
Operating information includes, for example, machine speed,
engine rpm, fuel level, etc.
• Event-controlled information
Event-controlled information is, e.g. contact and overload.
Information is presented on the display (position a). The function keys

(position c-e) are used to navigate the display menus and confirm
selections. Figures are stated with example data.
The information in the display can be selected to show values with

metric (SI) or imperial (US) units, see Setting of display units, page 201.
a. Display
b. Pop-up for button function
c. Enter/YES/Save
d. Navigate through menus/adjust values with the
wheel or buttons , , or
e. Exit/NO

74 4 Instruments and controls – Control system
Description
The loop for the operating menus is described in this section.
Example of operating menus

1. Operating menu 6. Transmission and hydraulics operating menu
2. Operating menu trip computer work shift 7. Operating menu electrical system
3. Operating menu scales 8. Operating menu system
4. Operating menu load counter and extra functions 9. Operating menu load centre
5. Engine operating menu

4 Instruments and controls – Operating menus 75
4.11.1 Operating menus

Description
After starting the machine the operating menu is displayed with engine
speed, speed, time, fuel level and information on the current setting for
the heating or air conditioning system.
a. Time.
b. Field for the four event menus with the highest priority and which
have status indicators. When there are only up to two event menus
with status indicators, status for heating or air conditioning is
shown in the lower part of the field.
c. Fuel economy. The green field indicates economical driving while
the red field indicates uneconomical driving that consumes a lot
of fuel.
d. Speed in km/h.
e. Eco Drive Mode setting. Eco Drive Mode, page 157. Selected
mode has white text, the row is only shown on machines with Eco
Drive Mode.
f. Fuel level.
g. Current gear.
In the event of a fault in the transmission, this is indicated with gear
number between 10-15, which corresponds to the current gear +
10. Contact service for troubleshooting.
h. Engine speed.
i. Utilised load capacity, the bar shows load 0-100%.
j. Operating time in hours (h).
k. AdBlue level (only applies to specific engine options).
l. Scales, current weight in tonnes or lbs (pounds).
4.11.1.1 Operating menu trip computer work shift
Operating menu trip computer work shift, description

Trip computer for work shift shows current work shift machine statistics
since last reset to zero.
a. Instantaneous fuel consumption in litres per hour.
b. Average fuel consumption, in litres per hour.
c. Estimated operating hours to empty tank in hours and minutes.
d. Current engine speed in revolutions per minute.
e. Current speed in km/h.
f. Average speed in km/h.
g. Driving distance in kilometres.
h. Number of lifts.
Trip computer work shift is reset automatically if the machine has been
switched off for longer than two hours or manually with .

76 4 Instruments and controls – Operating menus
4.11.1.2 Operating menu scales

Operating menu scale, description
a. Displays the tare in tonnes or lbs (pounds).
Tare weight is the change in weight in relation to the last reset of
the tare weight. This can be used to weigh the load in a container.
If the tare weight is reset to zero with an empty container then the
tare weight shows the weight of the load in the container.
b. Current weight in tonnes or lbs (pounds) (net weight).
c. Total weight in tonnes or lbs (pounds) (gross weight).
To operate the scales, see Scales, page 190.
4.11.1.3 Operating menu load counter

Operating menu load counter, description
a. Number of lifts counter 1, (top lift or tool changer)
b. Number of lifts counter 2, (top lift or tool changer)
c. Number of lifts counter 1, (bottom lift or OHC)
d. Number of lifts counter 2, (bottom lift or OHC)
To reset the load counter, see Load counter, page 192.
4.11.1.4 Engine operating menu

Engine operating menu, description
a. Shows current engine coolant temperature in °C or °F.
b. Shows current engine oil pressure in bar or psi.
a b
014519
4.11.1.5 Transmission and hydraulics operating menu

Transmission and hydraulics operating menu,
description
a. Shows the current transmission oil temperature in °C or °F.
b. Shows the current hydraulic system oil temperature in °C or °F.
c. Shows the current brake system oil temperature in °C or °F.

4 Instruments and controls – Operating menus 77
4.11.1.6 Operating menu electrical system
Operating menu electrical system, description

a. Shows the current battery voltage in volts.
4.11.1.7 Operating menu system
Operating menu system, description

a. Number of active error codes with error code level stop.
b. Number of active error codes with error code level warning.
c. Number of active error codes with error code level information.
d. Menu for customer settings such as date and time, SI/US units, Eco
Drive Mode, automatic start and stop function and language.
e. Menu for statistics, history and operating hours.
f. Menu for services and settings.
g. Menu for machine check.
h. Menu for active error codes.
i. Menu for inactive error codes.
For a more detailed description of the different submenus, see 5.6

Customer settings via display, page 199.
4.11.1.8 Operating menu load centre monitoring
Operating menu load centre monitoring

a. Shows current weight in tonnes or lbs (pounds).
b. Shows load centre distance from front wheels in metres or inches.
c. Shows the load's centre-of-gravity position laterally, see Indication
of eccentric load, page 184 .
d. Shown when printout of load receipt is possible, see Load receipt,
page 191 .
e. Shows how much of the machine's capacity is being used for the
current load and load centre distance.

78 4 Instruments and controls – Operating menus
4.11.1.9 Operating menu tyre pressure monitoring
Operating menu tyre pressure, description
Operating menu tyre pressure shows the current pressure in the tyres
and, together with the event menus, warns of low tyre pressure in two
stages with a coloured frame around the tyre in question.
a. Shows the air pressure in the left-hand steering wheel in bar or psi.
b. Shows the air pressure in the right-hand steering wheel in bar or
psi.
c. Shows the air pressure in the left-hand outer drive wheel in bar
or psi.
d. Shows the air pressure in the left-hand inner drive wheel in bar
or psi.
e. Shows the air pressure in the right-hand inner drive wheel in bar
or psi.
f. Shows the air pressure in the right-hand outer drive wheel in bar
or psi.
Green frame indicates that the tyre pressure is approved.
Yellow frame indicates that the tyre pressure is high or low and activates
the event menu, see Event menu tyre pressure, description, page 85.
Red frame indicates that the tyre pressure is incorrect (too high or low)
and activates the event menu, see Event menu incorrect tyre pressure,
description, page 80.

4 Instruments and controls – Event menus 79
4.11.2 Event menus

General
Event menu categories
The control system attracts the operator's attention to important

information by showing the event menus on the control system display.
a The event menus are divided into the categories: STOP, WARNING,
INFO and NOTICE. Each menu is displayed with an icon with a border
b around it. The severity of the menu is indicated by the colour of the
border around the function symbol.
Some event menus give an audio signal to attract the operator's

attention.
014952
Table Event menu categories
Example figure STOP Red border.
a. The colour of the border indicates the category
of the event menu. WARNING Yellow border.
b. Symbol for the current function. INFO Grey border.

NOTICE No border.
Event menus with the level STOP, WARNING and INFO menus can
be acknowledged with otherwise they automatically disappear
when the state that generated the event ends. Event menus with
the level NOTICE automatically disappear. Menus that have been
acknowledged can be displayed with the current symbols in the status
field to the left. The event menus are ranked according to a priority
order in which those with the highest priority are displayed in the status
field. Not all event menus have status indicators and no icon will appear
in the status field for these. If there are more than four active event
menus, those with the highest priority are displayed, yet all menus
with status indicators are placed in a queue and are displayed when
there is space in the status field. If there is space in the status field,
information for the heating or air conditioning system will be shown in
the lower part of the field.
How each event menu affects the machine's different functions is

described under each event menu.

80 4 Instruments and controls – Event menus
4.11.2.1 Event menu brake temperature
Event menu brake temperature, description

The figure is shown if:
• the temperature of the brakes is too high.
The machine's speed is limited for safety reasons when the
temperature is too high.
If the figure is shown, check that the hydraulic oil cooler for the brake
tank on the left-hand side of the machine has been activated and allow
the machine to run at idle until the temperature of the brakes has
014984
reached normal level. The display then disappears. The display can be
removed with the function key .
4.11.2.2 Event menu low accumulator pressure
Event menu low accumulator pressure, description

• The hydraulic oil pressure in the brake system is too low. The red
border is not displayed for a specific time during startup when the
pressure is being built up. The current pressure is shown in the
menu.
The event menu disappears when the hydraulic oil pressure has
reached the right level. The display can be removed with the function
015440
key .
4.11.2.3 Event menu incorrect tyre pressure
Event menu incorrect tyre pressure, description

• The tyre pressure becomes too low. Current tyre pressure for all
tyres is shown in the menu, a tyre with pressure too low has a
red frame in the menu.
• The tyre pressure becomes too high. Current tyre pressure for all
tyres is shown in the menu, a tyre with pressure too high has a
red frame in the menu.
If the figure is shown (and speed limitation occurs):

• Set down the load in a safe manner and immediately call a service
technician to check the tyre pressures.
WARNING
Incorrect tyre pressure means that the stability of the
machine is reduced and that the tyres and rims are
subjected to abnormal loads.
Do not use a machine with incorrect tyre pressure.
The event menu disappears when the tyre pressure has reached the
correct level. The display can be removed with the function key .

4.11.2.4 Event menu person in work area
Event menu person in work area, description
The figure is shown when:

• A warning tag for the personnel proximity system is closer than
approximately 0 - 15 metres from the machine (red area).
In case the figure is shown:

• Stop the machine are ask the persons in the work area to move
outside of the machine's work area.
The warning can be temporarily acknowledged using the function

key . The warning is reactivated automatically 30 seconds after
acknowledgement.
For a more detailed description of the personnel proximity system, see

Personnel proximity system, page 102.
4.11.2.5 Event menu overload
Event menu overload, description

• The load on the steering axle is too low. The lifting capacity has
reached 100% in accordance with the load curve for the machine.
• Boom movement is limited because lifting capacity has reached
100% in accordance with the load curve for the machine.
Only boom in is permitted.
• The load in accordance with the load curve without support jacks
has been exceeded, during an attempt to raise the support jacks.
In the event that the image is shown, the machine's load functions
are limited:
• Retract the boom to reduce the risk of tipping. The display then
disappears.
In an emergency situation, the safety system bypass switch
(position 47) can be used to lower the load.
WARNING
Safety features are blocked.
No safety system is engaged! Risk of roll-over and
tipping over!
Only use bypass in emergency situations!
• On a machine with support jacks, lower the support jacks to

increase the load capacity of the machine and attempt to lift again.

4.11.2.6 Event menu overload steering axle

Event menu overload steering axle, description
Too high a load on the steering axle involves reduced lateral stability
during operation and a risk of damage to the steering axle's tyres and
rims.
• Machine speed is limited so that the load on the steering axle
reaches the limit.
Permissible speed is dependent on the current steering axle load;
speed is limited dynamically depending on axle weight on the
steering axle.
If the figure is shown and speed limitation occurs:
• Lower the load or attachment or move it forward to reduce pressure
on the steering axle. The display then disappears.
• Reduce speed. The display then disappears.
NOTE
In the event of high load on the steering axle, wear on steering axle
and tyres is high and lateral stability is also lower.
The display can be removed with the function key .
4.11.2.7 Event menu overload drive axle

Event menu overload drive axle, description
Too high a load on the drive axle involves a risk of damage to the drive
axle's tyres and rims.
• Machine speed is limited so that the load on the drive axle reaches
the limit.
Permissible speed is dependent on the current drive axle load;
speed is limited dynamically depending on axle weight on the
drive axle.
If the figure is shown and speed limitation occurs:
• Operate the load to operating position. The display then
disappears.
• Slide the load or attachment back in order to reduce pressure on
the drive axle. The display then disappears.
• Reduce speed. The display then disappears.
4.11.2.8 The event menu parking brake not activated

and no operator in the driver's seat
The event menu parking brake not activated and no
operator in the driver's seat, description
• The parking brake is not activated and the operator is not sitting
in the driver's seat.
The event menu disappears when the operator sits in the driver's seat,
or when the parking brake is activated. The display can be removed
with the function key .
015441

4.11.2.9 Event menu engine coolant temperature
Event menu engine coolant temperature, description

• The coolant temperature is high.
If the figure is shown, check that the engine's cooling fan has been
activated and allow the machine to run at idle until the coolant
temperature has reached normal level. The display then disappears.
014987
4.11.2.10 Event menu oil temperature transmission
Event menu oil temperature transmission, description

• Transmission oil temperature is high.
If the figure is shown, check that the engine's cooling fan has been
activated and allow the machine to remain at idle until the transmission
oil has reached normal temperature. The display then disappears. The
display can be removed with the function key .
014988
4.11.2.11 Event menu height limitation
Event menu height limitation, description

• Set maximum lifting height is reached. The machine's current
height is shown in the display.
If the figure is shown, lower or retract the boom. The display then
disappears. The function can be by-passed, see Height limitation,
page 193.

4.11.2.12 Event menu support jacks
Event menu support jacks, description

• The support jacks are lowered or raised in movement on machines
set for manual lowering of the support jacks (the button must be
held depressed during the whole lowering process).
On machines set for automatically lowering of the support jacks,
Event menu automatic lowering of the support jacks is displayed
when the support jacks are moving, see Event menu automatic
lowering of support jacks, description, page 95.
• The travel direction is selected before the support jacks are fully
raised.
When the support jacks are not fully raised, the transmission is
locked in neutral position.
In the event that the image is shown, operate the support jacks up or
down, see Support jacks, page 188.
4.11.2.13 Event menu oil temperature hydraulics
Event menu oil temperature hydraulics, description

• The hydraulic system's oil temperature is high.
If the figure is shown, check that the hydraulic oil cooler for the
hydraulic tank on the right-hand side of the machine has been activated
and allow the machine to run at idle until the hydraulic oil has reached
normal temperature. The display then disappears. The display can be
015479
4.11.2.14 Event menu AdBlue end
Event menu AdBlue end, description

Only applies to Volvo TAD117xVE.

• There is a fault in the supply of AdBlue.
• The engine indicates low AdBlue level.
Emission is control not working and engine power is limited.

016679
If the figure is shown, top up the AdBlue. The display then disappears.
NOTE
Fuel and AdBlue must be filled at the same time.

4.11.2.15 Event menu tyre pressure

Event menu tyre pressure, description

• The tyre pressure becomes low. Current tyre pressure for all tyres
is shown in the menu, a tyre with low pressure has a yellow frame
in the menu.
• The tyre pressure becomes high. Current tyre pressure for all
tyres is shown in the menu, a tyre with high pressure has a yellow
frame in the menu.
• Finish the work shift and call a service technician as soon as
possible to check the tyre pressures.
WARNING
Incorrect tyre pressure means that the stability of the
machine is reduced and that the tyres and rims are
subjected to abnormal loads.
Do not use a machine with incorrect tyre pressure.
The event menu disappears when the tyre pressure has reached the
correct level. The display can be removed with the function key .
4.11.2.16 Event menu person close to machine

Event menu person close to machine, description

• A warning tag for the personnel proximity system is closer than
approximately 0 - 20 metres from the machine (yellow area).
• Seek visual contact with persons in the proximity of the machine
and ensure that they do not enter the machine's work area.
The warning can be temporarily acknowledged using the function
key . The warning is reactivated automatically 60 seconds after
acknowledgement.
For a more detailed description of the personnel proximity system, see
Personnel proximity system, page 102.
4.11.2.17 Event menu low accumulator pressure

Event menu low accumulator pressure, description
• Try to release the parking brake when the accumulator pressure
is low.
If the figure is shown, wait until the pressure is built up in the
accumulators and release the parking brake. The display then
disappears. The display can be removed with the function key .

4.11.2.18 Event menu parking brake
Event menu parking brake, description

• The parking brake is activated and you try to engage a gear.
• The parking brake is activated and you try to activate the automatic
functions that require the parking brake to be released.
Release the parking brake and the display disappears. The display can
be removed with the function key .
014990
4.11.2.19 Event menu low AdBlue level
Event menu low AdBlue level, description

Only applies to Volvo TAD117xVE.

• The level in the AdBlue tank is low.
If the figure is shown, top up the AdBlue. The display then disappears.
014991
NOTE
4.11.2.20 Event menu low fuel level
Event menu low fuel level, description

• The level in the fuel tank is low.
If the figure is shown, top up the fuel. The display then disappears. The
For machines with Volvo TAD117xVE:

014992
NOTE
4.11.2.21 Event menu no operator in seat
Event menu no operator in seat, description

The figure is shown with:
• Attempt to engage a gear without anyone sitting in the driver's
seat. The transmission then goes to neutral and the gear must be
engaged again once the operator sits in the seat again.
• The working hydraulics are activated without anyone sitting in the
driver's seat.
If the figure is shown, sit down in the seat and select the gear again
014994
to activate the working hydraulics. The display then disappears. The


4.11.2.22 Event menu open door
Event menu open door, description

• A function is limited because the door(s) is/are not closed.
In the event that the display is shown, close the door(s). The display
then disappears. The display can be removed with the function key .
015206
4.11.2.23 Event menu automatic spreading 20'–40'
Event menu automatic spreading 20'–40', description

• Automatic spreading of attachment 20' to 40' in progress. To stop
an ongoing automatic 20' to 40' spreading, activate spreading in or
out of with the control lever. The display then disappears.
4.11.2.24 Event menu tilt lock
Event menu tilt lock, description
With tilt lock it is not advisable to operate the machine at speeds faster
than 5 km/h. This is because it results in increased wear. Therefore,
the control and monitoring system limits the machine's speed.

• Machine speed is limited due to the tilt lock function being active.

• Reduce speed to below 5 km/h.
• Disengage the lock function, the speed limitation and display are
then discontinued. The lock function is handled by the control lever
(position 53e), see Control lever (53), page 61.

4.11.2.25 Event menu levelling lock
Event menu levelling lock, description
With levelling lock, it is not advisable to operate the machine at speeds

above 5 km/h. This is because it results in increased wear. Therefore,
the control and monitoring system limits the machine's speed.

• Machine speed is limited due to the levelling lock function being
active.

• Reduce speed to below 5 km/h. The display then disappears.
• Disengage the lock function, the speed limitation and display are
then discontinued. The lock function is handled by the control lever
(position 53a), see Control lever (53), page 61.
4.11.2.26 Event menu rotation stop
Event menu rotation stop, description

• Rotation of attachment reaches permitted rotation limit ±25° from
straight position when the rotation stop function is active.
If the figure is shown turn the attachment toward straight position. The
display then disappears. The function can be bypassed, see Rotation
stop, page 185.
4.11.2.27 Event menu side shift stop
Event menu side shift stop, description

• Side shift of attachment reaches permitted side shift limit to right or
to left.
If the figure is shown, centre the attachment with side shift. The display
then disappears. The function can be bypassed, see Side shift stop,
page 184.

4.11.2.28 Event menu contact
Event menu contact top-lift attachment, description

• One to three corners of the attachment are in contact with the load
during contact. The lift corners which are in contact are filled in.
I.e. when the twistlock ends up in open or closed position.
When all four corners are in contact the display figure disappears
and the load can be locked.
In the event that the image is shown, operate the attachment until full
contact is achieved. Load cannot be secured (lock twistlocks) before
full contact. The load can be locked when all four corner points have
contact. The display then disappears.
Event menu contact combi attachment, description

• One to seven sensors on the attachment have contact.
When the correct contact is made and clamping mode is active,
the display disappears and the load can be lifted.
Filled triangle means that the lift leg has reached clamping position.
Filled circle means that the lift leg has contact.
In the event that the image is shown, operate the attachment's legs so
that all legs have clamping position and so that full contact is achieved.
You cannot lift the load until this has taken place. The load can be
clamped and lifted when all four lift corners have contact. When lifting,
full contact must be obtained before the load has been lifted 300 mm,
otherwise the lifting attempt is stopped. The display then disappears.
NOTE
When transporting loads with bottom lift attachment, machine
speed is limited to max. second gear and 10 km/h.
4.11.2.29 Event menu twistlocks
Event menu twistlocks, description

• The sensors for twistlocks cannot detect if twistlocks are in locked
or unlocked position. Figure is shown during lift.
When all sensors have contact, the display figure disappears.
If the figure is shown, set down any load immediately and:

• Operate attachment until full contact is obtained and twistlocks are
in correct position. The display then disappears.
• Open and lock twistlocks (use switch for by-pass of safety system
(position 47) if necessary). The display then disappears.

4.11.2.30 Event menu low washer fluid level
Event menu low washer fluid level, description

• The level in the washer fluid reservoir is low.
If the figure is shown, top up the washer fluid. The display then
disappears. The display can be removed with the function key .
015205
4.11.2.31 Event menu air filter air conditioning system
Event menu air filter air conditioning system,

description
• The air filter in the air-conditioning system is clogged.
If the figure is shown, replace the air filter. The display then disappears.
015442
4.11.2.32 Event menu arm rest
Event menu arm rest, description
The image is shown if the left-hand arm rest is not in lowered position
on activation of mini wheel/joystick control.
In the event that the image is shown, lower the arm rest and try again
to activate mini-wheel/joystick control. This clears the display. The
016610
4.11.2.33 Event menu seat belt
Event menu seat belt, description

• The belt is not fastened and the speed exceeds 3 km/h
If the figure is shown, fasten the seat belt. The display then disappears.

4.11.2.34 Event menu release the parking brake
Event menu release the parking brake, description

• Attempt to release the parking brake is made without the service
brake pedal being pressed down.
If the figure is shown, press down the service brake pedal and release
the parking brake. The display then disappears. The display can be
014995
4.11.2.35 Event menu preheating
Event menu preheating, description

• Preheating is activated.
The engine's control system activates the preheating during a time
period as necessary.
Engine option Cummins QSM11 has automatic preheating without
indicator to the operator.
The event menu disappears when preheating is complete. The display

014997
can be removed with the function key .
4.11.2.36 Event menu raise/lower cab temperature
Event menu raise/lower cab temperature, description

• The cab temperature is raised or lowered. Desired temperature is
displayed in the menu.
The event menu disappears a short time after the most recent
temperature change with the cab temperature switches. The display
4.11.2.37 Event menu raise/lower fan speed
Event menu raise/lower fan speed, description

• The fan speed is raised or lowered.
The event menu disappears a short time after the last fan change
with the switches for fan speed. The display can be removed with the
function key .
014999

4.11.2.38 Event menu start interlock
Event menu start interlock, description

• The start interlock (Immobiliser) function prevents the operator
from staring the engine, e.g. with the alcolock.
• The starter motor has run too long. The engine's control unit stops
the starting attempt. A new attempt to start the engine can be
made when the starter has rested for a while. Applies to Cummins
QSM11.
• Engine or hydraulic oil heater is engaged.
015200
The event menu disappears when the conditions for starting the
machine are met. The display can be removed with the function key .
4.11.2.39 Event menu heating rear view mirrors/rear

windscreen
Event menu heating rear view mirrors/rear windscreen,

description

• Heating in rear window is activated.
• Heating rear view mirrors/rear windscreen activated.
The event menu disappears a short time after activation. The display
015201

• Heating in rear window is deactivated.
• Heating rear view mirrors/rear windscreen deactivated.
The event menu disappears a short time after the function is

deactivated. The display can be removed with the function key .
015202
4.11.2.40 Event menu service
Event menu service, description

• Time to next service is approaching. The remaining time to service
in hours is shown in the menu.
Ensure that the machine is serviced according to the prescribed

intervals. The display can be removed with the function key .

4.11.2.41 Event menu control breaker
Event menu control breaker, description

• The control breaker is pressed in when specific functions are
activated.
• The control breaker is activated.
Reset the control breaker by turning it clockwise. The display can be

015444
4.11.2.42 Event menu intermittent wiper
Event menu intermittent wiper, description

• Slow intermittent wipers are activated.

015445

• Fast intermittent wipers are activated.

015446
4.11.2.43 Event menu speed limitation
Event menu speed limitation, description

• Functions in the machine are prevented because the speed is too
high.
If the figure is shown, reduce speed. The display then disappears.

4.11.2.44 Event menu battery charging
Event menu battery charging, description

• The engine's alternator does not charge the battery for a few
seconds.
If the figure is shown, increase the engine speed in order to increase

alternator output. The display disappears after 2 seconds when the
alternator is charging the battery. If the display does not disappear,
release the load safely, park the machine and contact service.
4.11.2.45 Event menu low coolant level engine
Event menu low coolant level engine, description

• The coolant level in the engine's expansion tank becomes too low.
If the figure is shown, release the load safely, park the machine and
check the coolant level, see Cooling system, general, page 229.
4.11.2.46 Event menu load centre
Event menu load centre, description

• Lift or extension functions are active; the menu is a means for
preventing unpermitted load cases during load handling.
The bar shows how much of the machine's capacity (in percent) is
being used for the current load and load centre distance. Yellow field
means 80–90% and red field means 90–100%.
The scale at the bottom of the menu indicates eccentric load, see
Indication of eccentric load, page 184.
Use the information to position the load in a way that minimises loading.
4.11.2.47 Event menu automatic stop function
Event menu automatic stop function, description

The image is shown before:
• The engine is stopped by automatic engine shutdown, see
Automatic stop function, page 155.
• The engine is stopped by the automatic start and stop function, see
Automatic start and stop function, page 156.
The bar indicates remaining time until shutdown as a % of set time for
automatic shutdown.

4.11.2.48 Event menu automatic start function
Event menu automatic start function, description

• The engine is ready to be started automatically by the automatic
start/stop function, see Automatic start and stop function, page 156.
To start the engine, activate any hydraulic function, depress the

accelerator pedal or depress the brake pedal.
017365
4.11.2.49 Event menu automatic lowering of support
jacks
Event menu automatic lowering of support jacks,

description

• The support jacks are raised and lowered on machines set for
automatic lowering of the support jacks.

018303
4.11.2.50 Event menu travel direction
Event menu travel direction, description
The figure is shown with:

• Travel direction forward or reverse is selected and you attempt to
lower the support jacks.
The display disappears when neutral is selected. The display can be

4.11.2.51 Event menu operator identification
Event menu operator identification, description

• No tag for operator identification has been read.
The display disappears when operator identification is complete. The


4.11.2.52 Event menu overheight legs in intermediate

position
Event menu overheight legs in intermediate position,
description

• The overheight legs are in an undefined intermediate position.
The display disappears when the legs have reached their end position.
4.11.2.53 Event menu speed limitation for overheight

lift
Event menu speed limitation for overheight lift,
description

• Speed is limited for overheight lift with load.
The display disappears via auto-confirmation after 2 seconds. The
4.11.2.54 Event menu speed limitation, load position

Event menu speed limitation, load position,
description

• The speed is limited depending on the position of the load.
Which of the arrows is shown on the figure depends on the cause of
the speed limitation.
The display disappears when the load has been lowered or the boom
has been retracted. The display can be removed with the function
key .
4.11.2.55 Event menu speed limitation, warm-up mode

Event menu speed limitation, warm-up mode,
description
• The engine speed is limited in warm-up mode.
The display figure disappears when the engine has reached the correct
operating temperature. The display can be removed with the function
key .

4.11.2.56 Event menu, boom in incorrect position
Event menu, boom in incorrect position, description

• The boom is in an incorrect position.
The display disappears when the boom is raised. The display can be
4.11.2.57 Event menu, cab in incorrect position
Event menu, cab in incorrect position, description

• The cab is in raised position and the function that was activated is
not permitted with raised cab.
The display disappears when the cab is lowered. The display can be
4.11.2.58 Event menu radio control function activated
Event menu radio control function activated,

description

• Radio control function activated (flashing).
• Radio control function has contact with control unit (steady)
The display disappears when the radio control function is deactivated.

4.11.2.59 Event menu applied parking brake
Event menu applied parking brake, description

• An attempt is made to activate the radio control function without
the parking brake being applied.
The display disappears when the parking brake is applied. The display

4.11.2.60 Event menu load receipt
Event menu load receipt, description

• The function for load receipt is active and the load is manoeuvred
to scale position.
When the event menu is shown, the display's function keys have
changed function. For a more detailed description of the receipt
function, see Load receipt, page 191.

4 Instruments and controls – Optional equipment 99
4.12 Optional equipment

Back-up camera and distance warning
General
As an option, the machine can be equipped with back-up camera.

There are two different systems with back-up camera.
• Back-up camera.
• Back-up camera with distance warning.
Back-up camera
The back-up camera is fitted in a recess in the counterweight and

the image is shown on a monitor in the cab. The monitor is fitted
on a hinged bracket to the right, in front of the door in the cab. The
back-up camera has a microphone, the audio is played back using a
loudspeaker in the monitor. Volume is adjusted using the Right and Left
buttons on the monitor (position A). The monitor brightness is adapted
automatically to the light in the cab by the light sensor (position F).
Lines are shown over the camera image that help to judge the distance
to the object in the picture.
The monitor can also be mounted on the left-hand side, in front of the
Monitor back-up camera door .
A. Right / Left (volume) The machine can be equipped with several cameras, such as for
B. Up / Down monitoring in front of the machine , boom nose camera , twistlock
C. Off / On camera and camera at lift shoe (bottom lift) . Selection of
camera display is made via the Confirm selection button on the monitor
D. Confirm selection (change camera) (position D), the back-up camera is automatically selected when
E. Show menu reverse gear is activated.
F. Light sensor
More settings are available via the monitor's built-in menu system that
is shown with the Show menu button (position E). To navigate in the
menus, use the arrow keys (position A and B) and the button Confirm
selection (position D).

100 4 Instruments and controls – Back-up camera and distance warning
Back-up camera with distance warning
The back-up camera with distance warning uses the camera to show
the area behind the machine and ultrasonic sensors to warn of objects
in the area behind the machine. The distance warning system is only
active when reverse gear is selected.
The back-up camera is fitted in a recess in the counterweight and the

image is shown on a monitor in the cab. The monitor is fitted on a
hinged bracket to the right, in front of the door in the cab. The camera
has a microphone, the audio is played back using a loudspeaker in the
monitor. The monitor has four programmable shortcut buttons (position
D), the function of the buttons can be set using the menu system in
the monitor.
The sensors for distance warning are located on each side of the rear
A. Screen display off / on counterweight. When objects are detected by the sensors the operator
is warned by coloured bars on the right-hand side of the monitor as well
B. Indicator light, power as by acoustic warnings (see below).
C. Light sensor
The monitor can also be mounted on the left-hand side, in front of the
D. Shortcuts 1 - 4
door .
E. Cancel
The machine can be equipped with several cameras, such as for
F. Menu navigation
monitoring in front of the machine , boom nose camera , twistlock
G. Confirm selection camera and camera at lift shoe (bottom lift) . Selection of
camera display is made via the Confirm selection button on the monitor
(position D), the back-up camera is automatically selected when
reverse gear is activated.
More settings are available via the monitor's built-in menu system that
is shown when the Menu navigation button (position F) is pressed up
or down. To navigate in the menus, use the Menu navigation button
(position F) and confirm a selection by pressing the Confirm selection
button (position G), undo a selection or exit the menus by pressing the
Cancel button (position E).

4 Instruments and controls – Back-up camera and distance warning 101
Distance warning
Distance warning
Back-up camera with distance warning works in the same way as

the normal back-up camera but with the addition that it also warns of
objects behind the machine.
NOTE
The distance warning system should be seen as an aid when
driving at low speed. Always have a clear view of the area behind
the machine; personnel or other vehicles may enter the area behind
the machine.
Distance warning takes place in four stages with audio and visual
indication on the monitor.
A. Distance warning stage 1 and 2

Stage 1
• No objects within 3 metres behind the machine.
B. Distance warning stage 3
• Green constant indicator to the right of the monitor (position A).
C. Distance warning stage 4
D. Distance warning stage 4 Stage 2
• Object within 3.0 - 1.7 metres behind the machine.
• Yellow flashing indicator to the right of the monitor (position A) and
warning sound twice per second.
Stage 3
• Object within 1.7 - 0.7 metres behind the machine.
• Red flashing indicator to the right of the monitor (position B) and
warning sound four times per second.
Stage 4
• Object within 0.7 metres behind the machine or at the sides.
• Red constant indicator to the right of the monitor (position C), stop
symbol above image and constant warning sound.

102 4 Instruments and controls – Personnel proximity system
Personnel proximity system

General
Stage 1
As an option the machine can be equipped with a Personnel Proximity

System. The personnel proximity system monitors the area around the
whole machine using wireless technology that detects the distance
to special warning tags. When a warning tag is within the machine's
monitoring area the system alerts the machine operator and carrier
of the warning tag. The warning tag has a rechargeable battery with
a usage time of up to 12 hours.
The system automatically detects the warning tag that is closest to the
machine during start up and identifies this as the operator and does not
give an alert for this tag.
The Personnel alert system gives an alert in three stages depending
on the distance:
Stage 1
• Warning tag within approximate 20 metre radius of the
017986
machine.
• 'Pulsating audio alert and event menu on the display (position A),
A. Display see Event menu person close to machine, description, page 85.
B. Resetting an alert • Pulsating audio alert, flashing yellow warning (position C) and the
warning tag vibrates (position A).
C. Warning lamp
• The warnings can be acknowledged (temporarily disabled) with
D. Warning tag
the switch (position B) on the display on the machine or on the
warning tag. The warning is reactivated automatically 60 seconds
after acknowledgement.
Stage 2
• Warning tag within approximate 15 metre radius of the
machine.
• Fixed audio alert and event menu on the display, see Event menu
person in work area, description, page 81.
• Pulsating audio alert, flashing red warning (position C) and the
warning tag vibrates (position A).
• The warnings can be acknowledged (temporarily disabled) with
the switch (position B) on the display on the machine or on the
warning tag. The warning is reactivated automatically 30 seconds
after acknowledgement.
Stage 3
• Warning tag in the cab.
• No warning on the display.
• Audio alert, flashing blue warning (position C) on the warning tag
(position A).
• The warning can be acknowledged (temporarily disabled) with the
switch (position B) on the warning tag. The warning is reactivated
automatically 12 hours after acknowledgement.
Charging the warning tag
The warning lamp (position C) flashes red every five seconds when
the battery needs to be charged.
Place the warning tag in the appropriate charger, the charger can
be powered by the mains adapter or via the USB port. The warning
lamp (position C) is lit with a constant red light during charging. When
charging is finished the warning lamp (position C) is lit with a constant
green light.
When the warning tag is removed from the charger the warning lamp
and audio alert are activated briefly to verify that the tag works.

4 Instruments and controls – Fire extinguishing system 103
Fire extinguishing system

General
As an option, the machine can be equipped with a fire extinguishing

system, see Emergency equipment, page 107.
This system is permanently mounted with both a manual and an

automatic trigger and a display.
For more information, contact the supplier of the system.
Vehicle Data Interface (VDI)

General
As an option, the machine can be prepared for connecting external

systems for reading operating data from the machine (e.g. Smartfleet).
On machines with VDI there is an extra connector (X039), the 9-pin

Universal mate-n-lock type, in the electronic box in the cab. The
connector contains the following connections:
1. CAN bus option (R+)
2. CAN bus option (R-)
3. Ignition voltage, 24 V 10 A
4. Battery voltage, 24 V 10 A
5. Ground
6. Not connected
7. Not connected
8. Not connected
9. Battery voltage before battery disconnector, 24 V 10 A (may
3 2 1 require extra installation on the machine)
For more information, contact Cargotec.

4
5
019145
6 9 8 7

104 4 Instruments and controls – Smartfleet
Smartfleet
General
Operator identification
Smartfleet is an option for process automation. Smartfleet reads

operating data from the machine via VDI. The information is sent
wirelessly to a central server for further processing. For more
information, contact Cargotec.
Operator identification
As an option for Smartfleet, the machine can have operator
identification. Operator identification uses identification tags and a tag
reader at the rear of the cab by the door.
Using operator identification, operator-dependent functions can be

selected in Smartfleet, such as start interlock and speed limitation, for
example. For more information, contact Cargotec
Radio control

4 Instruments and controls – Radio control 105
General
As an option the machine can be equipped with radio control of the load
functions. The range for the control unit is 25 m. For more information
about operating the radio control, see Radio control, page 196.
1. EMERGENCY STOP (on side) – pull out emergency FRONT LEG UP – move the switch forward. The switch
stop before use. must be moved forward throughout the movement.
2. LIFT - pull the left-hand control lever backward. 7. REAR LEG DOWN – pull the switch backward.
The switch must be pulled backward throughout the
LOWER - move the left-hand control lever forward.
movement.
BOOM OUT – move the left-hand control lever to the right.
REAR LEG UP – move the switch forward. The switch
BOOM IN – move the left-hand control lever to the left. must be moved forward throughout the movement.
3. TILT IN – pull the right-hand control lever backward. 8. SIDE SHIFT RIGHT – pull the switch backward.
TILT OUT – move the right-hand control lever forward. SIDE SHIFT LEFT – move the switch forward.
ROTATION CLOCKWISE – move the right-hand control 9. SPREADING 40' – activate Shift and pull the switch
lever to the right. backward.
ROTATION ANTICLOCKWISE – move the right-hand SPREADING 20' – activate Shift and move the switch
control lever to the left. forward.
4. ALTERNATIVE FUNCTION (SHIFT) – move the switch 10. RADIO COMMUNICATION – press the button for
forward. The switch changes the function of the other activation of radio communication. After activation, the
controls on the control unit. button works as horn.
5. ACTIVATE CLAMPING POSITION – pull the switch INCREASE ENGINE SPEED – activate Shift and press
backward. the button to increase the engine speed by three steps.
Hold the button depressed to return to normal mode.
DEACTIVATE CLAMPING POSITION – move the switch
forward. 11. BATTERY – indicator for control unit battery voltage.
6. FRONT LEG DOWN – pull the switch backward.
The switch must be pulled backward throughout the
movement.

106 5 Handling
5 Handling
General
The machine is intended to be used in the way that is described in
the operator's manual. If the machine is used in any other way or in
potentially dangerous environments, e.g. an explosive environment,
then special safety rules must be followed and the machine must be
equipped for such an environment.
NOTE
It is the operator who is responsible for ensuring that the machine
comes in for service according to prescribed service intervals.
Procedures are described in the maintenance manual.
The information in the chapter for handling the machine does not
relieve the operator of the responsibility of following laws or other
national regulations for road safety and work safety.
Awareness, alertness, good judgement and respect for governing

safety regulations are prerequisites for avoiding accident risks.
Environmental impact
It is important that the machine is used in a way that results in minimal
environmental impact with regards to fuel consumption, exhausts, and
noise emissions. Therefore, keep the following in mind:
• Plan the work and optimise machine use.
• Avoid operating with full throttle when transporting.
• Do not rev the engine unnecessarily when load handling.
• Optimise operation with regard to acceleration and braking.
• Minimise the time the machine runs at idling speed. Do not allow
the machine to idle when there is a break in the work.

5 Handling – Handling 107
Emergency equipment
The following emergency equipment is available on the machine:
• Emergency exit from cab, right-hand door.
In an emergency:
1. Open the emergency exit right-hand door with handle on
inside.
2. Machine with hydraulic cab movement:
Emergency hammer
34 • Control breaker for load handling.

In an emergency:
1. Press down the control breaker for hydraulics (position 34)
immediately.
All load handling functions stop and the transmission is set
in neutral position.
2. Restore control breaker (turn clockwise).
012702
• Emergency lowering valve (For vertically adjustable cab)

If the cab should jam in the raised position, it can be lowered
manually with an emergency lowering valve (position A). This is
fitted on the control valve for cab movement on the right-hand
frame member, level with the cab's mast, see Hydraulic vertically
adjustable cab, page 195.
1. Check that the lock for securing the cab in raised position does
not block cab lowering.
2. Open the emergency lowering valve. The cab lowers.
3. Close the emergency lowering valve.
Emergency lowering valve, cab lift

108 5 Handling – Handling
• Manual movement of the cab with hydraulic movement.

If necessary, the hydraulic motor for hydraulic cab movement can
be disengaged so that the cab can be slid manually when the
engine has stopped.
1. Switch off the engine and park the machine.
2. Remove the protective cover over the engine's gears.
3. Remove the three screws (position A) on the gear and slide
the cab by hand.
DANGER
The cab is very heavy and the machine must not be
moved without first securing the cab.
Extreme danger! Risk of crushing!
Fit the screws on the gear for the sliding cab's
A. Screws for releasing the hydraulic motor for
hydraulic sliding cab hydraulic motor and the protective cover before
starting to operate.
4. Reset by sliding the cab so that the screws can be fitted; fit
the three screws.
5. Fit the protective cover.
• Ladder on cab frame
For situations where the cab must be evacuated and it is not
possible to lower the cab then there is a ladder on the left-hand
side of the cab frame to evacuate the cab.
1. Try to get help to lower the cab manually with the emergency
lowering valve.
2. In the event that the left-hand door is blocked by the
mechanical lock, break the rear window with the emergency
hammer.
3. Use the ladder to climb down.
• Fire extinguisher
Located within easy reach!
Ladder for evacuation of raised cab
• Display fire extinguishing system

If the fire extinguishing system fails to trigger automatically in
the event of fire, depress the switch for manual triggering (a) to
activate the fire extinguishing system.
a Switch for manual triggering.
b Warning lamp, fire.
c Warning lamp, fault in trigger coil.
d Warning lamp, fault in detector coil.
e Indicator light, manual mode.
f Indicator light, fire monitoring active.
If the indicator light is extinguished, this means there is a fault
in the voltage feed to the fire extinguishing system.
g Alarm test and reset.

5 Handling – Handling 109
• External activation control, fire extinguishing system

Visible external position on the chassis!
If the fire extinguishing system fails to trigger automatically in the
event of fire, depress the control to activate the fire extinguishing
system.

110 5 Handling – Running-in
5.1 Running-in
General
The machine should be operated with great care during the running-in
period. The intention is to considerably increase the service life of
the machine.
Recommended running-in period is 10 hours of operating time. This

results in fewer malfunctions.
Engine
The oil and filter must be changed according to intervals described in
the maintenance manual.
Transmission
The oil and filter must be changed according to intervals described in
the maintenance manual.
Tyres and rims

For a new machine it is extremely important that the wheel nuts
are check-tightened during the first week of operation until they are
properly set in. This should be done at intervals of 4-5 operating
hours (up to approx. 40-50 operating hours). Then the wheel nuts are
check-tightened according to intervals described in the maintenance
manual.

5 Handling – Daily inspection 111
5.2 Daily inspection

General
Daily inspection of the machine is extremely important in order to
ensure that it is safe both for the operator and its surroundings.
Every operator should perform checks before a new work shift. In this
way, operators can avoid running defective machines with malfunctions
that have been generated or caused during an earlier work shift.
WARNING
Never use a machine without first performing the daily
inspection.
Risk of personal injury and property damage!
For work instructions, see 6.1 Daily inspection, page
213. Report to the foreman/supervisor if defects are
found on the machine during daily inspection!
For work instructions, see 6.1 Daily inspection, page 213.

112 5 Handling – Error codes
5.3 Error codes

Error codes, general
Error codes indicate that there is a defect on the machine. Errors are
d indicated by an Indicator light for active errors (position 18) on the
a steering wheel panel. The number of active errors is totalled on the
display (position a-c). Some error codes are displayed via pop-up
e menus to attract the operator's attention. The error codes should be
b used by operators and service technicians to identify faults and to
implement suitable action.
c In case of an error code indication, it's very important to identify the

error code and to perform an action to correct the problem.
015223 All error code information for active and inactive error codes is collected
a. Number of active error codes with error code on the operating menu Customer settings and the sub-menus Active
level stop. Errors (position d) and Error history (position e).
b. Number of active error codes with error code Select Active Errors or Error history with or and press to
level warning. activate the desired menu.
c. Number of active error codes with error code
level information.
d. Menu for active error codes, Active errors.
e. Menu for inactive error codes, Error history.
Error code information via pop-up menu
Error code information via pop-up menu

Error codes are automatically shown via pop-up menus on the display.
Some information about the error code can be read out directly by
the symbols in the pop-up menu. The menus Active errors and Error
history show detailed information about the error codes.
Press to show specific detailed information via the Active errors

menu.
Press to confirm the error and the display returns to show the menu
that was active before the pop-up men was activated. If there are more
015224
active errors, the next pop-up menu is shown.
Example figure
Error code information Active errors
Error code information Active errors

Detailed information about the error codes are presented under Active
errors where, among others, the error code level, action with error code
and the device that generated the error code are presented.
For information about how the error code should be interpreted, see
Field d: Error code number, page 119.
Scroll through active error codes with and . Leave the error code
list by pressing the function key .
015225
Example figure Active errors

5 Handling – Error codes 113
Error code information in Error history
Error code information in Error history

Detailed information about the last 50 inactive error codes is presented
under Error history where, amongst other things, the error code level,
the unit that generated the error code and the date and time are
presented.
For information about how the error code should be interpreted, see
Field d: Error code number, page 119.
Scroll through inactive error codes with and . Leave the error code
list by pressing the function key .
014945
Example figure Error history
Action in the event of error code
CAUTION
STOP indicates a malfunction in the machine which
may affect the safety of the operator and others in the
vicinity or may cause a breakdown. Read the error
code. Switch off the engine and perform action in
accordance with the error code table.
WARNING and INFORMATION alarms indicate
malfunctions of such character that work does not
have to be stopped immediately. The capacity of the
machine may be reduced and specific functions may
stop working. - Perform the measures according to the
error code table immediately.
1 Errors are indicated through the pop-up menus, and by an indicator

light for active errors (position 18) being lit.
Stop the machine and let the engine run at idle speed.
2 Identify error code level, see Field a: Error code level, page 116.
NOTE
If several error codes come from the engine or transmission, the
error code level is shown for the most serious error code.
015224
3 Note all error codes. For explanation, see Display figure for error
code information, page 116.
4 Perform the action depending on the action symbol shown in the
Example figure
middle field, see Field b: Operator action, page 116.
5 Check: Start the engine and check under Active errors that the
error code has disappeared.

114 5 Handling – Error code indication
5.3.1 Error code indication

General
Error codes are indicated with an activated indicator light for active
error codes (position 18) and a pop-up menu. The error codes are
divided into three error code levels depending on their severity.
The error code levels are shown as follows:

a b c d • STOP is indicated by:
1. Lit indicator light for active fault codes (position 18).
2. STOP symbol in the pop-up menu.
3. Red border around the pop-up menu.
• WARNING indicated by:
2. Warning triangle in the pop-up menu.
3. Yellow border around the pop-up menu.
• INFORMATION indicated by.
2. Information symbol in the pop-up menu.
3. Grey border around the pop-up menu.
015226
a Symbol for the error code level

STOP, WARNING or INFORMATION
b Symbol for action
c Symbol for component
d Border indicates error code level
Red = STOP
Yellow = WARNING
Grey = INFORMATION

5 Handling – Error code information on display 115
5.3.2 Error code information on display

Error code display
Error code information is shown with display figures in two ways:
• Automatically in display.
The error code is confirmed by . When the error code is
confirmed the display returns to the previous selected menu. If the
error code is active then it is stored in the error code list under the
operating menu Active errors.
If the error code remains active, the figure returns in the display
within 3-5 minutes. Level STOP error codes are shown five times,
WARNING three times and INFORMATION once or not at all.
014954
Example of automatic figure in display
• In error code list Active errors.

Active error codes are stored in the error code list. Navigate to
the operating menu Customer settings with or , select Active
errors and confirm with . Navigate the error code list with the
function keys and . Leave the error code list by pressing the
function key .
NOTE
If error code isn't included in the error code list, it may be due to
015225
the following:
– condition for error detection no longer exists, e.g., control
Example of the error code list Active errors
lever is released or engine is off.
– loose connection/poor contact.

116 5 Handling – Error code information on display
Display figure for error code information

The menus are divided into fields where the information is displayed.
• Field a: Error code level. Shown with a symbol.
• Field b: Operator action. Shown with a symbol.
• Field c: Component that generated the error code. Shown with
a b c a symbol.
• Field d: Error code.
• Field e: Number of errors. For Error history the number of errors
is limited to the last 50 errors.
015228
• Field f: Number of errors on each error code level.
h
• Field g: Date and time.
Pop-up menu for error codes • Field h: Number of unconfirmed pop-up menus.
Field a: Error code level

e
f The control and monitoring system gives error code information in three
d levels which are indicated with a symbol in the display unit.
Symbol Action
a b c STOP
Indicates a serious malfunction that may jeopardise
the operator's safety or cause machine failure. The
015229
error code must be attended to immediately.
WARNING
Active error codes shown in Active errors
Indicates malfunction in machine that should be
taken care of as soon as possible.
e
f
d INFORMATION
a g c
Information to the operator that something should
be rectified, e.g. broken bulb. Rectify the cause
at a suitable opportunity. Instructions for action
are normally found in chapter 6 Inspection and
maintenance.
015230
Field b: Operator action

The control system provides information about what action the operator
Inactive error codes are shown in Error history
should carry out. The information is indicated with a symbol on the
display unit.
Symbol Action
Carry out action according to the daily inspection,
see Instructions, page 213.
Error requires action by trained personnel.

One of the functions of the machine is not working
fully.
Critical error.
Errors that may jeopardise the machine or safety,
such as low oil pressure or overload. Stop the
machine and safeguard the error.
Read the operator's manual.

Field c: Affected function

For an explanation of the display fields, see Display figure for error
Symbol Function Symbol Function Symbol Function

Engine Fuel level AdBlue level
Temperature electric Temperature electric Particulate filters

motor hydraulics motor drive
Exhaust temperature Air filter Engine coolant level
Coolant temperature Engine oil level Preheating engine

engine
Transmission Oil temperature torque Lock-up, torque converter

converter
Differential locks Transmission oil level Oil pressure, transmission
Transmission oil Power transmission Tyre pressure

temperature
Regulator (inverter) Brakes Brake pressure
Parking brake Oil temperature brake Steering

system
Suspension Load handling Control levers
Lift/lower Lift/lower Extension
Side shift Side shift Spreading (positioning)
Spreading (positioning) Rotation Tilt
Tilt lock Tilt Levelling

Symbol Function Symbol Function Symbol Function

Levelling lock Levelling Contact twistlocks
Locked twistlocks Unlocked twistlocks Contact top lift attachment
Contact side-lift Bottom lift attachment Support jacks

attachment
Control system Boom angle Boom length
Scales Overload system Overload system
Height limit Frame, body, cab and Hour meter (operating

accessories hours)
Seat Revolving driver's seat Air conditioning
ECH, ECC Fresh air filter Pause heater
Temperature water heater Recirculation Washer fluid
Wipers Revolving or flashing Lighting

beacon
Horn Heating rear Cab sliding length

windscreen/rear view
mirrors
Vertically adjustable cab Tiltable cab Central lubrication
Hydraulic oil filter Hydraulic oil temperature Battery charging
CAN bus CAN bus drivetrain

Field d: Error code number
Field d: Error code number

The control system gives error codes from the machine's sub-systems:
1 2 3 Device number (AAA)

The first part of the error code specifies the device that generated the
error. The following devices can generate error codes:
Device number Unit

1–99 Devices in the RedCAN system
100 Engine
111 Transmission ZF
210 Exhaust system
015233
Component type (B)

Example figure error codes A letter before the digits in the component number specifies the type of
1. Device number (AAA) component concerned. The following component types can be read:
2. Component number (SPN) (BCCCC-DD)
Component letter Component type
3. Type of error (FMI) (E)
A Unit
B Sensor
D Control unit
E White light
F Fuse
G Battery or alternator
H Signal unit for audio or light
K Relay
M Electric motor
P Meter
R Resistor, potentiometer
S Switch, contact
X Connector
Y Solenoid valve
Component (CCCC)
The digits are a unique number (SPN) to locate the faulty component.

Component placement (DD)

In cases where multiple components have the same component
number two letters or a serial number 1-9 are added to make the error
code unique. The letters usually denote a location on the machine.
The following locations are used:
Letters Location
LE Left
RI Right
UP Upper
LO Lower
FR Front
LF Left front
RF Right front
RE Rear
LR Left rear
RR Right rear
Type of error (EE)

The FMI code denotes the type of error.
Table Specifications FMI
FMI Description SAE text

0 Value too high. Data valid, but higher than normal operating range.
1 Value too low. Data valid, but lower than normal operating range.
2 Incorrect data. Intermittent or incorrect data.
3 Electrical problem. Abnormally high voltage or short-circuit to higher voltage.
4 Electrical problem. Abnormally low voltage or short-circuit to lower voltage.
5 Electrical problem. Abnormally low current or open circuit.
6 Electrical problem. Abnormally high current or short-circuit to ground.
7 Mechanical problem. Incorrect response from mechanical system.
8 Mechanical problem or electrical Abnormal frequency.
problem.
9 Communication error. Abnormal update rate.
10 Mechanical problem or electrical Abnormally wide variations.
problem.
11 Unknown malfunction. Non-identifiable malfunction.
12 Component error. Incorrect unit or component.
13 Incorrect calibration. Values outside calibration values.
14 Unknown malfunction. Special instructions.
15 Value too high. Data valid but higher than normal operating range: The least serious
level.
16 Value too high. Data valid but higher than normal operating range: Moderately
serious level.
17 Value too low. Data valid but under normal operating range: The least serious level.
18 Value too low. Data valid but under normal operating range: Moderately serious
level.
19 Communication error. Received network data incorrect.

FMI Description SAE text

20 Data too high. Data valid but higher than normal value.
21 Data too low. Data valid but lower than normal value.
22-30 Reserved for SAE allocation.
31 FMI not available or the condition Not available or the condition exists.
indicated by SPN exists.
32 Electrical problem. Abnormally high resistance or short-circuit to higher voltage.
33 Electrical problem. Abnormally low resistance or short-circuit to lower voltage.
34 Time exceeded. Time exceeded.
35 Communication error. CAN bus error.
36 Communication error. Driver error.
37 Communication error. Over flow.
38 Communication error. Error passive stat.
39 Communication error. Baud rate.
40 Communication error. Control unit disappears (stop sending messages) after start up.
41 Communication error. Control unit missing on start up.
42 Communication error. CAN-bus segment after the control unit is faulty. Normal side.
43 Communication error. CAN-bus segment after the control unit is faulty. RedCAN side.
44 Communication error. Control unit incorrectly positioned RedCAN circuit.
45 Communication error. Checksum error in the control unit.
Field e: Number of error codes

Specifies the number of menu pages with active fault codes in Active
errors and the number of menu pages with inactive error codes Error
history.
Field f: Number of errors on each error code level

Specifies the number of active error codes on each error code level.
Field g: Date and time

Specifies the date and time when the error code was confirmed.
Field h: Number of unconfirmed pop-up menus

Specifies the number of unconfirmed pop-up menus.

122 5 Handling – Error code tables
5.3.3 Error code tables

General
Error codes are sorted in numerical order. The tables contain the
following information:
• Code - Indicates error code.
• Description - Indicates description of the error code as well as any
limitation that can occur in the machine in case of the error code
in question.
• Action - Indicates STOP/WARNING/INFORMATION for action
according to error code level, with or without detailed information.
If the error code number isn't included in the error code table, contact
service.
Error codes machine
Error codes machine
Type SPN FMI Nod- Loca- Description Action

e tion
H 1037 6 11 2 Indicator light, levelling lock, in control WARNING!
lever.
S 1310 7 11 Travel direction selector, logical error. STOP!
B 2190 2 1 Sensor, cab filter. INFO
B 2460 2 1 Low pressure, air conditioning. WARNING!
K 3150 6 1 Relay, ignition, grounded circuit. STOP!
K 3312 6 1 Driving forward relay, signal status. INFORMATION
K 3312 6 2 Driving forward relay, signal status. INFORMATION
K 3320 6 1 Driving reverse relay, signal status. INFORMATION
K 3320 6 2 Driving reverse relay, signal status. INFORMATION
K 3600 6 2 Relay, starter motor. WARNING!
Only Cummins QSM11.
E 4000 5 2 LE Low beam, left. Check the lamp. INFORMATION
E 4000 6 2 LE Low beam, left. INFORMATION
E 4000 5 2 RI Low beam, right. Check the lamp. INFORMATION
E 4000 6 2 RI Low beam, right. INFORMATION
E 4020 5 2 LE High beam, left. Check the lamp. INFORMATION
E 4020 6 2 LE High beam, left. INFORMATION
E 4020 5 2 RI High beam, right. Check the lamp. INFORMATION
E 4020 6 2 RI High beam, right. INFORMATION
E 4041 5 2 1 Extra work lights, frame left. Check the INFORMATION
lamp.
E 4041 6 2 1 Extra work lights, frame left. INFORMATION
E 4041 5 2 2 Extra work lights, frame right. Check the INFORMATION
lamp.
E 4041 6 2 2 Extra work lights, frame right. INFORMATION
E 4042 5 1 LE Extra work lights, cab left. Check the INFORMATION
lamp.
E 4042 6 1 LE Extra work lights, cab left. INFORMATION

5 Handling – Error code tables 123
Error codes machine

e tion
E 4042 5 1 RI Extra work lights, cab right. Check the INFORMATION
lamp.
E 4042 6 1 RI Extra work lights, cab right. INFORMATION
E 4042 6 1 1 Extra work lights left. INFORMATION
E 4042 6 1 2 Extra work lights right. INFORMATION
E 4043 5 2 LE Work lights boom left. Check the lamp. INFORMATION
E 4043 6 2 LE Work lights boom left. INFORMATION
E 4043 5 2 RI Work lights boom right. Check the lamp. INFORMATION
E 4043 6 2 RI Work lights boom right. INFORMATION
E 4044 5 7 LE Work lights attachment, left. Check the WARNING!
lamp.
E 4044 6 7 LE Work lights attachment, left. WARNING!
E 4044 5 7 LE-B Extra work lights attachment, left. Check WARNING!
the lamp.
E 4044 6 7 LE-B Extra work lights attachment, left. WARNING!
E 4044 5 7 RI Work lights attachment, right. Check the WARNING!
lamp.
E 4044 6 7 RI Work lights attachment, right. WARNING!
E 4044 5 7 RE-B Extra work lights attachment, right. Check WARNING!
the lamp.
E 4044 6 7 RE-B Extra work lights attachment, right. WARNING!
E 4045 5 6 LF Extra work lights attachment lift leg left WARNING!
front. Check the lamp.
E 4045 6 6 LF Extra work lights attachment lift leg left WARNING!
front.
E 4045 5 6 RF Extra work lights attachment lift leg right WARNING!
front. Check the lamp.
E 4045 6 6 RF Extra work lights attachment lift leg right WARNING!
front.
E 4045 5 6 LR Extra work lights attachment lift leg left WARNING!
rear. Check the lamp.
E 4045 6 6 LR Extra work lights attachment lift leg left WARNING!
rear.
E 4045 5 6 RR Extra work lights attachment lift leg right WARNING!
rear. Check the lamp.
E 4045 6 6 RR Extra work lights attachment lift leg right WARNING!
rear.
H 4110 6 2 Brake light. INFORMATION
H 4120 6 2 1 Tail lights. INFORMATION
H 4160 6 2 Position light. INFORMATION
H 4220 6 2 LE Direction indicators left. INFORMATION
H 4220 6 2 RI Direction indicators right. INFORMATION
H 4281 6 2 Revolving beacon, frame WARNING!

Error codes machine

e tion
H 4283 6 1 Revolving beacon, boom. WARNING!
H 4284 6, 5 7 Revolving beacon, attachment. WARNING!
E 4340 6 1 Interior lighting. WARNING!
H 5001 6 7 Indicator light overheight legs up. WARNING!
H 5620 6 1 2 Indicator light unlocked twistlocks (roof WARNING!
panel cab).
H 5620 6 7 1 Indicator light, unlocked twistlocks WARNING!
H 5630 6 1 2 Indicator light, locked twistlocks (roof WARNING!
panel cab).
H 5630 6 7 1 Indicator light, locked twistlocks. WARNING!
H 5640 6 1 2 Indicator light, contact (roof panel cab). WARNING!
H 5640 6 7 1 Indicator light, contact twistlocks. WARNING!
H 5740 6 1 Indicator light, support jacks down, WARNING!
grounded circuit (roof panel cab).
H 5760 6 6 LF Indicator light contact lift leg left front. WARNING!
H 5760 6 6 RF Indicator light contact lift leg right front. WARNING!
H 5760 6 6 LR Indicator light contact lift leg left rear. WARNING!
H 5760 6 6 RR Indicator light contact lift leg right rear. WARNING!
H 5780 6 6 FR Indicator light lift legs clamping position WARNING!
front.
H 5780 6 6 RE Indicator light lift legs clamping position WARNING!
rear.
H 5800 6 6 UP Indicator light lift legs front up. WARNING!
H 5800 6 6 LO Indicator light lift legs front down. WARNING!
H 5991 6 1 0 Indicator light, buckled seat belt. WARNING!
H 5992 6 1 Indicator light, Mini steering wheel/joystick WARNING!
control.
H 5993 6 11 3 Indicator light, tilt lock, control lever. WARNING!
Y 6003 6, 5 2 Solenoid valve engagement of hydraulic WARNING!
top lift.
Y 6004 6, 5 2 Solenoid valve lower. WARNING!
Y 6005 6, 5 2 Solenoid valve lift. WARNING!
Y 6006 6, 5 2 Solenoid valve boom out. WARNING!
Y 6007 6, 5 2 Solenoid valve boom in. WARNING!
Y 6008 6, 5 7 2 Solenoid valve rotation clockwise. WARNING!
Y 6009 6, 5 7 2 Solenoid valve rotation anticlockwise. WARNING!
Y 6010 6, 5 7 Solenoid valve tilt out WARNING!
Y 6011 6, 5 7 Solenoid valve tilt in WARNING!
Y 6012 6, 5 7 1 Solenoid valve tilt lock. WARNING!
Y 6012 6, 5 7 2 Solenoid valve tilt lock. WARNING!
Y 6016 6, 5 2 Solenoid valve cab movement up/forward. WARNING!

Error codes machine

e tion
Y 6016 6, 5 3 Solenoid valve cab movement up WARNING!
Y 6017 6, 5 2 Solenoid valve cab movement WARNING!
lower/backward.
Y 6017 6, 5 3 Solenoid valve cab movement lower. WARNING!
Y 6018 6, 5 7 Solenoid valve spreading out. WARNING!
Solenoid valve function lifting tool, tool
changer open/out.
Y 6019 6, 5 7 Solenoid valve spreading in. WARNING!
Alternative solenoid valve function lifting
tool, tool changer close/in.
Y 6020 6, 5 7 LE Solenoid valve side shift left. WARNING!
Y 6021 6, 5 7 RI Solenoid valve side shift right. WARNING!
Y 6034 6, 5 7 1 Solenoid valve levelling lock. WARNING!
Y 6034 6, 5 7 2 Solenoid valve levelling lock. WARNING!
Y 6035 6, 5 7 Solenoid valve levelling anticlockwise. WARNING!
Y 6036 6, 5 7 Solenoid valve levelling clockwise. WARNING!
Y 6039 6, 5 7 2 Solenoid valve open twistlocks. WARNING!
Y 6040 6, 5 7 2 Solenoid valve lock twistlocks. WARNING!
Y 6045 6, 5 2 RI Solenoid valve blocking lower right. WARNING!
Y 6045 6, 5 2 LE Solenoid valve blocking lower left. WARNING!
Y 6050 6, 5 2 Solenoid valve blocking boom in. WARNING!
Y 6051 6, 5 2 1 Solenoid valve regeneration boom out. WARNING!
Y 6051 6, 5 2 RI Solenoid valve regeneration lift right. WARNING!
Y 6051 6, 5 2 LE Solenoid valve regeneration lift left. WARNING!
Y 6053 6, 5 6 LE Solenoid valve operating position left. WARNING!
Y 6053 6, 5 6 RI Solenoid valve operating position right. WARNING!
Y 6054 6, 5 6 LE Solenoid valve clamp left. WARNING!
Y 6054 6, 5 6 RI Solenoid valve clamp right. WARNING!
Y 6054 6 7 Solenoid valve clamp ELME. WARNING!
Y 6055 6, 5 6 LE Solenoid valve unclamp left. WARNING!
Y 6055 6, 5 6 RI Solenoid valve unclamp right. WARNING!
Y 6055 6 7 Solenoid valve unclamp ELME. WARNING!
Y 6056 6, 5 6 LF Solenoid valve knee in left front. WARNING!
Y 6056 6, 5 6 RF Solenoid valve knee in right front. WARNING!
Y 6056 6, 5 6 LR Solenoid valve knee in left rear. WARNING!
Y 6056 6, 5 6 RR Solenoid valve knee in right rear. WARNING!
Y 6057 6, 5 6 LF Solenoid valve knee out left front. WARNING!
Y 6057 6, 5 6 RF Solenoid valve knee out right front. WARNING!
Y 6057 6, 5 6 LR Solenoid valve knee out left rear. WARNING!
Y 6057 6, 5 6 RR Solenoid valve knee out right rear. WARNING!

Error codes machine

e tion
Y 6058 6, 5 6 LF Solenoid valve leg up left front. WARNING!
Y 6058 6, 5 6 RF Solenoid valve leg up right front. WARNING!
Y 6058 6, 5 6 LR Solenoid valve leg up left rear. WARNING!
Y 6058 5, 6 7 RR Solenoid valve leg up right rear. WARNING!
Y 6058 6 7 FR Solenoid valve leg up front ELME. WARNING!
Y 6058 6 7 RE Solenoid valve leg up rear ELME. WARNING!
Y 6059 6, 5 6 LF Solenoid valve leg down left front. WARNING!
Y 6059 6, 5 6 RF Solenoid valve leg down right front. WARNING!
Y 6059 6, 5 6 LR Solenoid valve leg down left rear. WARNING!
Y 6059 5, 6 7 RR Solenoid valve leg down right rear. WARNING!
Y 6059 6 7 FR Solenoid valve leg down front ELME. WARNING!
Y 6059 6 7 RE Solenoid valve leg down rear ELME. WARNING!
Y 6063 5, 6 3 Solenoid valve support jacks up. WARNING!
Y 6064 5, 6 3 Solenoid valve support jacks down. WARNING!
Y 6065 5,6 7 Solenoid valve disengage rotation. WARNING!
Y 6070 6, 5 7 Solenoid valve overheight legs up. WARNING!
Y 6071 6, 5 7 Solenoid valve overheight legs down. WARNING!
Y 6093 6, 5 2 Solenoid valve pump unloading boom in. WARNING!
Y 6120 6, 5 1 1 Damper motor, recirculation. INFORMATION
Y 6120 6, 5 1 2 Damper motor, recirculation. INFORMATION
Y 6150 6 2 1 Voltage feed to electric control module for STOP!
joystick control/mini steering wheel.
Y 6150 6 2 2 Electric control module for joystick STOP!
control/mini steering wheel.
Y 6150 2 2 3 Electric control module for joystick STOP!
control/mini steering wheel.
Y 6150 31 2 Control unit control valve feedback seat STOP!
position and Control unit mini-wheel or
joystick control (Y6150) are missing.
Y 6420 2, 5, 2 Solenoid valve parking brake. STOP!
6
Y 6450 6, 5 2 Electromagnetic clutch cooling INFORMATION
compressor.
M 6502 7 1 Wiper rear window, position signal. INFORMATION
M 6502 6, 5 1 Rear windscreen wipers. INFORMATION
M 6503 7 1 Combined wipers, windscreen and roof INFORMATION
window, position signal.
Alternative wiper roof window, position
signal.
M 6503 6, 5 1 Combined wipers, windscreen and roof INFORMATION
window.
Alternative wiper roof window.
M 6511 6 1 Motor washing, front windscreen. INFORMATION

Error codes machine

e tion
M 6512 6, 5 1 Motor washing, rear windscreen. INFORMATION
M 6513 6, 5 1 Motor washing, combined wipers front INFORMATION
windscreen and roof window.
Alternative motor washing, roof window.
M 6570 6, 5 1 Cabin fan. INFORMATION
M 6580 6 2 Electromagnetic clutch cooling fan motor.
M 6590 6 2 Cooling fan intercooler.
M 6590 7 2 LE Cooling fan intercooler.
M 6590 7 2 RI Cooling fan intercooler.
M 6670 6, 5 1 Circulation pump pause heater. INFORMATION
M 6680 6, 5 2 Cooling fan, hydraulic oil cooler. WARNING!
Y 6720 3, 4 1 Damper motor air distribution, position INFORMATION
signal.
Y 6720 6, 5 1 1 Damper motor air distribution. INFORMATION
Y 6720 6, 5 1 2 Damper motor air distribution. INFORMATION
Y 6730 3, 4 1 Heating valve, position signal. INFORMATION
Y 6730 6, 5 1 1 Heating valve. INFORMATION
Y 6730 6, 5 1 2 Heating valve. INFORMATION
M 6740 6, 5 2 Cooling valve oil cooler brake system. WARNING!
R 6900 3, 4 11 1 Accelerator pedal, signal A. WARNING!
R 6900 3, 4 11 2 Accelerator pedal, signal B. WARNING!
M 6930 6, 5 2 1 Pump central lubrication frame. INFORMATION
M 6930 5, 6 7 2 Pump central lubrication attachment. INFORMATION
B 6941 3, 4, 11 Engine right dashboard panel INFORMATION
7 forward/backward position signal.
M 6941 6 11 1, 2 Engine right dashboard panel INFORMATION
forward/backward.
B 6942 3, 4, 11 Engine right dashboard panel up/down INFORMATION
7 position signal.
M 6942 6 11 1, 2 Engine right dashboard panel up/down. INFORMATION
B 6943 3, 4, 11 Engine steering wheel panel up/down INFORMATION
7 position signal.
M 6943 6 11 1, 2 Engine steering wheel panel up/down. INFORMATION
P 7080 14 1, 3, Operating hours do not correspond WARNING!
6, 7, to reference Control unit frame KFU
11, 12 (D7971).
B 7202 2 7 Sensor, contact jammed. WARNING!
Check that the indicator pin is not binding
and that the sensor is clean.
B 7205 7 7 LE Sensor, twistlocks locked and open WARNING!
simultaneously.
Check that the sensor is clean.

Error codes machine

e tion
B 7205 7 7 RI Sensor, twistlocks locked and open WARNING!
simultaneously
Check that the sensor is clean.
B 7226 3, 4 2 1 Sensor hydraulic pressure, lift cylinder WARNING!
piston side left.
B 7226 3, 4 2 2 Sensor hydraulic pressure, lift cylinder WARNING!
piston side right.
B 7226 3, 4 2 3 Sensor hydraulic pressure, lift cylinder rod WARNING!
side left.
B 7226 3, 4 2 4 Sensor hydraulic pressure, lift cylinder rod WARNING!
side right.
B 7230 3, 4 7 Sensor damping attachment. INFORMATION
B 7235 3, 4 6 LF Sensor load attachment. WARNING!
B 7235 3, 4 6 LR Sensor load attachment. WARNING!
B 7235 3, 4 6 RF Sensor load attachment. WARNING!
B 7235 3, 4 6 RR Sensor load attachment. WARNING!
B 7241 3, 4, 2 Sensor boom angle. WARNING!
7
B 7242 7 2 Central lubrication frame. INFORMATION
B 7242 7 7 Central lubrication, attachment INFORMATION
B 7252 3, 4 11 Ambient light intensity sensor. WARNING!
B 7253 3,4 7 Tilt angle attachment. WARNING!
B 7254 3, 4 1 Sensor, cab position. WARNING!
B 7255 3,4 1 Sensor tilt angle, cab. WARNING!
B 7570 3, 4 2 Sensor fuel level. INFORMATION
B 7572 3,4,1 2 LE Sensor back pressure, exhaust system. WARNING!
5,16
B 7680 3, 4 7 LE Sensor function lifting tool, tool changer WARNING!
left.
B 7680 3, 4 7 RI Sensor function lifting tool, tool changer WARNING!
right.
B 7681 3, 4 2 Brake pressure sensor. WARNING!
B 7682 3, 4, 2 Sensor parking brake WARNING!
15
B 7683 3, 4 2 Accumulator pressure sensor. WARNING!
B 7686 3, 4, 2 Sensor boom length. WARNING!
7
B 7720 0 2 High temperature oil brake system. STOP!
B 7720 32, 2 Sensor, oil temperature brake system. WARNING!
33
B 7740 32, 1 Ambient temperature sensor. INFORMATION
33
B 7751 32, 1 Inner temperature sensor. INFORMATION
33

Error codes machine

e tion
B 7752 32, 1 Fan temperature sensor. INFORMATION
33
B 7753 32, 1 Temperature display sensor. INFORMATION
33
B 7760 32, 2 Hydraulic oil temperature sensor. WARNING!
33
B 7770 3, 4 7 Side shift sensor. WARNING!
A 7870 2 2 Sensor fault, overload system. STOP!
D 7901 31 12 Control unit missing. STOP!
D 7930 31 2 1 Control unit missing. STOP!
D 7940 31 2 1 Control unit missing. STOP!
E 8020 6, 5 2 Electrically-heated rear view mirror. INFORMATION
R 8070 3, 4 11 1 Control lever lift/lower. WARNING!
R 8070 3, 4 11 2 Control lever, boom out/in and levelling. WARNING!
R 8070 3, 4 11 3 Control lever, tilt and rotation. WARNING!
R 8070 3, 4 11 4 Control lever, side shift and spreading. WARNING!
R 8250 3, 4 1 Potentiometer joystick control. STOP!
R 8250 3, 4 1 1 Potentiometer mini-steering wheel, STOP!
channel 1.
R 8250 3, 4 1 2 Potentiometer mini-steering wheel, STOP!
channel 2.
H 8500 6 1 Horn. WARNING!
K 8881 6 1 Relay rear windscreen heating. INFORMATION
H 9003 6, 5 7 Buzzer automatic spreading 20'–40'. WARNING!
D 9130 14 2 1 Sensor tyre pressure, left front outer INFORMATION
wheel.
D 9130 14 2 2 Sensor tyre pressure, left front inner INFORMATION
wheel.
D 9130 14 2 3 Sensor tyre pressure, right front inner INFORMATION
wheel.
D 9130 14 2 4 Sensor tyre pressure, right front outer INFORMATION
wheel.
D 9130 14 2 5 Sensor tyre pressure, left rear. INFORMATION
D 9130 14 2 6 Sensor tyre pressure, right rear. INFORMATION
D 9130 13, 2 Tyre pressure monitoring system. INFORMATION
31
A 9630 6, 5 2 Fire extinguishing system.
H 9650 6 2 1 Reverse alarm. WARNING!
10002 14 1 Configuration number does not STOP!
correspond for Control unit KCU (D7901).

Error codes machine

e tion
correspond for Control unit KFU (D7971).
correspond for Control unit KFU-2
(D7972).
correspond for Control unit KAU-2
(D7912).
correspond for Control unit KAU (D7911).
correspond for Control unit KPU (D7902).
correspond for Control unit KID (D7950).
10003 14 1 Program version does not correspond for WARNING!
Control unit KCU (D7901).
Control unit KFU (D7971).
Control unit KFU-2 (D7972).
Control unit KAU-2 (D7912).
Control unit KAU (D7911).
Control unit KPU (D7902).
Control unit KID (D7950).
10004 14 1 No Setup file for Control unit KCU STOP!
(D7901).
10004 14 2 No Setup file for Control unit KFU (D7971). STOP!
10004 14 3 No Setup file for Control unit KFU-2 STOP!
(D7972).
10004 14 6 No Setup file for Control unit KAU-2 STOP!
(D7912).
10004 14 7 No Setup file for Control unit KAU (D7911). STOP!
10004 14 11 No Setup file for Control unit KPU STOP!
(D7902).
10004 14 12 No Setup file for Control unit KID (D7950). STOP!
10005 14 1 1 No drivetrain parameter file, Control unit STOP!
KCU (D7901).
KCU KFU (D7971).
10005 14 2 2 No load sensor parameter file, Control STOP!
unit KCU KFU (D7971).
10005 14 2 3 No fuel tank parameter file, Control unit STOP!
KCU KFU (D7971).

Error codes machine

e tion
10005 14 2 4 No central lubrication parameter file, STOP!
10005 14 2 5 No front tyre parameter file, Control unit STOP!
KFU (D7971).
10005 14 2 6 No overload system (OLS) parameter file, STOP!
10005 14 2 7 No parameter file Eco Drive Mode (EDM), STOP!
10005 14 7 4 Parameter file central lubrication STOP!
attachment missing, Control unit KAU
(D7911).
10005 14 11 7 No control lever parameter file, Control STOP!
unit KPU (D7902).
KID (D7950).
10101 3 1 Battery voltage Control unit KCU (D7901). WARNING!
10101 4 1 Battery voltage Control unit KCU (D7901). STOP!
Check the fuses.
10102 3 1 Ignition voltage Control unit KCU (D7901). WARNING!
10102 4 1 Ignition voltage Control unit KCU (D7901). STOP!
Check the fuses.
10102 3 2 Ignition voltage Control unit KFU (D7971). WARNING!
10102 4 2 Ignition voltage Control unit KFU (D7971). STOP!
Check the fuses.
10102 6 2 2 Ignition voltage Control unit engine WARNING!
(D7940).
10102 3 3 Ignition voltage Control unit KFU-2 WARNING!
(D7972).
10102 4 3 Ignition voltage Control unit KFU-2 STOP!
(D7972). Check the fuses.
10102 3 6 Ignition voltage Control unit KAU-2 STOP!
(D7912).
10102 4 6 Ignition voltage Control unit KAU-2 STOP!
(D7912). Check the fuses.
10102 3 7 Ignition voltage Control unit KAU (D7911). WARNING!
10102 4 7 Ignition voltage Control unit KAU (D7911). STOP!
Check the fuses.
10102 3 11 Ignition voltage Control unit KPU (D7902). WARNING!
10102 4 11 Ignition voltage Control unit KPU (D7902). STOP!
Check the fuses.
10102 3 12 Ignition voltage Control unit KID (D7950). WARNING!
10102 4 12 Ignition voltage Control unit KID (D7950). STOP!
Check the fuses.
10103 6 1 Redundant voltage feed Control unit KCU STOP!
(D7901).
10103 3, 4 2 Redundant voltage feed Control unit KFU STOP!
(D7971).

Error codes machine

e tion
10103 3, 4 3 Redundant voltage feed Control unit STOP!
KFU-2 (D7972).
10103 3, 4 6 Redundant voltage feed Control unit STOP!
KAU-2 (D7912).
10103 3, 4 7 Redundant voltage feed Control unit KAU STOP!
(D7911).
10103 4 11 Redundant voltage feed Control unit KPU STOP!
(D7902).
10103 3, 4 12 Redundant voltage feed Control unit KID STOP!
(D7950).
10104 3, 4 1 5V reference voltage Control unit KCU WARNING!
(D7901).
10104 3, 4 2 5V reference voltage Control unit KFU WARNING!
(D7971).
10104 3, 4 3 5V reference voltage Control unit KFU-2 WARNING!
(D7972).
10104 3, 4 6 5V reference voltage Control unit KAU-2 WARNING!
(D7912).
10104 3, 4 7 5V reference voltage Control unit KAU WARNING!
(D7911).
10104 3, 4 11 5V reference voltage Control unit KPU WARNING!
(D7902).
10104 3, 4 11 1 5V voltage feed to steering wheel panel. WARNING!
10104 6 11 2 Background lighting, steering wheel WARNING!
panel.
10104 6 11 3 Function lighting, steering wheel panel. WARNING!
10104 3, 4 12 5V reference voltage Control unit KID WARNING!
(D7950).
10105 2, 6 2 1, 2 Reference ground Control unit KFU WARNING!
(D7971).
10105 2, 6 3 1, 2 Reference ground Control unit KFU-2 WARNING!
(D7972).
10105 2, 6 6 1, 2, 3 Reference ground Control unit KAU-2 WARNING!
(D7912).
10105 2, 6 7 1, 2, 3 Reference ground Control unit KAU WARNING!
(D7911).
10106 6 1 24V voltage feed left-hand arm rest (mini STOP!
steering wheel/joystick control).
10106 6 2 1 24V voltage feed sensor frame. WARNING!
10106 6 6 LF 24V voltage feed sensor lift leg, front left. WARNING!
10106 6 6 RF 24V voltage feed sensor lift leg, front right. WARNING!
10106 6 6 LR 24V voltage feed sensor lift leg, rear left. WARNING!
10106 6 6 RR 24V voltage feed sensor lift leg, rear right. WARNING!
10106 6 7 1 24V voltage feed sensor attachment, WARNING!
ELME.
10106 6 7 LE 24V voltage feed sensor attachment, left. WARNING!

Error codes machine

e tion
10106 6 7 RI 24V voltage feed sensor attachment, right. WARNING!
10106 6 11 1 24V voltage feed switch cab. WARNING!
10106 6 11 2 24V voltage feed switch cab. WARNING!
10106 6 11 3 24V voltage feed components cab. WARNING!
10106 6 11 4 24V voltage feed control breaker. WARNING!
10107 6 11 1 Guide lights dashboard panel. WARNING!
10201 40 12 CAN bus, control unit disappeared after STOP!
start-up, Control unit KID (D7950).
10201 41 12 CAN bus, control unit not found at start-up, STOP!
10201 42 12 CAN bus, segment error normal side, WARNING!
10201 43 12 CAN bus, segment error RedCAN side, WARNING!
10201 44 12 CAN bus, control unit misplaced, Control STOP!
unit KID (D7950).
10202 31 2 CAN bus drivetrain communication error. STOP!
10202 35 2 CAN bus drivetrain open circuit. STOP!
10204 35 1 CAN bus option cab, open circuit. STOP!
10204 36 1 CAN bus option cab, communication error. STOP!
10301 2 1 Non-volatile memory Control unit KCU STOP!
(D7901).
10301 2 2 Non-volatile memory Control unit KFU STOP!
(D7971).
10301 2 3 Non-volatile memory Control unit KFU-2 STOP!
(D7972).
10301 2 6 Non-volatile memory Control unit KAU-2 STOP!
(D7912).
10301 2 7 Non-volatile memory Control unit KAU STOP!
(D7911).
10301 2 11 Non-volatile memory Control unit KPU STOP!
(D7902).
10301 2 12 Non-volatile memory Control unit KID STOP!
(D7950).
10302 2 1 Application log Control unit KCU (D7901). STOP!
10302 2 2 Application log Control unit KFU (D7971). STOP!
10302 2 3 Application log Control unit KFU-2 STOP!
(D7972).

Error codes machine

e tion
10302 2 6 Application log Control unit KAU-2 STOP!
(D7912).
10302 2 7 Application log Control unit KAU (D7911). STOP!
10302 2 11 Application log Control unit KPU (D7902). STOP!
10302 2 12 Application log Control unit KID (D7950). STOP!
10303 0 1 High temperature circuit board, Control STOP!
unit KCU (D7901).
unit KFU (D7971).
unit KFU-2 (D7972).
unit KAU-2 (D7912).
unit KAU (D7911).
unit KPU (D7902).
unit KID (D7950).
10304 2 1 Processing time for software in Control STOP!
unit KCU (D7901).
unit KFU (D7971).
unit KFU-2 (D7972).
unit KPU (D7902).
unit KID (D7950).
10305 6 1 High power consumption Control unit WARNING!
KCU (D7901).
10305 6 2 High power consumption Control unit KFU WARNING!
(D7971).
KFU-2 (D7972).
KAU-2 (D7912).
10305 6 7 High power consumption Control unit KAU WARNING!
(D7911).
10305 6 11 High power consumption Control unit KPU WARNING!
(D7902).
10305 6 12 High power consumption Control unit KID WARNING!
(D7950).
10306 3 2 1, 2, 3 Control breaker voltage Control unit KFU WARNING!
(D7971).
10306 4 2 1, 2, 3 Control breaker voltage Control unit KFU STOP!
(D7971).

Error codes machine

e tion
10306 3 3 1, 2, 3 Control breaker voltage Control unit WARNING!
KFU-2 (D7972).
10306 4 3 1, 2, 3 Control breaker voltage Control unit STOP!
KFU-2 (D7972).
KAU-2 (D7912).
KAU-2 (D7912).
10306 3 7 1, 2, 3 Control breaker voltage Control unit KAU WARNING!
(D7911).
10306 4 7 1, 2, 3 Control breaker voltage Control unit KAU STOP!
(D7911).
10307 2 1 Memory error Control unit KCU (D7901). STOP!
10307 2 2 Memory error Control unit KFU (D7971). STOP!
10307 2 3 Memory error Control unit KFU-2 (D7972). STOP!
10307 2 6 Memory error Control unit KAU-2 (D7912). STOP!
10307 2 7 Memory error Control unit KAU (D7911). STOP!
10307 2 11 Memory error Control unit KPU (D7902). STOP!
10307 2 12 Memory error Control unit KID (D7950). STOP!

Error codes engine

• The display indicates an error code as it appears in the machine, in
accordance with SAE J1939 in SPN/FMI.
• J1587 indicates error code acc. to SAE J1587 (Volvo).
Error codes engine (engine option Volvo TAD1151VE, TAD1171VE, TAD1172VE)
Display Supplier
(SPN/FMI) code Description Action
28/2 - + switches. WARNING
29/2 - Accelerator. WARNING
51/3 P02E612 Sensor throttle position. Engine speed limited to idling WARNING
speed.
speed.
speed.
speed. Engine difficult to start or does not start at all.
91/0 P012085 Accelerator. Speed limitation. WARNING
91/9 P012082 Accelerator. WARNING
91/19 P012083 Accelerator. Speed limitation. WARNING
94/3 P253912 Fuel pressure sensor. WARNING
94/18 P008A00 Low fuel pressure. Reduced output and torque. WARNING
97/0 P226985 Water in fuel. WARNING: Drain fuel prefilter,
see 6.2.2 Fuel system.
97/12 P226401 Sensor, water-in-fuel. WARNING
98/1 P250F00 Low oil level engine. WARNING: Check the oil level in
the engine. See 6.2.6 Engine oil.
98/4 P250A11 Sensor oil level engine. WARNING: Check the oil level in
98/5 P250A13 Sensor oil level engine. WARNING: Check the oil level in
100/1 P052400 Oil pressure too low. Reduced engine power or engine WARNING: Check the oil level in
is turned off. the engine. See 6.2.6 Engine oil.
100/3 P052012 Oil pressure sensor. STOP
100/5 P052013 Oil pressure sensor. STOP
100/18 P109300 Low oil pressure in engine. Reduced engine power or WARNING: Check the oil level in
engine is turned off. the engine. See 6.2.6 Engine oil.
101/0 P053E00 Pressure increase in crankcase too fast. The engine is STOP
switched off.
101/3 P051A12 Sensor pressure crankcase. STOP
101/5 P051A13 Sensor pressure crankcase. STOP

Display Supplier
102/0 P111800 Boost pressure too high. Reduced engine power. STOP
102/3 P010512 Sensor, boost pressure. Reduced engine power. STOP
102/5 P010513 Sensor, boost pressure. Reduced engine power. STOP
102/16 P111600 High charge-air pressure. STOP
105/0 P111A00 Boost temperature too high. Reduced engine power. STOP
105/4 P011011 Sensor, boost temperature. STOP
105/5 P011013 Sensor, boost temperature. STOP
105/16 P111900 High boost temperature. STOP
107/0 P10F800 Low pressure between air filter and turbo. WARNING
107/3 P100712 Sensor air pressure intake. WARNING
107/12 P100701 Pressure sensor air filter. WARNING
108/5 P222613 Sensor air pressure. WARNING
110/0 P021700 Coolant temperature too high. Reduced engine power. STOP: Check the coolant level.
See 6.2.5 Cooling system.
110/4 P011511 Sensor, coolant temperature. Engine hard to start. STOP
110/5 P011513 Sensor, coolant temperature. Engine hard to start. STOP
110/16 P111E00 High coolant temperature. STOP: Check the coolant level.
111/1 P256000 Low coolant level. STOP: Check the coolant level.
111/3 P255612 Sensor, coolant level. STOP
111/18 P111D00 Low coolant level. STOP: Check the coolant level.
158/3 - Voltage feed Control unit engine (D7940). WARNING
158/4 - Voltage feed Control unit engine (D7940). WARNING
172/4 P00D911 Ambient temperature sensor. Engine difficult to start at WARNING
low temperatures.
172/5 P00D913 Ambient temperature sensor. Engine difficult to start at WARNING
low temperatures.
173/0 P242800 Exhaust temperature too high. Reduced engine power. WARNING
173/16 P112E00 High exhaust temperature. WARNING
175/0 P029800 Oil temperature too high. Reduced engine power. STOP
175/4 P019511 Sensor, oil temperature. Speed limitation. STOP
175/5 P019513 Sensor, oil temperature. STOP
175/16 P112500 High oil temperature. STOP
190/0 P021900 Engine speed too high. Engine speed is limited. WARNING
626/2 - Start button WARNING

Display Supplier
626/3 P100212 Relay, preheating. Engine difficult to start at low WARNING
temperatures.
temperatures.
temperatures.
628/2 P060741 Memory error in Control unit engine (D7940). Engine does WARNING
not start.
628/2 - Memory error in Control unit engine (D7940). Engine does WARNING
not start.
not start.
not start.
not start.
not start.
636/7 P001676 Camshaft speed sensor. The engine takes longer to start WARNING
than normal or does not start at all.
636/8 P034038 Speed sensor camshaft. The engine takes longer to start WARNING
than normal.
636/9 P034031 Speed sensor camshaft. The engine takes longer to start WARNING
than normal.
637/2 P03351F Crankshaft speed sensor. The engine takes longer to start WARNING
than normal. Reduced torque.
637/8 P033538 Crankshaft speed sensor. The engine takes longer to start WARNING
637/9 P033531 Crankshaft speed sensor. The engine takes longer to start WARNING
639/2 U001088 Control unit engine (D7940), communication error CAN WARNING
bus drivetrain (J1939).
Engine shut-off: the engine cannot be started.
Engine running: the engine can only be stopped by using
the emergency stop.
639/2 - Control unit engine (D7940), communication error CAN WARNING
the emergency stop.
639/9 - Control unit engine (D7940), communication error CAN WARNING
the emergency stop.
647/3 P048012 Electromagnetic clutch cooling fan. Cooling fan drive WARNING
locked at 100%.

Display Supplier
647/4 P048011 Electromagnetic clutch cooling fan. Cooling fan drive not WARNING
working, risk of overheating.
647/5 P048013 Electromagnetic clutch cooling fan. Cooling fan drive WARNING
locked at 100%.
651/3 P020112 Injector cylinder 1. The engine has reduced power output. WARNING
677/3 P061512 Start relay on the starter motor. Engine does not start. WARNING
729/5 P054013 Preheating element. Engine difficult to start at low WARNING
temperatures.
temperatures.
729/7 P05407F Relay, preheating. Engine difficult to start at low WARNING
temperatures.
729/12 P054001 Preheating element. Engine difficult to start at low WARNING
temperatures.
970/3 P100112 Stop-button on engine. The engine is switched off and WARNING
cannot be started.
cannot be started.
cannot be started.
970/11 P100190 Stop-button on engine. Engine cannot be started. WARNING
970/14 P100192 Stop-button on engine. Engine cannot be started. WARNING
1188/3 P024312 Actuator intercooler pressure control. WARNING
1639/3 P052612 Sensor fan speed. The cooling fan does not disengage. WARNING
1668/2 U008088 Engine control unit (D7940) communication error. WARNING

Display Supplier
1761/3 P203A12 Level sensor AdBlue tank. WARNING
P203A86
1761/17 P114500 AdBlue level, below normal level. WARNING
1761/18 P203F00 AdBlue-level, low. Reduced engine power. WARNING
2000/9 U010000 Control unit engine (D7940) communication error CAN WARNING
2017/9 U014100 Control unit engine (D7940) communication error CAN WARNING
2036/9 U117100 Communication error with machine. WARNING
2659/10 P04007C EGR system. WARNING
2659/18 P04009C EGR system, low flow. WARNING
2791/7 P040371 EGR unit. Reduced engine power. WARNING
3031/0 P24FF00 AdBlue-temperature too high. WARNING
3031/4 P205A11 Temperature sensor AdBlue tank. WARNING
3031/12 P205A86 Temperature sensor AdBlue tank. Reduced engine power. WARNING
P205A01
3216/2 P220064 NOx sensor inlet catalytic converter WARNING
3216/5 P225D00 NOx sensor inlet catalytic converter WARNING
3216/9 U029D00 NOx sensor inlet catalytic converter Reduced engine WARNING
power.
3216/11 P220093 NOx sensor inlet catalytic converter Reduced engine WARNING
power.
3216/12 P22FB92 NOx sensor inlet catalytic converter WARNING
3216/14 P22001C NOx sensor inlet catalytic converter WARNING
3226/2 P220E64 NOx sensor outlet catalytic converter. WARNING
3226/3 P229E12 NOx sensor outlet catalytic converter. Reduced engine WARNING
power.
3226/5 P229E13 NOx sensor outlet catalytic converter. Reduced engine WARNING
power.
3226/7 P225F00 NOx sensor outlet catalytic converter. Reduced engine WARNING
power.
3226/9 U029E00 NOx sensor outlet catalytic converter. Reduced engine WARNING
power.
3226/12 P22FE00 NOx sensor outlet catalytic converter. WARNING
3226/13 P220E93 NOx sensor outlet catalytic converter. WARNING
3226/14 P220E1C NOx sensor outlet catalytic converter. WARNING
3241/4 P054411 Sensor exhaust temperature 1. WARNING

Display Supplier
3241/12 P054401 Sensor exhaust temperature 1 WARNING
3354/4 P20B911 Hose heater A AdBlue. Risk that AdBlue freezes in the WARNING
hose.
3361/12 P204F93 Metering valve AdBlue. Reduced engine power. WARNING
3361/12 P208A86 AdBlue pump. Reduced engine power. WARNING
3363/3 P20B112 Heating valve AdBlue tank. Risk that AdBlue freezes in WARNING
the tank.
the tank.
the tank.
3364/17 P207F9A Incorrect AdBlue quality. WARNING
3464/3 P02E012 Actuator motor throttle. WARNING
3464/7 P02E09C Actuator motor throttle. WARNING
3464/10 P02E07C Actuator motor throttle. WARNING
3464/12 P02E09B Actuator motor throttle. WARNING
3509/3 P06B017 Voltage feed sensor A. WARNING
3509/4 P06B016 Voltage feed sensor A. WARNING
3510/3 P06B317 Voltage feed sensor B. WARNING
3511/3 P06E617 Voltage feed sensor C. WARNING
3511/4 P06E616 Voltage feed sensor C. WARNING
3597/3 P065712 AdBlue pump unit voltage feed A. No AdBlue additive. WARNING
3597/4 P065711 AdBlue pump unit voltage feed A. No AdBlue additive. WARNING
3598/3 P266912 AdBlue pump unit voltage feed B. Risk that AdBlue WARNING
freezes.
3598/4 P266911 AdBlue pump unit voltage feed B. Risk that AdBlue WARNING
freezes.
4334/4 P204A11 Pressure sensor AdBlue. Reduced engine power. WARNING
4334/5 P204A13 Pressure sensor AdBlue. Reduced engine power. WARNING
hose.
hose.

Display Supplier
hose.
4355/3 P20BD12 Hose heater B AdBlue. Risk that AdBlue freezes in the WARNING
hose.
hose.
hose.
4356/3 P20C112 Hose heater C AdBlue. Risk that AdBlue freezes in the WARNING
hose.
hose.
hose.
hose.
4374/0 P202D7A AdBlue system, pressure leakage. WARNING
4374/1 P208A92 AdBlue pump unit, motor speed too low. No AdBlue WARNING
additive.
4375/0 P10AD12 Motor AdBlue pump unit. WARNING
4375/3 P208A12 Motor AdBlue pump unit. WARNING
4375/14 P21CAA1 Motor AdBlue pump unit. WARNING
4376/3 P20A012 Directional control valve AdBlue pump unit. AdBlue is not WARNING
pumped back to the tank when the engine is switched off.
5016/4 P26E711 AdBlue pump unit voltage feed D. WARNING
5392/31 P20E892 AdBlue pressure. Reduced engine power. WARNING
5394/3 P204712 AdBlue injection unit. No AdBlue additive. WARNING
5394/12 P204786 AdBlue injection unit. WARNING
5435/14 P204F94 AdBlue system. WARNING
5485/14 P10CE97 AdBlue pump unit, no return flow. WARNING

Display Supplier
520335/5 U300001 Control unit engine (D7940). Engine does not start. WARNING
520416/9 U11F00 Communication error Control unit after-treatment system WARNING
(UDS). No AdBlue additive.
520689/3 P100012 Solenoid valve compression brake. Reduced engine WARNING
power.
power.
power.
520690/4 P100311 Solenoid valve boost pressure control. WARNING
520690/5 P100313 Solenoid valve boost pressure control. WARNING
- U300041 Control unit engine (D7940) or Control unit after-treatment WARNING
system (UDS). Engine does not start.

Error codes Cummins QSM11
Display
(SPN/FMI) Description Action
84/2 Speed sensor, data invalid. Engine speed limited to maximum speed WARNING
without gear.
84/10 Speed sensor, incorrect signal. Engine speed limited to maximum speed WARNING
without gear.
91/3 Accelerator pedal, cable short-circuited to voltage. The engine does STOP
not respond to throttle application.
91/4 Accelerator pedal, cable short-circuited to frame ground. The engine STOP
does not respond to throttle application.
91/8 Accelerator pedal, frequency too low. The engine does not respond to STOP
throttle application.
91/8 Accelerator pedal, frequency too high. The engine does not respond to STOP
91/19 Problem with the accelerator pedal. Engine only running at idling speed. STOP
97/3 Sensor water-in-fuel, cable short-circuited to voltage. WARNING
97/4 Sensor water in fuel, cable short-circuited to ground. WARNING
97/15 Water in fuel. Risk of reduced engine power. WARNING: Drain fuel prefilter,
see 6.2.2 Fuel system.
100/1 Low engine oil pressure. Engine power is reduced gradually, after 30 STOP: Check the oil level in the
seconds the engine is switched off. engine. See 6.2.6 Engine oil.
100/2 Sensor, oil pressure, data error. No warning for low oil pressure. WARNING
100/3 Sensor, oil pressure, cable short-circuited to voltage. No warning for WARNING
low oil pressure.
100/4 Sensor, oil pressure, cable short-circuited to ground or open circuit. No WARNING
warning for low oil pressure.
100/18 Low engine oil pressure. WARNING: Check the oil level in
102/2 Sensor boost pressure indicates high boost pressure when other engine WARNING
data indicate that pressure should be low. Reduced engine power.
102/3 Sensor, boost pressure, cable short-circuited to voltage. Reduced WARNING
engine power.
102/4 Sensor, boost pressure, cable short-circuited to ground or open circuit. WARNING
Reduced engine power.
103/16 Incorrect overspeed protection for turbocharging. Reduced engine WARNING
power.
105/0 Inlet air too hot. Engine power is reduced gradually, after 30 seconds STOP
the engine is switched off.
105/3 Sensor charge air temperature, cable short-circuited to voltage or open WARNING
circuit. No warning for high coolant temperature.
105/4 Sensor charge air temperature, cable short-circuited to ground or open WARNING
108/2 Sensor, air pressure, data error. Reduced engine power. WARNING
108/3 Sensor, air pressure, cable short-circuited to voltage. Reduced engine WARNING
power.
108/4 Sensor, air pressure, cable short-circuited to frame ground. Reduced WARNING
engine power.
110/0 High coolant temperature. Engine power is reduced gradually, after 30 STOP: Check the coolant level.
seconds the engine is switched off. See 6.2.5 Cooling system.

Display
110/3 Sensor coolant temperature, cable short-circuited to voltage or open WARNING
110/4 Sensor coolant temperature, cable short-circuited to frame ground. No WARNING
warning for high coolant temperature.
111/1 Low coolant level. Engine power is reduced gradually, after 30 seconds STOP: Check the coolant level.
the engine is switched off. See 6.2.5 Cooling system.
111/2 Sensor coolant level, data error. No warning for low coolant level. STOP: Check the coolant level.
166/2 Power difference between cylinders. Rough idling. INFORMATION
167/1 Low battery voltage. STOP
167/16 High battery voltage. WARNING
167/18 Low battery voltage or restart of engine repeatedly due to low battery WARNING
voltage.
168/16 Voltage feed to control unit engine too high. WARNING
168/18 Voltage feed to control unit engine too low. WARNING
175/0 High engine oil temperature. Engine power is reduced gradually, after 30 STOP
seconds the engine is switched off.
175/3 Sensor, oil temperature, cable short-circuited to voltage or open circuit. WARNING
No warning for high oil temperature engine.
175/4 Sensor, oil temperature, cable short-circuited to frame ground. No WARNING
warning for high oil temperature engine.
188/4 Solenoid valve 1 wastegate. Reduced engine power. WARNING
190/0 High engine speed. Fuel supply restricted until engine speed is below STOP: Use less throttle.
permitted engine speed.
190/10 Sensor, speed/ignition position, one of two signals missing. WARNING
190/2 Sensor, speed/ignition position, both signals missing. Engine stops and STOP
cannot be started.
191/16 Incorrect calibration value. Speed limitation activated. WARNING: Reduce throttle.
191/18 Speed warning for low speed. WARNING: Increase throttle.
251/2 Internal error engine control unit. INFORMATION
441/3 Extra sensor temperature, cable short-circuited to voltage. No warning WARNING
for high temperature, control unit.
441/4 Extra sensor temperature, cable short-circuited to frame ground. No WARNING
warning for high temperature.
558/13 Sensor accelerator pedal idle switch, calibration error. Engine only STOP
running at idling speed.
558/2 Sensor accelerator pedal idle switch, data error. WARNING
558/4 Sensor accelerator pedal idle switch, cable short-circuited to frame WARNING
ground. The engine does not respond to throttle application.
608/2 Communication error Control unit engine. INFORMATION
626/11 Control relay preheating. Preheating not working. WARNING
627/2 Voltage feed to control unit engine disappears without ignition off. WARNING
Reduced engine power. Difficult to start or engine stops.

Display
629/12 Internal error engine control unit. Engine does not start. STOP
629/12 Internal error engine control unit. WARNING
630/2 Internal error engine control unit. Reduced engine power. Difficult to WARNING
start or engine stops.
632/3 Solenoid valve fuel shut-off, cable short-circuited to voltage. WARNING
632/4 Solenoid valve fuel shut-off, cable short-circuited to frame ground. STOP
Engine is switched off.
639/9 Communication error Control unit engine. WARNING
639/13 Communication error Control unit engine. WARNING
644/2 Accelerator pedal, sensor outside valid range. Engine is switched off. WARNING
647/4 Fan clutch, cable short-circuited to frame ground. Cooling fan constantly WARNING
activated.
651/5 Electrical problem, injector cylinder 1. Engine only runs on 5 cylinders, WARNING
has reduced power.
has reduced power.
has reduced power.
has reduced power.
has reduced power.
has reduced power.
has reduced power.
has reduced power.
has reduced power.
has reduced power.
has reduced power.
has reduced power.
702/3 Extra input/output 2, cable short-circuited to voltage. WARNING
703/3 Extra input/output 2, cable short-circuited to voltage. WARNING
974/3 Extra accelerator pedal, cable short-circuited to voltage. The engine STOP
does not respond to throttle application.
974/4 Extra accelerator pedal, cable short-circuited to frame ground. The STOP
engine does not respond to throttle application.
974/19 Problem with the accelerator pedal. The engine does not respond to STOP

Display
1043/3 Accelerator pedal reference voltage, short-circuited to voltage. The WARNING
engine is running at idling speed.
1043/4 Accelerator pedal reference voltage, short-circuited to frame ground. WARNING
The engine is running at idling speed.
1072/11 Signal engine brake 1, short-circuited to ground. WARNING
1073/11 Signal engine brake 2, short-circuited to ground. WARNING
1079/3 Reference voltage, short-circuited to voltage. Reduced engine power. WARNING
1079/4 Reference voltage, short-circuited to frame ground. Reduced engine WARNING
power.
1080/3 Reference voltage to sensor short-circuited to voltage. Reduced engine WARNING
power. No warning for low oil pressure or low coolant level.
1080/4 Reference voltage to sensor short-circuited to frame ground. Reduced WARNING
engine power. No warning for low oil pressure or low coolant level.
1265/4 Solenoid valve oil-burn, cable short-circuited to ground. WARNING
1319/2 Incorrect value sensor boost pressure. Reduced engine power. WARNING
1377/2 Error in control unit transmission. WARNING
1380/17 Low oil level engine. INFORMATION: Check the oil
level in the engine. See 6.2.6
Engine oil.
1383/31 Engine overheated. INFORMATION: Switch off
engine with ignition key lock.
1384/31 Engine shutdown. WARNING: Switch off engine
with ignition key lock.
1387/3 Extra sensor pressure, cable short-circuited to voltage. No warning for WARNING
oil pressure.
1387/4 Extra sensor pressure, cable short-circuited to frame ground. No warning WARNING
for oil pressure.
1484/31 Error codes in other control units. INFORMATION

Error codes transmission

Error codes from the transmission generally have error code level
"WARNING", but error codes from the transmission can specify another
error code level in accordance with the action column in the table below.
Error codes ZF 5WG261 and ZF 5WG311
Display ZF ZF Description Action

(SPN/FMI) code code
(dec) (hex)
5110/3 37 25 Sensor oil temperature sump transmission. -
511074 38 26 Sensor oil temperature sump transmission. -
5120/3 39 27 Sensor oil temperature transmission. -
5120/4 40 28 Sensor oil temperature transmission. -
5140/3 49 31 Sensor engine rpm. Difficult gear shifting. -
5150/3 52 34 Sensor rpm turbine. Difficult gear shifting. WARNING: Stop the
If any error code with SPN 5170 is generated at the machine, select neutral.
same time then the transmission shifts to neutral position Reselect the gear.
(Limp-home).
(Limp-home).
(Limp-home).
5160/3 55 37 Sensor rpm drum. Difficult gear shifting. -
5170/3 58 3A Sensor rpm output shaft. Difficult gear shifting. WARNING: Stop the
(Limp-home).
5170/4 59 3B Sensor rpm output shaft. Difficult gear shifting. WARNING: Stop the
(Limp-home).
5170/12 60 3C Sensor rpm output shaft. Difficult gear shifting. WARNING: Stop the
(Limp-home).
5180/2 62 3E Sensor rpm output shaft. Difficult gear shifting. WARNING: Stop the
(Limp-home).
5260/9 84 54 CAN message Control unit KID (D795) -
5270/9 85 55 CAN message Control unit cab (D790-1) -


(SPN/FMI) code code
(dec) (hex)
5280/9 86 56 CAN message Control unit engine (D794). Difficult gear -
shifting.
5310/2 89 59 Logic error, CAN messages. -
5390/2 97 61 Incorrect CAN messages. -
5480/3 113 71 Solenoid valve clutch K1. Transmission shifts to neutral WARNING: Stop the
(Limp-home). machine, select neutral.
In the event of faults on multiple clutches: Transmission Reselect the gear.
locked in neutral position (shut-down).


(SPN/FMI) code code
(dec) (hex)
5520/3 132 84 Solenoid valve clutch KV. Transmission shifts to neutral WARNING: Stop the
5530/3 135 87 Solenoid valve clutch KR. Transmission shifts to neutral WARNING: Stop the
5660/2 177 B1 Clutch K1 slips. Transmission shifts to neutral position WARNING: Stop the
(limp-home). machine, select neutral.
5680/2 181 B5 Clutch KV slips. Transmission shifts to neutral position WARNING: Stop the


(SPN/FMI) code code
(dec) (hex)
5685/2 182 B6 Clutch KR slips. Transmission shifts to neutral position WARNING: Stop the
5700/0 183 B7 Transmission oil temperature sump above 100 °C. WARNING: Note the
error and try to reduce
temperature in torque
converter by operating
calmly.
5730/0 186 BA Sensor transmission oil filter (B755-5). Change oil filter.
5745/15 188 BC Speed limitation exceeded. -
5755/15 194 C2 Torque limit input shaft too high. -
5760/0 195 C3 Transmission oil temperature torque converter above WARNING: Stop the
120 °C. machine, engage neutral,
and apply full throttle
(limited to 50%) to cool
the transmission oil so
that temperature drops
below 100 °C.
When temperature in
torque converter is below
100 °C, resume work with
machine.
5810/3 209 D1 Voltage feed to sensor. -
5810/4 210 D2 Voltage feed to sensor. -
5820/4 211 D3 Low battery voltage. Transmission locked in neutral Check alternator and
position (shut-down). battery as well as cable
harness between battery
and alternator.
5820/3 212 D4 High battery voltage.Transmission locked in neutral Check alternator and
position (shut-down). battery.
If equipment for assisted
start is connected,
disconnect it.
5830/2 213 D5 Solenoid valve VPS 1. Transmission locked in neutral -
(shut-down).
5840/2 214 D6 Solenoid valve VPS 2. Transmission locked in neutral -
(shut-down).
5860/3 227 E3 Incorrect CAN messages. Transmission shifts to neutral WARNING: Stop the
Reselect the gear.
Reselect the gear.
Reselect the gear.
Reselect the gear.


(SPN/FMI) code code
(dec) (hex)
5890/2 241 F1 Memory error, Control unit transmission (D793). -
Transmission locked in neutral position (shut-down).
5900/13 242 F2 Software error, Control unit transmission (D793). -
5910/13 243 F3 Software error, Control unit transmission (D793). -
5930/7 245 F5 Clutch error during calibration. Transmission locked in -
neutral position (shut-down).
5930/13 246 F6 Calibration data incorrect. -
Control unit transmission can generate two states with reduced

functionality to protect the transmission in the event of serious
malfunctions:
• "Limp-home"
In this condition only gear 1-2 in each direction can be used. When
the error occurs the transmission shifts to neutral position. To
continue, set the travel direction selector to neutral position and
select the travel direction again.
• "Shutdown"
In this mode the transmission is permanently in neutral to protect
the transmission.

5 Handling – Operating 153
5.4 Operating
5.4.1 While operating
General
DANGER
The machine's work area is large and visibility from
the operator's cab is restricted.
damage!
Keep in mind:
• Always check that no persons are in the way of the
machine or its equipment. Also check that the area
upwards is free. If there are unauthorised persons
or vehicles within the work area then the machine
must be stopped.
• The operator must always face in the travel
direction and should operate with special care
where persons or vehicles may appear.
• The operator must adapt the speed to the load and
ground conditions, visibility, and wind conditions,
etc.
• The operator must pay extra attention and operate
with special care near electric power lines,
viaducts, docksides, ramps, doorways, etc.
• Always operate carefully so that the attachment
does not collide with posts, power lines, etc.
• Use available visibility-enhancing equipment such
as rear view mirrors and camera ( ).
WARNING
inspection.
WARNING
Never operate the machine without wearing the
seatbelt.
Extreme danger!
Always use the seatbelt when operating the machine,
even when you expect a short shift. The seatbelt must
not be modified.

154 5 Handling – While operating
CAUTION
Never switch off the ignition when the machine is
moving.
Risk of damage to the parking brake.
Stop the machine completely before switching off the
ignition.
Instructions
Make a habit of checking the following at regular intervals while
operating:
• that all gauges are within normal range, optimum operating value is
when the indicator needle is in the centre of the normal operating
range (straight up).
• that fuel indicator on the display shows that there is fuel in the tank.
• that the AdBlue indicator on the display shows that there is AdBlue
in the tank. Applies to machines with Volvo TAD117xVE or Volvo
TAD872VE.
• that all warning lights are off.
• that horn, lighting, brake lights and direction indicators function
correctly.
• that all hydraulic functions function correctly.
• that no error codes have been generated (shown on operator's
display with error code indication and symbol). See 5.3 Error
codes, page 112.
When necessary, the control system can set speed limitations for the
machine. This happens in the event of the following:
• high load on the steering axle.
• high load on the drive axle.
• high oil temperature in the brake oil.
• low accumulator pressure brake system.
• incorrect tyre pressure .
• lock of tilt, see Tilting, page 185 .
• lock of levelling, see Levelling, page 187 .
• pressed down control breaker.
• transport with bottom lift, see 5.5.2 Transporting load, page 177.
• lowered overheight leg, see Overheight legs, page 188
• raised cab, see Hydraulic vertically adjustable cab, page 195 .

5 Handling – While operating 155
Automatic stop function

The automatic stop function means that the engine is switched off
automatically when certain conditions are met.
The automatic function monitors special conditions (see below), and

when all are met it starts a countdown before the engine is stopped.
During the countdown, the event menu for the automatic stop function
is shown in the display. The bar in the menu shows the remaining time
to stop as a percentage of the delay time. When the bar is filled the
engine is stopped. The countdown can be interrupted by breaking any
of the conditions for auto-stop. The delay time can be changed by a
Event menu automatic stop function service technician.
Conditions for auto-stopping the engine:

• Machine has reached operating temperature.
• Battery charging status is OK.
• Machine stationary in neutral position at idling speed.
• Load handling functions inactive.
• Parking brake is activated.
When the engine has been stopped automatically, the engine must be
started in the normal way, see 5.4.2 Starting engine, page 158.
This function is always active in ECO mode and cannot be deactivated.

A service technician can activate/deactivate the automatic stop function
for Normal and Power operating modes.
The function for automatic shutdown of the ignition is available

as an option. When the engine is stopped by this function, and the
operator does not activate any functions, the ignition is also shut down
automatically after a certain predetermined time. The time before
shutdown can be set by a service technician.
If the machine is equipped with the automatic start and stop function
then the function will apply ahead of the automatic stop function, see
Automatic start and stop function, page 156.

156 5 Handling – While operating
Automatic start and stop function
The automatic start and stop function means that the engine is stopped
when the machine is considered to be inactive and the engine is started
automatically when work is resumed.
The automatic function monitors special conditions (see below), and

when all are met it starts a countdown before the engine is stopped.
During the countdown, the event menu for the automatic stop function
is shown in the display. The bar in the menu shows the remaining time
Event menu automatic stop function to stop as a percentage of the delay time. When the bar is fully filled,
the engine is stopped. The countdown can be interrupted by breaking
any of the conditions for auto-stop. The delay time can be set by a
service technician.
Conditions for auto-stopping the engine:

• The machine has operating temperature.
• Battery charging status is OK.
• The operator is sitting in the seat.
• The machine is stationary at idling speed in neutral position
• Load handling functions inactive.
If the parking brake is activated manually (with the control) the bar in
the display is filled immediately, and the engine is stopped immediately.
When the engine is auto-stopped the parking brake is activated

automatically (without the need to move the control). If the engine is
auto-started by depressing the brake pedal then the parking brake
is released.
When the engine has been auto-stopped and is in standby for

automatic start then event menu automatic start function is shown.
If one of the doors is opened then the automatic start function is

temporarily disengaged (the event menu is switched off) until the door
is closed (the event menu is shown again).
NOTE
017365
The automatic start function is disengaged if the operator leaves

the seat. When this takes place, the event menu for the automatic
Event menu automatic start function start function disappears and the engine must be started with the
start button.
When the event menu for the automatic start function is shown, the
engine starts automatically if:
• The accelerator pedal is depressed.
• The brake pedal is depressed.
If the gear selector is in neutral position then the parking brake is
released when the engine is started by means of depressing the
brake pedal.
• Load handling function is activated.
• The start button is depressed.
The machine has a timer for how long the ignition can be activated
after the engine has been auto-stopped. If this time expires then the
ignition is switched off in the same way as during in normal shutdown,
see 5.4.2 Starting engine, page 158. The time for automatic shutdown
of the ignition can be changed by a service technician.

5 Handling – While operating 157
Eco Drive Mode

Eco Drive Mode consists of functions for reducing fuel consumption
and thereby environmental impact.
Eco Drive Mode contains three operating modes for how the machine's
fuel-saving functions should operate.
Depending on options, the operating mode can be set via customer

settings, see Setting of Eco Drive Mode, page 202.
Power
• No limitations activated.
• Automatic stop function, see Automatic stop function, page
155. Can be changed by a service technician.
Normal
• Operator guidance, stage 1.
• Performance loss, stage 1.
• Engine limited to idling speed in neutral position and passive
machine.
• Automatic stop function, see Automatic stop function, page
155. Can be changed by a service technician.
ECO
• Operator guidance, stage 2.
• Performance loss, stage 2.
• Engine limited to idling speed in neutral position and passive
machine.
• Automatic stop function, see Automatic stop function, page 155.
If the machine is equipped with the automatic start and stop function
the automatic start and stop functions will apply throughout the Eco
Drive Mode, see Automatic start and stop function, page 156.

158 5 Handling – Starting engine
5.4.2 Starting engine

General
WARNING
If it's difficult to start the engine, do not use start spray.
Risk of explosion!
In case of start problems, contact service.
Instructions
1. If the machine is equipped with an electric auxiliary heater,
disconnect the electrical cable from the machine .
2. Set the travel direction selector in neutral position or in the position
for activated parking brake.
The travel direction selector must be in neutral position or in the
position for activated parking brake, otherwise it is not possible
to start the engine.
3. Turn the ignition key lock to operating position, position I.
Current is now supplied to all electrical functions.
4. If the machine is equipped with an alcolock, blow in the alcolock .
The alcolock calculates the amount of alcohol in the breath.
In the event of a successful breath test, proceed as follows:
5. Press the start button and hold depressed until the starter motor
starts, release the start button when the engine starts.
When needed, the engine's control unit activates preheating during
a time period. The event menu for preheating indicates whether
preheating is activated, see Event menu preheating, description,
page 91.
Engine option Cummins QSM11 has automatic preheating without
indicator to the operator.
NOTE
The starter motor can be activated 20-30 seconds then the circuit
cuts 1.5 to 2 minutes so the starter motor has time to cool. This
is to protect the starter motor.

5 Handling – Warming up 159
5.4.3 Warming up
General
CAUTION
Never rev a cold engine at high engine speeds.
Risk of engine damage!
Run the engine at 1400-1500 rpm until it starts to get
warm.
WARNING
Don't let the engine idle for a long time.
Risk of engine damage!
Turn off the engine during breaks in operation and
load handling.
Speed limitation
Engine speed is limited when the oil temperature in the engine,
transmission or hydraulics is too low. When the engine speed is limited,
event menu speed limitation, warm-up mode is shown, see 4.11.2.55
Event menu speed limitation, warm-up mode, page 96.
When the engine, transmission and hydraulics have reached normal

operating temperature, speed limitation is deactivated.
Instructions
Engine
In cold temperatures the machine may not be used for tough work until
the engine and hydraulics are at operating temperature.
If the machine often needs to be cold started below -10 °C then an

engine heater and hydraulic oil heater should be installed.
Start the engine and let it idle for about 10 min, never rev a cold engine
as this can cause engine damage. Now warm run the engine at about
1400-1500 rpm until it starts to get warm. It is very important that the
engine is warmed up and the oil circulates well before the turbocharger
starts to operate at high revs.
Start working with the machine when the coolant has reached normal
operating temperature, approx. 75 °C, see Engine operating menu,
description, page 76.
Transmission
A cold transmission will not shift at temperatures below -12 °C. The
transmission must be warmed up. Follow the instructions for warming
up the engine.

160 5 Handling – Gearshifting
Hydraulic system
Never operate a hydraulic function in the cold until the hydraulic oil is
warm, since there is a risk of damage and leakage in the hydraulic
system.
When the engine has reached its working temperature, warm run the
hydraulic oil by running the mast slowly up and down. Full actuation of
the hydraulic function may not be performed until the tank temperature
is +1 °C.
After this, all other hydraulic functions should be run slowly so that
warm oil circulates through the whole system, and this should be
repeated at least ten times.
NOTE
Hydraulic functions and the steering may feel sticky when the oil
is cold.
5.4.4 Gearshifting
General
The machine is equipped with an automatic transmission. The system
shifts to a lower/higher gear under certain conditions, such as torque,
30
engine speed, travel speed, etc.
A cold transmission will not shift at temperatures below -12 °C. The
transmission must be warmed up, see warming up 5.4.3 Warming
up, page 159.
General about the automatic transmission:

• The transmission is locked in neutral position when the operator is
not sitting in the seat, see Transmission assumes neutral position,
page 162.
• Has a built-in control system, providing optimised operation.
013489
32 31 33 • Shows current gear on the control system display.

• The reversing lock prevents the travel direction being changed too
30. Switch for upshift
quickly, i.e. prevents possible damage to the transmission. The
31. Switch for downshift reversing lock is automatic and is dependent on engine speed
and travel speed.
32. Switch for automatic shifting • Shifting is variable (modulated) and gives smoother operation.
33. Travel direction indicator, Forward Neutral Normally start-up takes place in second gear. Use of first gear is
Reverse governed by engine speed, amongst other things.
Instructions
1 Deactivate the parking brake by first depressing the service brake
pedal and then move the travel direction selector from the parking
brake position to neutral/gear position.
2 Let the engine run at idle speed. Select travel direction.

5 Handling – Gearshifting 161
a) Travel direction selector

Move the lever (position a):
• forward (F) for travel direction forward.
• reverse (R) for travel direction reverse.
• downwards or upwards (N) for neutral.
015234
b) Travel direction selector on control for load handling
Move the switch (position b):
c) Travel direction selector on mini steering wheel or joystick

Move the switch (position c):
c
3 Select automatic or manual shifting:
015435
Automatic shifting
1 Activate automatic shifting with the switch for automatic shifting A
(position 32). The system automatically shifts between all gears.
2 Automatic shifting is disengaged if the switch for upshift or
downshift (position 30, 31) is activated.

162 5 Handling – Steering
Manual shifting
1 Machine gearshifting takes place manually with the switch for
upshift or downshift (position 30, 31). The current gear is shown
on the display.
NOTE
In certain circumstances, the transmission may be forced to
reduce speed due to a problem. The control unit may then set the
transmission in "limp home" mode.
CAUTION
Changing the travel direction must be done with care.
The machine has a reversing lock as standard but
transmission service life is increased if change of
travel direction takes place at a lower travel speed and
engine speed.
Risk of machine damage! Axles may fail!
Change of travel direction must take place within the
limitations set by the reversing lock.
Transmission assumes neutral position

A control breaker senses when the operator leaves the operator's
station. The signal from the control breaker means that the transmission
automatically assumes neutral position. It is not possible to select any
travel direction.
NOTE
If the buzzer sounds when the operator sits in the seat and releases
the parking brake then the control breaker in the seat may be
malfunctioning. It is not possible to select any travel direction. The
function of the switch in the driver's seat must be checked.
The event menu appears if the driver's seat is left without the parking
brake being activated, see The event menu parking brake not activated
and no operator in the driver's seat, description, page 82.
5.4.5 Steering
General
The machine is equipped with servo steering. The steering wheel
movements are transferred hydraulically to the steering wheels on
the ground.
WARNING
The machine may not roll on a downhill grade if the
engine is off.
Hydraulic pressure for steering is missing and steering
capacity is lost! Danger!
Keep the engine running for hydraulic pressure.

5 Handling – Service brake 163
5.4.6 Service brake

General
The brake pedal (position 12) used as service brake.
Use the brakes in a smooth but firm way. Brake pressure remains for
a time after the engine has been switched off, accumulated during
operation. If the accumulator pressure drops below a certain level then
the event menu shows low accumulator pressure. When the event
menu is shown the capacity of the service brake is limited. The buzzer
sounds and speed is limited. Finally, the parking brake is applied
automatically by a forceful spring in the brake cylinder. Check the
11 accumulators' sealing integrity if the pressure does not build up and is
not maintained, see chapter 6 Inspection and maintenance.
015214
12
The service brake is combined with the declutching pedal. The drive is
declutched completely at a certain brake pressure.
11. Accelerator
12. Brake pedal
5.4.7 Parking brake

General
DANGER
or extreme danger!
WARNING
Never leave the operator's station without first applying
the parking brake.
Risk of machine starting to roll! Danger!
Apply the parking brake before leaving the operator's
station.
The parking brake is operated with the travel direction selector (position
1) on the steering wheel panel. Activate the parking brake by lifting
the control upward toward the steering wheel and then forward to
the parking brake position. The indicator light for the parking brake
(position 16) is lit red when the parking brake is applied and the event
menu appears, see Event menu parking brake, description, page 86.
To be able to deactivate the parking brake there must be an

accumulated brake pressure or the engine is started in order to reach
the brake pressure required when depressing the brake pedal.

164 5 Handling – Parking brake
Instructions
The parking brake is applied when:
• When the travel direction selector is moved to the position for the
parking brake (parking brake indicator light is lit red) and the event
menu for parking brake applied is shown, see Event menu parking
brake, description, page 86.
• The ignition is switched off (ignition key lock to 0 position).
When the machine is started again the parking brake is applied
without the travel direction selector being in the position for
activated parking brake. The indicator light for the parking brake
flashes to indicate that the parking brake must be activated and
deactivated with the travel direction selector to release the parking
brake. The light flashes even if the service brake is not activated at
the same time as you try to release the parking brake, even the
event menu is shown, see Event menu release the parking brake,
1 description, page 91.
015215
Check the sealing integrity of the accumulators if pressure is not

built up and maintained, see 6 Inspection and maintenance, page
1. Travel direction selector and parking brake 212.
An audible signal is activated if the operator gets up from the driver's

seat without first applying the parking brake and the event menu is
shown, The event menu parking brake not activated and no operator in
the driver's seat, description, page 82.
If the accumulator pressure drops below a certain level an error code is

shown in the display. The capacity of the service brake is restricted with
a low accumulator pressure error code. If the accumulator pressure
drops further, the parking brake is applied automatically by a strong
spring in the brake cylinder.
If the machine needs to be moved, see 7 Transporting the machine,

page 250.
Emergency brake
The parking brake can be used as emergency brake in emergency
situations.
CAUTION
The parking brake can be used as an EMERGENCY
BRAKE.
Brake shoe linings wear out and lose their braking
performance! Risk of unwanted movement by the
parked machine!
After emergency braking with the parking brake the
brake shoe linings must be checked as soon as
possible and replaced if necessary. Braking action of
the parking brake may be lost as the brake shoe linings
may have been worn down.
If the parking brake has been released mechanically
then it must always be reset to restore the machine's

5 Handling – Heating / Air conditioning 165
DANGER
or extreme danger!
5.4.8 Heating / Air conditioning

General
The heating/air conditioning system (ECC) obtains heat from the
38 39 40 43 engine's cooling system and provides heat when the engine is warm,
the cooling function is generated by the cooling compressor.
37 If necessary, the air conditioning can be controlled manually with the

switches for the fan, heating and air distribution. In addition to this there
36 are functions for recirculation and defroster.
In the event of an open door, the air conditioning's cooling compressor

35 is switched off (cooling function and air drying stop). Close the door
and the cooling function is activated again.
NOTE
012820
41 42 44 45 46
Open windows disrupt air conditioning function and capacity.
Panel for heating and air conditioning system
NOTE
Paper and similar located on the inner front panel can significantly
reduce air conditioning function and performance.
Setting the heating/air conditioning system

1 Activate automatic regulation of the air conditioning (position 39)
to achieve optimal function of the system.
Fan speed, temperature control and air distribution in the cab take
place automatically.
2 Set desired temperature (position 41, 42).
Set the temperature within temperature range 16 °C to 28 °C. See
temperature in display.
Setting of min. and max. respectively, shuts off automatic climate
control (control of fan, temperature and air distribution) and sets
the heat valve in min. (LO) and max. (HI) position respectively.
Cooling is activated/deactivated with the switch for cooling
(position 43).
3 Align the panel nozzles as follows:
• in cold weather, aim the panel nozzles against the windows,
• in hot weather, aim the panel nozzles upwards.
4 Manual setting the fan's capacity is made with the switch for the
fan (position 38, 40). Return to automatic control with the switch
(position 39).
Manual control is possible in five steps from Off to Max. Fan speed
is indicated by a bar in the operating menu.

166 5 Handling – Heating / Air conditioning
NOTE
When the fan is switched off all functions for heating/air
conditioning are stopped.
NOTE
When setting the fan capacity manually, automatic control of the
fan is stopped.
5 Manual setting of air distribution is performed using the switch for

air distribution (position 44, 45, 46).
NOTE
When setting the air distribution manually, automatic control of
the air distribution is stopped.
6 Normally, recirculation (position 36) and defroster (position 37)

do not have to be used.
Mist on windows
WARNING
Misting on the windscreens can lead to limited visibility
from the cab.
damage!
Make sure the windscreens are free of mist before
using the machine.
1 Set a warm temperature (position 41). Ideally use the defroster

function.
2 Set a fan speed to a faster position (position 40).
3 Direct air distribution (position 46) and panel nozzles to the
windscreen for good visibility through the windows.
4 Check that recirculation (position 36) is not engaged. Recirculation
may impair effective demisting.
5 Activate defroster (position 37).
The defroster controls the function fan, temperature and damper
015236
position to optimally heat and more quickly dry the air at the
windscreen for faster demisting. The function is active for 6
A minutes.
A NOTE
A. Panel nozzles The defroster function is active for 6 minutes. Check that
temperature control returns to the set value when the defroster
is switched off.
6 If there is a lot of mist, direct the panel nozzles to the windscreen

for optimal demisting.
The cooling function will be active and help to dry the air.

5 Handling – Heating / Air conditioning 167
Setting the diesel heater

Direct start of heater
The diesel heater is controlled by a separate timer with display, fitted

in the cab. Running time and up to three activation times can be set
using the timer.
If the timer display is in standby mode, it can be activated by means

of a short press on one of the buttons. A short press is less than 2
seconds and a long press is more than 2 seconds.
Direct start of heater
1. The heater is activated directly by means of a long press on button
A. Menu bar 2 (E).
B. Status field/Input field (The exception is if the timer is programmed or if it is in setting
mode.)
C. Selection front / rear
D. Button 1 Shutdown of heater
E. Button 2 1. If the heater is operating, it is shut down by means of a long press
on button 1 (D).
Quick start of heater, with setting of time or temperature
1. By means of a short press on button 2 (E), when the display is
illuminated, there is the option to set target temperature (only
air heater) or the time at which the heater should be running.
The setting is made using the buttons for option (C) and is then
confirmed using button 2 (E).
Activating/deactivating programs (P1, P2, P3)
1. Activate the display.
2. Press front / rear (C) until the P-symbol flashes in the menu bar
(A). Confirm the selection with a short press on button 2 (E).
3. Select program memory (P1, P2, P3) using the buttons for option
(C), confirm with button 2 (E).
4. Set whether the selected program should be active or inactive
using the buttons for option (C). Confirm with button 2 (E)
Change in programs
2. Select program memory (P1, P2, P3) using the buttons for option
(C), confirm with button 2 (E).
3. Select, using the buttons for option (C), the position for settings.
Confirm with button 2 (E).
4. Select, using the buttons for option (C), the desired day or group of
days. Confirm with button 2 (E).
5. Set the start time (hours) using the buttons for option (C). Confirm
with button 2 (E).
6. Set the start time (minutes) using the buttons for option (C).
Confirm with button 2 (E).
7. Set the desired operating mode, heating or ventilation. Use the
buttons for option (C). Confirm with button 2 (E).
8. Set the temperature (only air heating) or for how long the heater
should be activated. Use the buttons for option (C) and confirm
with button 2 (E).

168 5 Handling – Heating / Air conditioning
Setting the clock

2. Select Settings in the menu bar (A). Use the buttons for option (C)
and confirm with button 2 (E).
3. Select Set time in the input field (B). Use the buttons for option (C)
4. Set hours using the buttons for option (C) and confirm with button
2 (E).
5. Set minutes using the buttons for option (C) and confirm with
button 2 (E).
6. Press button 1 (D) to return to Settings.
Setting the day of the week
2. Select Settings in the menu bar (A). Use the buttons for option (C)
3. Select Day of the week in the input field (B). Use the buttons for
option (C) and confirm with button 2 (E).
4. Select the correct day using the buttons for option (C) and confirm
with button 2 (E).
5. Press button 1 (D) to return to Settings.

5 Handling – Stopping the engine - parking 169
5.4.9 Stopping the engine - parking

General
NOTE
Never disconnect the system voltage with the battery disconnector
when the engine is running! The voltage regulator may be
damaged.
WARNING
Always turn off the electric power when the machine is
left, e.g. when parking or at the end of the shift.
Risk of fire!
Turn off the electric power with the battery
disconnector.
Instructions
1. Stop the machine and set the travel direction selector in the
position for parking brake.
2. Run in the boom completely and lower it to its lowest position.
3. With hydraulic sliding cab or hydraulic vertically adjustable cab :
Run the cab back to its starting position.
4. Let the engine run 1 minute at idle speed before stopping the
engine so that the engine cools down slightly and the turbo
bearings are lubricated.
5. Stop the engine by turning the ignition key lock to position 0.
If the start button (position 15) is pressed for more than one second
when the engine is already running then just the engine is stopped.
If the machine is going to be parked for a long time, e.g. after a
work shift is over, then the battery disconnector should be turned
to the OFF (0) position.
For machines with Volvo engines:
NOTE
Wait for two minutes before the system voltage is disconnected
with the battery disconnector so that the SCR system has time to
be drained of AdBlue, this is particularly important in cold weather.
Certain machines are equipped with automatic engine stop:

• In case the operator leaves the machine for some time without
stopping the engine, normally 10 minutes.

170 5 Handling – Load handling
5.5 Load handling

General
During all lifting work, make sure that the max. lift capacity is not
exceeded, see machine plate or load diagram.
The machine's capacity is indicated by two parameters:

• number of containers in height
• load size and its centre of gravity in relation to the machine
The capacity varies between different models and versions, see

machine and type plates 3.2 Plates, page 25.
It is important to estimate the position of the centre of gravity. If the

machine appears to be side-heavy, the load should be lowered and
adjusted with side shift so that the load's centre of gravity is moved to a
position along the machine's centre line.
The function load handling refers to, e.g., to lift, lower, rotate, angle or
hold loads. Load handling also includes auxiliary functions to handle
the load, e.g. rotation stop.
Load handling subfunctions.
• Lift/lower
Lift and lower
• Extension
Extension
• Side shift
Side shift stop
001113
Side shift
• Spreading (positioning)
Automatic spreading 20' to 40'
30' stop
001114
Spreading (positioning)

5 Handling – Load handling 171
• Rotation
Rotation stop ±25°
Rotation
• Damping
Damping with tilt lock
Damping with adjustable tilt
Damping with adjustable tilt and tilt lock
Damping with controlled tilt, tilt lock and extended tilt function
Tilt
• Mechanical levelling ±5°

Hydraulic levelling
001117
Levelling
• Twistlocks
004868
Twistlocks
Overload system
The machine is equipped with a warning system, LLMC (Longitudinal
Load Moment Control). Warning systems must ALWAYS be functional!
The system is used for stationary load handling, so that the machine's
forward stability is not jeopardised.
When the machine approaches the stability limit, the following takes
place:
• buzzer in the cab sounds (indication to operator)
See 2.1 Safety and emergency equipment, page 8.
• warning figure is shown on the display (indication to operator)
See Event menu overload, description, page 81.
• boom movement is interrupted.
In this position the boom, and thus the load, can only be retracted
until the buzzer stops sounding and the display figure disappears.
NOTE
Retract the boom completely before it is lowered! Applies for all
load handling!
LLMC is not intended for controlling lateral stability or stability during

operation. In addition, it does not take sloping ground conditions into
consideration.
For advice on the handling of the machine, see 2.4 Keep in mind,
page 11.

172 5 Handling – Lifting load
5.5.1 Lifting load

General
There are two types of attachments which differ in lift handling:
• top lift attachment
For a top lift attachment, the attachment must be aligned with all
four corners against the container both when locking and releasing
the twistlocks. When releasing, the container must also stand
securely with all four corners on the ground surface.
• bottom lift attachment
For a bottom lift attachment, all four legs must be in clamping
position and be aligned with the load before starting to lift.
WARNING
Do not use a machine where the indicator lights are
out of order.
Danger of reduced safety during load handling!
If the indicator lights don't work, stop work with the
machine and repair.
WARNING
The machine's load capacity is limited!
It is forbidden to exceed the machine's load capacity.
See the rating plate and load diagrams. The machine's
stability limit can be exceeded if the overloading
system is not working.

5 Handling – Lifting load 173
Instructions for top lift attachment
NOTE
1 Run towards the stack of containers, as close as possible. Strive

to line up the machine's centre with the centre of the container.
2 Hold the machine stationary with the service brake. Alternatively,
apply the parking brake if required and/or shift to neutral.
3
If necessary, move the cab forward/up for better visibility for
positioning the load, see Hydraulic sliding cab, page 194 or
Hydraulic vertically adjustable cab, page 195
4 Position the attachment slightly above the container. Adjust with

rotation, side shift and boom in/out.
For use of radio control, see Radio control, page 196.
5 Set spreading to container length in question.
Right light, C - Twistlocks unlocked, red light illuminates, indicates
that load is not secured.
6
Use adjustable tilt or hydraulic levelling in order to move the
attachment parallel with the load, see Tilting, page 185 and
Levelling, page 187.
7 Lower the attachment on the container.

The display shows the event menu for contact and indicates when
one to three twistlocks have contact.
Lowering speed is dampened automatically when the
attachment approaches the container.
8 Middle light, B – Contact, orange light activated, indicates when
all four corner boxes have correct contact against the container,
event menu contact is switched off.
9 Lock twistlocks with the switch for twistlocks (position 60).
If automatic locking of twistlocks is used, locking is automatic when
the attachment is in contact with the load.
Locking alternative is selected with the switch for automatic or
manual locking (position 60).
NOTE
For automatic locking of twistlocks, the parking brake must be
released.

10 Right light, C - Twistlocks unlocked, off.

Left light, A - Twistlocks locked, illuminates with green light and
indicates that load is secured and ready for lifting.
The lift function is disengaged when both right light, C - Twistlocks
unlocked, and left light, A - Twistlocks locked, are off. Left light, A -
Twistlocks locked, is activated with green light when the locking
process has been completed.
CAUTION
Do not start to lift if light C "Twistlocks unlocked" is
on, or if any of the lights A "Twistlocks locked" or B
"Contact" are off.
The load is not secured!
Try to lock twistlocks once again.
11 Ready for lifting.

When the container is lifted, the light for contact (position B)
should go out. Use side shift to centre the load so that its lateral
point-of-gravity is along the machine's centre line.
Instructions for bottom lift attachment
1 Lower the rear leg pair.

Light I – Front leg pair raised, white light activated, indicates that
front leg pair is raised.
2
3 Position the attachment's rear lift shoes slightly under the load.
Adjust with rotation, side shift and boom in/out.
4
attachment parallel with the load, see Tilting, page 185 and
5 Run forward towards the load until clamping position rear leg pair
is indicated. When the rear legs are folded down and the switch for
bottom lift attachment, rear legs (position 55), is held depressed
during the entire movement, the legs stop in the vertical lift position.
Strive to line up the machine's centre with the centre of the load.
Light J – Clamping position rear leg pair, orange light activated,
indicates when rear leg pair has clamping position against load.
After the clamping position has been opened, the switch must be
activated again for the legs to be vertical.
6 Hold the machine stationary with the service brake. Alternatively,
apply the parking brake if required and/or shift to neutral.
For use of radio control, see Radio control, page 196.

5 Handling – Lifting load 175
7 Lower front leg pair.

Light K – Front leg pair lowered, orange light activated, indicates
that legs are lowered.
8 Secure load by setting legs in clamping position.
Lights H and J – Clamping position front and rear leg pair, yellow
lights activated, indicate clamping position.
Light K indicates that front legs are lowered.
9 Ready for lifting.

Lights H, I, J and K are off at full contact of rear leg pair against the
load, that is, lights H and J – Clamping position front and rear leg
pair, and light K – Front legs lowered, switch off.
NOTE
When lifting, the lights D, E, F and G must illuminate before
the load has been lifted 300 mm, otherwise the lifting attempt
is stopped. Lower the load. The lights D, E, F and G must be
unactuated before a new lifting attempt is started.
Instructions for lifting with "slings"

Attachment points or hooks are located at each twistlock/corner box
on the attachment. These are used for handling with lifting "slings".
Maximum weight for lifting with "slings" is 45 tonnes.
Bear in mind the following when lifting with "slings":

• The equipment used to lift with "slings" must be correctly
Max 15˚
dimensioned as well as approved for such usage and for the load
to be lifted.
• Use "slings" that are as short as possible.
• The load must always be lifted vertically using all four corners with
the load equally distributed to the four lifting points (see figure).
• When lifting and transporting a load suspended in "slings", drive
002564
slowly (below 5 km/h) and pay close attention to the position of

the load.

Instructions for coil handling

When lifting coils, the load must be positioned as far in on the lifting
tool as possible. If you notice when lifting that the centre of gravity is
far forward and the load risks sliding off the lifting tool, lower the load
again. Activate the tilt lock with the switch for tilt lock on the control
panel (position 53e) before lifting the load again.
CAUTION
Locking increases loads and mechanical wear on the
machine.
Disengage the lock function when it is not required in
order to minimise wear on the machine. When the lock
function is active, the speed of the machine is limited.
53e. Switch, tilt lock

5 Handling – Transporting load 177
5.5.2 Transporting load

General
WARNING
Transporting loads is associated with major risks.
Risk of roll-over and tipping over! Chance of load
damage to property! Extreme danger!
Respect the lifting capacity of the machine and
exercise the greatest caution during load handling:
• The machine must only be operated on even
surfaces, intended for the machine's total weight
and ground pressure.
• All transporting of loads must take place in
transport position. Exercise caution when
operating, think about the width and height so
that the boom or attachment does not collide with
poles, cables, etc.
• Do not transport the load in a higher position than
necessary since this may cause the machine to roll
or tip over.
• Always operate with the load facing uphill on an
uphill or downhill grade, never operate or turn
across a grade.
• Operate the machine in reverse if the transported
load obscures visibility to the front.
• No personnel may encroach or stand under a
raised load.
• The operator must avoid forceful acceleration
and heavy braking to prevent risk of tipping and
roll-over.
• The operator must always adjust the speed when
turning to prevent skidding and risk of roll-over or
tipping over.
In the event of tipping or roll-over, hold onto the
steering wheel and remain in the cab. Do NOT
attempt to jump out of the cab until any movement
of the machine has finished.
When handling special loads local regulations may
apply. Learn about them and follow them.
Note that illustrations in this section show transport with top lift
attachment and container. Instructions also apply for transport with the
bottom lift attachment and load.
If radio control has been used, deactivate this function before

transport is started, see Radio control, page 196.

178 5 Handling – Transporting load
Instructions for top lift and bottom lift
NOTE
1 Lift the load slightly.

Top lift: when the load is lifted, the middle light, B - Contact,
(orange), is off. The function for twistlocks is then disengaged.
Bottom lift: when lifting, the lights D, E, F, and G switch on for
contact and clamping position. The function of lights H, I, J and K
is not active with full contact of the leg pair against the load.
If the machine is equipped with indication of eccentric load ( ),
adjust the load laterally using the control for side shift (position
53b). When the load is centred, a green light in the light panel on
the side shift carriage is switched on, see Indication of eccentric
load, page 184.
2
Disengage the levelling lock and tilt lock, see Tilting, page 185
and Levelling, page 187.
CAUTION
Locking increases the loads on the machine.
Increased mechanical wear.
Disengage the lock function when it is not required
in order to minimise wear on the machine. When the
lock function is active the machine's speed is limited
for extra protection.
3
Move the cab back to the rear/lower position before moving the
machine, see Hydraulic sliding cab, page 194
WARNING
The cab must ALWAYS be in the rear position while
operating the machine.
Risk of product damage.
The cab must be in the rear position in order to be
protected from a dropped load (by the lift cylinders).
4 Back away from the stack.

5 Handling – Transporting load 179
5 Adjust load height and boom to transport position.
DANGER
Load handling requires extreme care when loading
and at high load handling height, that is, long boom
extension.
Risk of roll-over! Extreme danger!
When a load is to be lowered, ALWAYS retract the
boom BEFORE the boom is lowered.
6 Correct transport position is with the load as far down and in as

possible without obstructing visibility, see Transport position, page
179. The load's centre of gravity must be centred laterally.
NOTE
When transporting the load with the OHC attachment's folding
extended twistlocks down, the centre of gravity of the load moves
further from the attachment's point of rotation. This affects the
damping of the attachment and increases the strain on the
attachment and boom. Adapt the speed. Avoid transporting a
load with extended twistlocks in lowered position.
NOTE
When transporting loads with bottom lift attachment, machine
speed is limited to max. second gear and 10 km/h.
Transport position
When the machine is to be operated with or without load, assume the
transport position to minimise the risk of roll-over and imbalance while
operating. In transport position, the boom is completely retracted, the
load's centre of gravity is centred sideways (laterally) and the load is
lifted for good forward visibility (see illustration to the left). Do not lift
the load higher than necessary in order to have a clear view.
All transport must take place with the cab in the rear position.
When transporting a load suspended in "slings", drive slowly (below 5

km/h) and pay close attention to the position of the load.

180 5 Handling – Unloading
Operating on grades
Operating on grades
It is important to operate with extreme care on grades since there's an
increased risk of tipping and rolling over.
NOTE
When braking, pay attention that the transmission is disengaged
during braking.
• Operating with a load.

Lower the load as low as possible without compromising visibility.
Retract the boom as far as possible.
Always operate with the load against the grade (see figure),
regardless of travel direction.
• Operating without a load.
Lower and retract the boom as far as possible.
Always operate with the attachment in the direction of the grade
(down), regardless of travel direction.
Working near overhead high voltage power lines

Operate with extreme care in all work near overhead high voltage
power lines, keeping in mind the extensive reach capacity of the boom
and attachment.
DANGER
If the machine comes into contact with overhead high
voltage power lines. Remain seated and call for help!
Extreme danger!
Remain in the cab. Wait for assistance.
5.5.3 Unloading
General
There are two types of attachments which differ in lift handling:
• top lift attachment
• bottom lift attachment
Instructions for top lift attachment
NOTE

5 Handling – Unloading 181
1 Run towards the stack of containers, as close as possible.

2 Lift the load over the stack.
Strive to centre the load over the stack. The approach angle
toward the container can be varied.
3 Apply the parking brake if desired, or hold the machine stationary

with the service brake. Alternatively, shift to neutral.
4
For use of radio control, see Radio control, page 196
For use of extended tilt function, see Extended tilt function, page
186.
5 Position the load over the stack. Adjust with rotation, side shift
and boom in/out.
6
load parallel with the unloading site, see Tilting, page 185 and
7 Lower the load.
When contact is obtained, the middle light, B - Contact, is activated.
8 Open twistlocks. Left light, A - Twistlocks locked, goes out (green)
when release of twistlocks is initiated. Right light, C - Twistlocks
unlocked, illuminates (red) when the twistlocks are completely
open.
Never lift when twistlocks are in the process of being released.
9 Lift the attachment so that it moves clear of the load.
10
Move the cab back to the rear/lower position before moving
the machine, see Hydraulic sliding cab, page 194 or Hydraulic
vertically adjustable cab, page 195
WARNING
11 Back away from the load.

182 5 Handling – Unloading
Instructions for bottom lift attachment
1 Run towards the unloading site, as close as possible.

2 Lift the load to suitable height.
Strive to centre the load over the unloading site.
3 Apply the parking brake if desired, or hold the machine stationary

with the service brake. Alternatively, shift to neutral.
4
For use of radio control, see Radio control, page 196
5 Position the load over the unloading site. Adjust with rotation, side
shift and boom in/out.
6
load parallel with the unloading site, see Tilting, page 185 and
7 Lower the load.
Contact of legs against the load disappears, which is indicated by
the lights D, E, F and G switching off.
Lights H, I, J and K are active once again when full contact of the
leg pairs against the load ceases.
Lights H and J are switched on in order to indicate clamping
position.
Light K is switched on in order to indicate that the front leg pair
is lowered.
8 Leave clamping position for legs to release load.

Lights H and J are off to indicate that clamping position is no
longer active.
Light K is switched on in order to indicate that the front leg pair
is lowered.

5 Handling – Functions for load handling 183
9 Raise front leg pair.

Light K switches off to indicate that the front leg pair is no longer
lowered.
Light I is switched on to indicate that the front leg pair is raised.
10 Move the cab back to the rear/lower position before moving
the machine, see Hydraulic sliding cab, page 194 or Hydraulic
vertically adjustable cab, page 195
WARNING
11 Back away from the load and raise the rear leg pair.
5.5.4 Functions for load handling

Automatic spreading 20'–40'
Automatic spreading means that the spreading moves automatically to

the next stop when spreading is activated with the control lever if the
switch for automatic spreading 20'-40' (position 57) is activated. When
automatic spreading is in progress, a buzzer sounds on the attachment
to warn of movement of the machine's parts.
To stop an ongoing automatic spreading, activate spreading in or out of

with the control lever.
The spreading function is dampened for a short time before one of

the stops 20' (30' if the function is activated ) or 40'. To continue
spreading to the end position 40', repeat the instantaneous function
selection with the control lever.
A buzzer on the attachment sounds during automatic spreading. To

stop an ongoing automatic 20' to 40' spreading, activate spreading
in or out of with the control lever.
NOTE
Automatic spreading can only be activated with closed doors and
released parking brake.
Instructions
1 Activate switch for automatic spreading 20'–40' (position 57).
2 Close the doors.
3 Disengage the parking brake.
4 Check that nothing is in the way of an intended spreading
movement.
5 Activate spreading with the control lever.
6 Closely monitor the attachment's spreading booms and stop the
spreading in the event of a risk of collision.
To stop an ongoing automatic spreading, activate spreading in
or out of with the control lever.

184 5 Handling – Functions for load handling
Indication of eccentric load
As an option, the machine can have a system that indicates eccentric

load. When lifting and transporting a load, the system shows the load's
centre of gravity laterally in relation to the lifting points (bottom lift) by
means of indicator lights on the attachment and operating menu load
centre monitoring, see 4.11.1.8 Operating menu load centre monitoring,
page 77.
The operator has full responsibility that load handling takes place in a
safe manner. To assist the operator, there are indicator lights on the
side shift carriage that are highly visible from the cab.
WARNING
Never transport a load with the centre of gravity
displaced outside the permitted limits.
Risk of dropped load with damage to the machine and
load as a result.
Instructions
A B C 1 Lift the load slightly.

2 Check the load's centre of gravity.
• If the load's centre of gravity is centred between the lifting
points (bottom lift), the green light (position B) illuminates with
a steady glow.
• If the load's centre of gravity is not centred but within the
015900
min/max limits, the green light (position B) illuminates together

with the white light (position A or C) on the respective side
Light panel, attachment with a steady glow.
• If the load's centre of gravity is displaced outside the min/max
limits, the green light (position B) extinguishes and the white
light (position A or C) illuminates, and the lifting function is
stopped. This can be by-passed with the switch for by pass
(position 47).
If by pass is not used, memorise the direction in which the
centre of gravity shall be moved.
3 If the load's centre of gravity is displaced outside the min/max
limits, and by pass is not used, the load must be set down. Repack
the contents in the container/trailer so that the load's centre of
gravity is centred between the lifting points.
4 Continue with load handling.
Side shift stop
Side shift stop limits the side shift in the attachment. When the limit for
side shift is reached, the side shift is stopped and event menu side
shift stop is shown in the display.
Use the switch for by pass of safety system (position 47) to by-pass
the side shift stop.
Event menu side shift stop disappears from the display when the side
shift of the attachment is within the interval for permitted side shift.
Event menu side shift stop

Rotation stop
Rotation stop limits the rotational movement of the attachment ±25°.

When the limit for rotation stop is reached, the rotational movement
stops and the event menu for rotation stop is shown in the display.
Use the switch for by-pass of safety system (position 47) to bypass
the rotation stop.
The event menu for rotation stop disappears from the display when the
rotation of the attachment is within the interval for permitted rotation.
Event menu rotation stop
Tilting
Tilting means that the angle of the attachment can be controlled with
the control lever (position 53), see Control lever (53), page 61, this is
useful for handling loads with uneven centre of gravity.
Tilting is intended for use when lifting and unloading loads, when the
load is transported it should "hang freely" in order to reduce the loads
on the machine.
CAUTION
Instructions
1 Operate the machine forward to the load in the same way as for
normal lifting, see Instructions for top lift attachment, page 173.
2 Tilt the attachment so that the contact surface is parallel with the
load, using the control lever (position 53).
3 Lock the tilt with the switch for tilt lock on the control lever (position
53e).
Machine speed is limited to a maximum of 5 km/h when the tilt is
locked.
4 Lift the load in the same way as for normal lifting.
5 Reverse away so that the load hangs freely.
6 Unlock the tilt lock with the switch for tilt lock on the control lever
(position 53e).

Extended tilt function
As an option, the machine can be equipped with extended tilt function,

attachment. This means that the attachment can tilt 20' containers to
higher tilt angles than standard machines in order to empty the load
from the container. Containers longer than 20' must not be tilted.
For safe load handling there is indication on the boom nose, which is
highly visible from the cab, for safe lifting and emptying positions.
NOTE
The container to be emptied must be designed for the purpose.
In addition, the operator must monitor the load during the whole
emptying phase.
WARNING
In an emergency situation, or in the event of unwanted
activation/movement of a function.
Risk of personal injury and/or property damage!
IMMEDIATELY TURN OFF all working hydraulics by
pressing the CONTROL BREAKER for hydraulics.
Instructions
1 Apply the parking brake and engage neutral gear.
2 Turn the attachment so that the container is aligned along the
machine's direction of travel. Emptying of the load must take place
facing the machine.
3 Adjust boom extension/angle so that there is no risk that the load
makes contact with the ground, the machine or other equipment
during the tilt movement.
4 Ready to empty the load.
Activate the tilt lock with the switch for tilt lock on the control lever
(position 53e). If the tilt lock is not activated, tilt movement is
limited to 10°.
Machine speed is limited to a maximum of 5 km/h when the tilt is
locked.
CAUTION
Locking increases loads and mechanical wear on the
machine.
Disengage the lock function when it is not required in
order to minimise wear on the machine. When the lock
function is active, the speed of the machine is limited.
5 Use the tilt function to tilt the attachment towards the machine.
Monitor the load during the whole tilt movement. Adjust boom
extension/angle so that the contents of the container are not
emptied over the machine.
If the tilt function is not capable of emptying the load, adjust the
position of the container by side-shifting toward the machine.

NOTE
Side shift towards the machine increases the load on the
attachment.
Never raise the load more than necessary to prevent the contents
being emptied on the machine.
6 When the load has been emptied, the attachment must be tilted
back to horizontal position.
NOTE
Make sure the attachment is not tilted into the boom.
7 Unlock the tilt lock with the switch for tilt lock on the control lever.
To do this, the tilt movement must be less than 10°.
Levelling
Levelling means that the lateral angle of the attachment can be

controlled with the control lever (position 53), see Control lever (53),
001117
page 61, this is useful for lifting loads that tilt.
Levelling is intended for use when lifting and unloading loads, when
the load is transported it should "hang freely" in order to reduce the
loads on the machine.
CAUTION
Instructions
1 Operate the machine forward to the load in the same way as for
normal lifting, see Instructions for top lift attachment, page 173.
2 Level the attachment so that the contact surface is parallel with the
load, using the control lever (position 53).
3 Lock the levelling with the switch for levelling lock on the control
lever (position 53f).
Machine speed is limited to a maximum of 5 km/h when the
levelling is locked.
4 Lift the load in the same way as for normal lifting.
5 Reverse away so that the load hangs freely.
53f. Switch, levelling lock
6 Unlock the levelling lock with the switch for levelling lock on the
control lever (position 53f).

Overheight legs
Overheight legs allow the lifting of loads under the machine's ground
level.
In order to be able to lower the legs, the twistlocks must be unlocked,

see indicator light for unlocked twistlocks (position 87).
NOTE
When transporting the load with the OHC attachment's folding
extended twistlocks down, the centre of gravity of the load moves
further from the attachment's point of rotation. This affects the
damping of the attachment and increases the strain on the
attachment and boom. Adapt the speed. Avoid transporting a load
with extended twistlocks in lowered position.
Instructions
1 Operate the boom so that the attachment is sufficiently high up
and far out from the machine in order that the overheight legs can
be operated freely.
2 Check that twistlocks are open, indicator light for unlocked
twistlocks (position 87) is switched on.
000314
3 Raise/lower the legs with the switch for lowering the overheight
legs (position 61).
4 When the legs are fully lowered, the indicator light illuminates
(white). Overheight legs lowered on the attachment's light panel.
5 Operate the machine for load handling in the same way as for
normal lifting, see Instructions for top lift attachment, page 173 and
Instructions for top lift attachment, page 180
Support jacks
Both support jacks (position B) are mounted at the front of the frame
and their function is to increase the capacity of the machine during load
handling. The support jacks are operated with the switch for support
jacks (position A), see Switch for support jacks (50), page 50.
When the support jacks are fully lowered, the indicator light for
lowered support jacks illuminates, see Indicator light, lowered support
jacks (84), page 38. When the support jacks are moving, the event
menu for support jacks is shown, see Event menu support jacks,
description, page 84 or Event menu automatic lowering of support
jacks, description, page 95.
The following conditions must be met in order to lower the support

A. Switch, support jacks (position 50)
jacks:
B. Support jacks
• Parking brake released.
• Transmission in neutral position.
• Machine stationary.
• Doors closed.
• Operator in seat.

Instructions
1 Run forward toward the load handling site and stop the machine.
2 Change to neutral position without activating the parking brake.
3 Operate support jacks down with the switch for the support jacks.
Lowering/raising can be either manual (the switch must be held
depressed throughout the lowering/raising) or automatic (a short
press activates lowering/raising to end position down or up). The
setting can only be changed during a service.
The event menu is shown in the display during movement. On
machines set for automatically lowering of the support jacks,
Event menu automatic lowering of the support jacks is displayed
when the support jacks are moving, see Event menu automatic
lowering of support jacks, description, page 95. On machines set
for manual lowering of the support jacks, Event menu support
jacks is displayed when the support jacks are moving, see Event
menu support jacks, description, page 84.
When the support jacks are lowered, this is indicated by the
indicator light for lowered support jacks (position 84). The event
menu in the display disappears.
4 Carry out load handling.
5 Operate support jacks up with the switch for the support jacks.
Lowering/raising can be either manual (the switch must be held
depressed throughout the lowering/raising) or automatic (a short
press activates lowering/raising to end position down or up). The
setting can only be changed during a service.
When the support jacks leave the lower position, the indicator light
for support jacks is switched off (position 84). When the support
jacks are fully raised, Event menu support jacks is switched off
in the display.

Scales
Load weight is approximated with the operating menu for scales.
NOTE
For calibration, contact service personnel.
Instructions
1 Perform the lifting movement and then lower the load slowly about
10 cm.
2 Select the operating menu for the scales with or and confirm
with . A border around the row for the current weight (position
b) indicates that the function is activated.
3 The different rows have different functions:
Select row with or . Confirm the selection with .
Undo the selection with .
a. Shows tare weight in tonnes or pounds (lbs).
The value shown in row (a) can be reset to zero (tared) using
the function keys.
Select taring with or .
Switch between taring (current tare weight is displayed) or to
no tare (0 shown). Confirm with .
b. Current weight in tonnes or pounds (lbs), (net weight).
The value in row (b) can be added to row (c).
Select row (b) with or .
Add the value in row (b) to row (c) with .
c. Total weight in tonnes or pounds (lbs) (gross weight).
The value in the row (c) can be reset.
Select row (c) with or .
The value on row (c) can be reset with .
Leave the menu with .

Load receipt
As an option, the machine can be equipped with a function for printing

out load receipts. The function requires a printer in the cab. The option
can also be supplemented with a keyboard if the facility to enter load
identification is required as well.
The function uses the scale function, see Scales, page 190 to weigh
the load within a predefined area where the scale has higher sensitivity.
Use the keyboard to enter the load identification for printout.
The function for load receipts can be adapted using the menus for
machine settings, see Setting for load receipts, page 205.
Instructions
1 Manoeuvre the load to the scale area for load receipts.
Boom angle: 15–35°.
Boom extension: 0–1.5 m.
When the load is within the scale area, this is indicated by the
option light on the boom nose flashing.
Option light, light panel, boom

Event menu load receipt 2 The event menu is shown after a few seconds.
a. Header row. Shows status and error 3 Enter the load identification using the keyboard.
messages.
Depending on the setting for load identification, there may be a
b. The load's weight in kg. When the weight validation of the input, see Setting for load receipts, page 205.
has been stabilised and is approved for the load
receipt, a green background is shown. In the event of incorrect input, the load identification is shown with
a red background and must be corrected for printout of the receipt
c. Load identification. When the field has been to be possible.
filled in correctly, a green background is shown.
Red background indicates incorrectly entered For input of the load identification via the keyboard, see also Input
text. of container identity, page 192.
d. Finishes printing out the receipt with more lifts. 4 When the load has been stabilised and a validated weight is
available, the current weight is shown with a green background
e. Printout of previously lifted loads, scrolls back in the event menu.
in the history.
Weight validation goes fastest if the machine is stationary on level
f. Prints out or saves a load receipt of the ground and no hydraulic functions are in use.
current values (despite measured load or load
identification not being green). 5 Selected printout mode SINGLE: the receipt is printed out
automatically when there is approved green highlighted weight and
g. Stops weighing in progress and closes the correct input of load identification.
menu.
Selected printout mode MULTI: the receipt is printed out for a
series of lifts if there is correct input of load identification and the
operator finishes the series by pressing the display's function
key under the icon (position d). If event menu load receipt is not
shown, activate it manually (from the operating menu or operating
menu load centre) by pressing on the left-hand button under the
display (marked with print symbol).
See selection of printout mode Setting for load receipts, page 205.
6 To print out the history for previously lifted loads, press the
display's function key under the icon (position e). Each printout
scrolls one step backwards in the history.
7 To force the printout despite the weight or the load identification
not being green, press the display's function key under the icon
(position f).
A weight that is not approved is highlighted with a * on the receipt.
8 To cancel registration of current load receipt, press the display's
function key under the icon (position g).

Input of container identity

Input of load identification can be done in two ways, ISO or Text.
These are selected in the SET RECEIPT menu, see Setting for load
receipts, page 205.
ISO
The input menu verifies the load's identity in accordance with DIN
ENISO 6346.
The identity consists of four parts, ABC D 123456 7:

• ABC – Owner's designation
• D – Type of container
• 123456 – Owner's serial number for the container
• 7 – Check digit
A valid identity is highlighted with green background and invalid identity

with red background.
Input is simplified with the EasyEdit function.

• All letters are converted to capital letters
• Invalid characters are ignored
• The “Del” key deletes all characters
• “Backspace” deletes the last input character
• If ABC D is the same between two lifts then it does not need to be
re-entered. If the input starts with a figure then ABC D is filled in
automatically with the last input.
• After the input of ABC, D is filled in automatically with the last
choice in the cases where you continue the input with a figure.
Text
Any chosen text (of maximum 21 characters) can be entered for the
printout of the receipt. The “Del” key deletes all characters while the
“Backspace” deletes the last input character.
The input must be finished with “Enter”, at which point the field has a
green background.
Load counter
The number of lifts is recorded in the operating menu for load counter.
The different counters can be reset separately.
Instructions
1 Select the operating menu for load counter with or and
confirm with . A frame around the row shows the selected
counter.
Undo selection with .
2 Select counter with or . A frame around the row shows the
selected counter.
Undo selection with .
a. Top lift or tool changer, counter 1.
b. Top lift or tool changer, counter 2.
c. Bottom lift, OHC lift or lifting tool, counter 1.
d. Bottom lift, OHC lift or lifting tool, counter 2.
3 Reset the counter with .

Height limitation
Height limitation restricts how high the boom can be operated. Height
limitation is adjustable according to the customer needs.
When the boom reaches a preset height (position A), the lifting
movement is stopped and the event menu for height limitation shows
the machine's total height. Lower or retract the boom to continue load
handling.
When it is necessary to lift above the height limitation the function can
be by-passed with the switch for by-pass of safety system (position 47).
When the height limitation has been passed (the grey field in the figure,
covering about 70 cm) lifting, lowering or extension can be operated
without bypassing.
LC-limitation
LC-limitation prevents the load from being lifted too close to the
machine. When the load reaches the set distance from the machine,
synchronised lift is activated automatically (lowering the boom or
increasing boom extension) so that the load is lifted straight up or down.
Use the switch for by pass of safety system (position 47) to by-pass
the LC-limitation.
WARNING
The load may strike the cab when the LC-limitation has
been by-passed.
Danger! LC-limitation disengaged!
Avoid by-passing the LC-limitation.

Speed limitation, load position
As an option, the machine can be equipped with a function that

automatically limits the speed when the position of the load is outside
a predefined area (grey in figure). The size of the area is based on
machine type, load position and load weight. Speed limitation increases
gradually when the position of the load approaches the outer edges of
the area. To avoid speed limitation, you can lower or retract the boom,
see Event menu speed limitation, load position, description, page 96.
Hydraulic sliding cab
Hydraulic longitudinal sliding of the cab facilitates visibility during load

handling. The cab is operated using the switch for hydraulic sliding
cab (position 62).
For the cab to be moved, the operator's door(s) must be closed. In

addition, the control breaker for hydraulics must not be activated.
If the cab should jam, then it can be moved manually by disengaging

the engine, see Emergency equipment, page 107.
A. Switch for cab movement (position 62)
When the cab is moved from the rear position, the limit for permissible
load centre is adjusted variably to the cab's current position. This
prevents the load from being lifted over the cab. When the load
reaches the safety zone in relation to the cab's position, synchronised
lift is activated automatically (lowering the boom or increasing boom
extension) so that the load is lifted straight up or down.
Speed limitation is available as an option when the cab is moved

from the rearmost position.
WARNING
LC-limitation for hydraulic longitudinal sliding of the protected from a dropped load (by the lift cylinders).
cab

Instructions
1 Run toward the load handling site and stop the machine.
2 Move the cab with the switch.
Hold in the switch during the entire movement.
NOTE
Move the cab while the machine is stationary!
3 Perform lifting.
4 Operate the cab back to the rear position with the switch before
the load is moved.
Hydraulic vertically adjustable cab
The vertically adjustable cab simplifies visibility during load handling

at high heights. The cab is operated using the switch for hydraulic
vertical cab adjustment (position 60).
For the cab to be moved, the doors must be closed. In addition, the
control breaker for hydraulics must not be activated. The left-hand door
is locked by a mechanical lock when the cab leaves its lowest position.
The right-hand door has a short wire that blocks the door lock so that
the door cannot be opened, regardless of cab position.
If the cab should jam in the raised position, it can be lowered manually
with an emergency lowering valve, see Emergency equipment, page
107.
Hydraulic vertically adjustable cab
On machines with hydraulic vertically adjustable cab, LC-limitation is
A. Switch for cab movement (position 60) standard and prevents the load from being lifted over the cab. When
the load reaches the safety zone in relation to the cab's position,
synchronised lift is activated automatically (lowering the boom or
increasing boom extension) so that the load is lifted straight up or down.
When the cab is moved from the lowest position, machine speed is
limited to 10 km/h.
Instructions
1 Close the doors and secure safety chains on the insides of the
doors.
A Use the seatbelt.
2 Run toward the load handling site and stop the machine.
3 Move the cab with the switch.
Hold in the switch during the entire movement.
A mechanical lock (position A) prevents the operator from opening
the left-hand door by mistake. The lock releases the driver's door
when the cab is lowered to its lowest position.
NOTE
Move the cab while the machine is stationary!
4 Carry out load handling.

014270
A. Mechanical lock

On the cab frame there are two lock lugs that must be used to secure
the cab in the raised position, for service work for example.
DANGER
When entering under raised cab.
Extreme danger!
A Secure the cab with the lock lugs (position A) on the
sides of the cab frame.
001977
A. Lock lug
Radio control
As an option the machine can be equipped with radio control of the

load functions. The range for the control unit is 25 m.
Instructions
1 Run forward toward the load handling site and stop the machine.
2 Apply the parking brake, see Parking brake, page 58.
3 Take the control unit and pull out the emergency switch on the side
(a). Check that the LED (b) illuminates green.
The battery in the control unit is then fully charged.
4 Activate the radio control function with the switch (position 54).
Pop-up flashes in the display.
5 Activate the radio communication with button (c).
Pop-up illuminates in the display.
6 When the control unit is activated, button (c) works as a horn.
Shift and button (c) increases the engine speed by three steps.
To return to normal mode, hold button (c) depressed.
7 After working via radio control is finished, switch off the control unit.
8 The radio control function is deactivated when the parking brake
is released.
For an overview of the control unit's functions, see Radio control, page
104.

5 Handling – Lifting tool 197
5.5.5 Lifting tool

General
Lifting tool for attachment
Lifting tool for attachment

The attachment on the machine can be adapted for connection of
one or more pre-determined lifting tools, depending on machine
configuration. The lifting tool is secured in the attachment by twistlocks.
When the lifting tool is secured, the quick-couplings for electricity and
hydraulics are connected. Once the connection has been made,
the attachment and lifting tool can be controlled. Certain controls
and indicator lights may take on other functions with the lifting tool
connected, see the separate supplement for the specific lifting tool.
Electricity and hydraulic connections must be disconnected before

the boom is manoeuvred away from the lifting tool to start lifting tool
removal.
Sensor for lifting tool
Tool changer and top lift can be equipped with extra sensors for lifting
Sensor for lifting tool (example figure) tools. When a lifting tool is used, unintentional opening of twistlocks is
prevented by means of the sensor giving a signal which means that by
pass must be depressed to open them.
Connecting the lifting tool

1 Manoeuvre the machine and attachment so that the attachment's
twistlocks are positioned directly above the openings for the
twistlocks in the lifting tool.
2 Lower the attachment so that contact is made on all four twistlocks.
The indicator light for contact (orange) switches on in the cab and
on the boom.
3 Lock the twistlocks. The indicator lights for locked twistlocks
(green) switch on in the cab and on the boom, the lights for contact
(orange) illuminate at the same time.
4 Switch off the machine.
5 Depressurise the attachment by opening the attachment relief
valve on the hydraulic plate in the engine compartment.
6 Connect the lifting tool's electricity and hydraulic couplings to the
attachment's connection unit.
7 Close the relief valve by the hydraulic pumps.
8 Start the machine and check the lifting tool functions according to
the instructions for the lifting tool in question. Also check that the
indicator lights in the cab and on the boom have changed function
to the lifting tool's functions.
WARNING
Do not use a machine where the indicator lights are
out of order.
Danger of reduced safety during load handling!
Attachment relief valve, the figure shows the valve
open If the indicator lights don't work, stop work with the
machine and repair.
9 Check that the hydraulic couplings on the tool changer do not leak.

198 5 Handling – Lifting tool
Disconnecting the lifting tool

1 Manoeuvre the lifting tool to an area suitable for disconnection.
2 Lower the lifting tool into its storage area.
3 Switch off the machine.
4 Depressurise the attachment by opening the attachment relief
valve on the hydraulic plate in the engine compartment.
5 Disconnect the lifting tool's electricity and hydraulic couplings
from the attachment's connection unit. Refit any protective caps
on the connections.
6 Close the relief valve by the hydraulic pumps.
7 Start the machine and check that there is full contact. The lights
for contact (orange) switch on in the cab and on the boom.
8 Open twistlocks. The lights for open twistlocks (red) switch on in
the cab and on the boom.
Attachments can be equipped with sensors that prevent the
opening of twistlocks. In such cases, depress by pass to open
twistlocks.
9 Lift the attachment straight up.
10 Check that the hydraulic couplings on the attachment do not leak.
Attachment relief valve, the figure shows the valve

open

5 Handling – Customer settings via display 199
5.6 Customer settings via display

5.6.1 Menu for machine settings
Description
Setting the time
1 Select menu for customer settings with or and confirm with
.
2 Select SET TIME/DATE with or and confirm with .

a. Setting the date and time
b. Setting units
c. Setting of Eco Drive Mode
d. Setting of automatic start and stop function
3 Select SET TIME with or and confirm with .

014935
4 Adjust the hours with and , confirm with . Continue in this

way with the minutes and seconds. Leave the menu with .
014941

200 5 Handling – Menu for machine settings
Setting the date

.

b. Setting units
3 Select SET DATE with or and confirm with .

015322
4 Adjust the year with and , confirm with . Continue in this

way with the month and day. Leave the menu with .
014942
Setting the time format

.

5 Handling – Menu for machine settings 201

b. Setting units
3 Select SET TIME STYLE with or and confirm with .
015323
4 Select the time format 24h or 12h am/pm with or . Leave

the menu with .
014943
Setting of display units

.
2 Select SET SI/US UNITS with or and confirm with .

b. Setting units

3 Select SI UNITS or US UNITS with or . Leave the menu

with .
014936
Setting of Eco Drive Mode
The menu is only available if the machine is set for Eco Drive Mode
to be selectable by the operator.
.
2 Select SET ECO DRIVE MODE with or and confirm with .

b. Setting units
3 Select POWER, NORMAL or ECO with or . Leave the menu

with .
For a more detailed description, see Eco Drive Mode, page 157.
017376

Setting of automatic start and stop function

.
2 Select SET AUTO START AND STOP with or and confirm

with .
b. Setting units
3 Select off or on with or . Leave the menu with .

For a more detailed description, see Automatic start and stop
function, page 156.
Setting of display language

.

2 Select SET LANGUAGE with or and confirm with .

a. Setting of display language
b. Setting joystick or mini-wheel sensitivity with .
c. Setting for printout of load receipts .
3 Select off or on with or . Leave the menu with .
Setting of sensitivity for joystick control or mini-wheel

.
2 Select SET COMFORT STEERING with or and confirm

with .
3 Set the sensitivity of the joystick with or and store the value
with .
The sensitivity is set in stages where 0 = no deflection and 10
= max valve deflection.

Setting for load receipts
For a more detailed description of the load receipt function, see Load
receipt, page 191.
.
2 Select SET RECEIPT with or and confirm with .

3 Select the setting to change with or and confirm with .

a. Setting of receipt type.
b. Setting of printout mode.
c. Setting for load identification.
4 Change setting of printout mode for receipt (no receipt, single or

multi) with or and confirm with . Leave the menu with .
OFF: No printout of receipt.
SINGLE: Printout of receipt takes place automatically after each
lift when the weight has been validated (green background).
MULTI: Printout of receipt takes place for a series of lifts, when the
operator specifies that the series of lifts is finished (by pressing
the display's function key for total). The printout contains all lifts
in the range and a total weight.
See Load receipt, page 191.

206 5 Handling – Menu for active error codes
5 Change for automatic or manual printout mode with or and

confirm with .
MANUAL: Event menu for load receipt must be activated manually
(from the operating menu or operating menu load centre) by
pressing the display's function key (under the print icon). This
setting is used when you only want to weigh certain loads.
AUTO: The event menu for load receipt is shown automatically
when the load is lifted to the machine's scale area. This setting is
used when you want to weigh all loads.
6 Change setting of load identification with or and confirm with

. Leave the menu with .
OFF: No load identification on the receipt.
ISO: Load identification in accordance with DIN ENISO 6346.
(Validation of load identification takes place and the result is shown
with green background if the input is correct. Red background
means that the input is incorrect.)
TEXT: Load identification with any chosen text (of maximum 21
characters). (No validation takes place of the input text.)
See Input of container identity, page 192.
5.6.2 Menu for active error codes

Description
1 Select the menu for ACTIVE ERRORS with or and confirm
with .
a b c 2 The menu shows the active error codes.

Scroll through the error codes with or . Leave the menu
with .
d
a. Device that generated the error code.
k e b. Component error code concerns (SPN code).

c. Type of error (FMI code).
d. Number of active error codes. The first digit shows the error
j being displayed, the second digit the number of active error
codes.
i e. Information can be found in the operator's manual.

f. Symbol for the device that generated the error code.
014944
h g f g. Symbol for operator action.

h. Symbol for the error code level.
i. Number of error codes with the level INFORMATION.
j. Number of error codes with the level WARNING.
k. Number of error codes with the level STOP.
For more information, see Error codes, general, page 112.

5 Handling – Menu for inactive error codes 207
5.6.3 Menu for inactive error codes

Description
1 Select the menu for INACTIVE ERRORS with or and confirm
with .
2 The menu shows the inactive error codes.

Scroll through the error codes with or . Leave the menu
with .
For more information, see Error codes, general, page 112.

014945
5.6.4 Menu for statistics and history

Description
1 Select the menu for running times with or and confirm with .
2 The menu shows the cumulative operating time for the machine's
components. This counter cannot be reset.
a. Operating time engine in hours.
b. Operating hours for transmission, with gear activated, in hours.
c. Operating hours for hydraulic functions activated, in hours.
d. Proportion of engine operating hours at idling speed, in
percent.
Select the next statistics and history menu with or go back with

208 5 Handling – Menu for statistics and history
3 The menu shows resettable operating time, since the last reset
for the machine's components.
a. Operating time engine in hours.
b. Operating hours for transmission, with gear activated, in hours.
c. Operating hours for hydraulic functions activated, in hours.
d. Proportion of engine operating hours at idling speed, in
percent.
Select which row should be reset by pressing momentarily.
Select row with or . Reset the row with .
Reset all rows by pressing for more than 2 seconds.
4 The menu shows driving distances.
a. Cumulative driving distance in km or miles. This counter
cannot be reset.
b. Driving distance odometer 1 since last reset to zero in km or
miles.
c. Driving distance odometer 2 since last reset to zero in km or
miles.
5 The menu shows accumulated fuel statistics. This counter cannot
be reset.
a. Total fuel consumption in litres or gallons.
b. Average fuel consumption in litres/hour or gallons/hour.
c. Average fuel consumption in litres/100 km or gallons/100
miles.
d. Average fuel consumption in litres/lift or gallons/lift.
6 The menu shows resettable fuel statistics since the last reset.
a. Fuel usage in litres or gallons.
b. Average fuel consumption in litres/hour or gallons/hour.
c. Average fuel consumption in litres/100 km or gallons/100
miles.
d. Average fuel consumption in litres/lift or gallons/lift.
7 The menu shows accumulated load statistics. This counter cannot
be reset.
a. Total number of lifts.
b. Average lift rate in number of lifts/hour.

5 Handling – Menu for statistics and history 209
8 The menu shows resettable load statistics.

a. Number of lifts counter 1.
b. Number of lifts counter 2.
c. Average lift rate in number of lifts/hour.
9 The menu shows accumulated load counter.

a. Total number of lifts in 20'-position (including OHC ).
b. Total number of lifts in 30'-position (including OHC ).
c. Total number of lifts in 40'-position (including OHC ).
d. Total number of bottom lifts or OHC lifts .
10 The menu shows resettable load counter.

a. Number of lifts in 20'-position (including OHC ).
b. Number of lifts in 30'-position (including OHC ).
c. Number of lifts in 40'-position (including OHC ).
d. Number of bottom lifts or OHC lifts .
11 The menu shows resettable load statistics.
a. Cumulative lifting load of 1000s of tonnes. This counter
cannot be reset.
b. Total lifting load since last reset to zero in tonnes.
c. Average load per lift since last reset to zero in tonnes/lift or
pounds/lift.
12 The menu shows resettable load and fuel statistics.
a. Average lifting load since last reset to zero in tonnes/hour or
pounds/hour.
b. Average fuel consumption since last reset to zero in litres/hour
or gallons/hour.
c. Average fuel consumption since last reset to zero in litres/100
tonnes or gallons/100 tonnes.

210 5 Handling – Menu for services and settings
13
The menu shows the cumulative statistics for the automatic start
and stop function.
a. Average fuel consumption in litres/hour or gallons/hour,
including the time that the engine has been auto-stopped.
b. The time that the engine has been switched off by the
automatic start and stop function in hours, including the time
that the engine has been auto-stopped.
c. Number of automatic engine stops.
14
The menu shows the resettable statistics for the automatic start
and stop function.
a. Average fuel consumption in litres/hour or gallons/hour,
including the time that the engine has been auto-stopped.
b. The time that the engine has been switched off by the
automatic start and stop function in minutes, including the time
that the engine has been auto-stopped.
c. Number of automatic engine stops.
5.6.5 Menu for services and settings

Description
Used for diagnostics, calibration and settings on the machine by
authorised personnel. Access code required.
On machines with bypass with code lock the menu is also used to
unlock the bypass.
014981
5.6.6 Menu for machine check

Menu for machine check, description
1 Select the menu for MACHINE CHECK with or and confirm
with .

5 Handling – Menu for machine check 211
2 The menu shows lamp checking. This function switches on all the
lights on the machine in order to facilitate daily inspection.
Switch on all the lights on the machine with . The tick in the box
indicates that the lights are switched on.
NOTE
Run the engine at idle in order to prevent discharge of the
batteries.
Select the next menu with or go back with . Leave the menu
with .
3 The menu shows reversing of cooling fans for the intercooler.

Change the cooling fans' blow direction . The tick in the box
indicates the fans' blow direction is reversed.
with .
4
The menu shows central lubrication. This menu activates the
central lubrication for extra lubrication or function check of the
central lubrication.
Activate the central lubrication's main units with . The tick in the
box indicates that a lubrication cycle is activated.
with .
5 The menu shows checking the scale. This menu reads the values
from the load detector's sensors and shows them individually. The
load is weighed regardless of boom position.
a. Shows load's weight in kilo. Accuracy is 1% of load capacity,
i.e. approx. +/-500 kg.
b. Shows distance from centre of front wheel to load centre in
metres.
c. Shows extension of boom in metres.
d. Shows boom angle in degrees.
with .

212 6 Inspection and maintenance
6 Inspection and
maintenance
General
This chapter describes:
• DAILY INSPECTION - performed by the operator.
Daily inspection describes the running inspection that significantly
contributes to making the machine a safe and reliable workplace.
• MAINTENANCE - performed by the operator.
Maintenance describes some simple maintenance actions.
• SERVICE - performed by trained service technician.
Service is performed according to a service schedule and by
service technicians. Service is described in the maintenance
manual.
It is the operator who is responsible for ensuring that the machine
comes in for service according to prescribed service intervals.
Procedures are described in the maintenance manual.
• ERROR CODE INFORMATION - read off by the operator.
Error code information is read off by the operator from the control
system's display in the cab. Depending on the type of error code, it
is handled by the operator or a service technician.
NOTE
All time information refers to operating time, that is, the time shown
by the hour meter on the panel.
CAUTION
Only spare parts approved by Cargotec may be used.
This is to maintain the machine's safety as well as to
meet warranty and service agreements!
Only use spare parts and fluids approved by Cargotec
in order to fulfil warranty terms.

6 Inspection and maintenance – Daily inspection 213
6.1 Daily inspection

General
Daily inspection of the machine is extremely important in order to
ensure that it is safe both for the operator and its surroundings.
Every operator should perform checks before a new work shift. In this
way, operators can avoid running defective machines with malfunctions
that have been generated or caused during an earlier work shift.
WARNING
inspection.
Instructions
Perform the following checks:
1. Visual inspection of the machine's exterior and engine
compartment. Pay attention to odours from fuel or electronic
equipment. Walk around the machine and check the following:
• That sensors for twistlocks and contact are clean and free of
grease, and that the contact pins for twistlocks can be moved
up and down easily. Note that a contact pin that binds in the
upper position may indicate contact, despite the frame not
being positioned against the container.
• The machine is equipped with bottom-lift attachment , check
that the sensors for lift leg position, contact and load lift are
clean and grease-free.
• The machine is equipped with overheight legs ; check that
the sensors for the position of the overheight legs are clean
and grease-free.
• Leakage from engine, fuel and AdBlue systems, transmission,
drive axle, steering cylinder, hydraulic hoses and hydraulic
cylinders.
DANGER
Residue from fuel, oils, grease or other flammable
materials on the engine or in the engine compartment
is a fire hazard.
Fire hazard!
Remove residue of flammable materials in the engine
compartment as soon as they are detected. Be extra
careful on hot surfaces such as exhaust systems,
manifolds or turbochargers. If leakage of oil, fuel or
coolant is detected, the reason should be investigated
and the fault corrected before starting the engine.
• Loose wheel nuts

Following a wheel replacement, check-tightening of the bolted
joints is very important (after approx. 4-5 operating hours)
• Damage to rims

214 6 Inspection and maintenance – Daily inspection
• Uneven tyre wear - remove any objects that may penetrate the
tyres, e.g. glass, metal filings, etc.
• Any blisters or damage to the tyres - contact service
immediately to replace tyres that are blistered or damaged.
• Tyre pressure
• Cab with regards to damage and dirty windows, rear view
mirrors.
2. In cold weather:
• Check that wiper blades have not frozen to the windscreen.
WARNING
Attempting to manually move the wiper armswill
damage the wiper motor's gear or shaft.
Damage to the wiper motor's gear or shafts.
Never try to manually move the wiper arms.
• Remove snow and ice from air inlets and radiator grill.
• Antifreeze in washer fluid.
• Disconnect the auxiliary heater .
Electrical box for auxiliary heater is located by the cab steps
on the left side of the machine.
3. Check fluid levels for the following fluids in accordance with the
description, see 6.2 Maintenance, page 216. Top up, if necessary,
with the correct fluid:
• Hydraulic oil.
• Oil for brake system.
• Washer fluid - windows.
• Engine oil, see Engine oil, general, page 230
• Transmission oil.
4. Check the engine
• Check the engine's air filter indicator, also check and drain
the water separator under the fuel prefilter if required (Volvo
engine) and the fuel filter (Cummins engine). For a description,
see Air filter engine, general, page 228 and Fuel system,
general, page 220.
5. Start the machine according to instructions and check:
• Instruments - warning lamps, indicators, any error codes.
• Fuel level - the gauge must not show empty tank.
• AdBlue– level - the gauge must not show empty tank.
Operating the machine without AdBlue leads to restricted
engine power output. In serious cases, a service technician
may need to reset the engine in order to regain full
performance.
• Lighting, direction indicators, signal, brake lights, warning lights
and reflectors, check function and any other considerations.
All the lights on the machine can be switched on simultaneously
with the menu for machine check, see Menu for machine
check, description, page 210.
• Windscreen wipers.
• Check that the rear view mirrors are intact, clean and properly
adjusted.
• If the machine is equipped with the personnel proximity system
: Check that the personnel proximity system alerts as
designed by allowing a colleague with a warning tag to walk
towards the machine when it is stationary with the travel
direction selected.

6 Inspection and maintenance – Daily inspection 215
6. Operate the machine slowly/carefully and check the following

functions:
• Brakes - check-brake at least three times.
• Steering - in both directions.
• Transmission - all gears - forward and reverse.
7. Run all functions with hydraulic cylinders (boom lift/lower/in/out
and side shift) to their end-positions for lubrication of the cylinder
barrels and piston rods.
8. Check the attachment's functions and that:
• The indicator lights for load handling are working.
• Check that the twistlocks are working. This is done by lifting
an empty container until the light "Contact" goes out. It should
not now be possible to release the twistlocks.
WARNING
Do not use the machine if the system for locking
containers does not work.
damage!
Use of the machine must be discontinued, and it has to
be taken to a service workshop for needed actions.
A. Contact pin • The machine is equipped with bottom lift attachment ; check
that lowering of the lift legs is working and that bottom lift of
the load is working.
• The machine is equipped with overheight legs ; check
that lowering of the overheight legs is working and that the
indicator light illuminates when the legs are lowered. Check
that twistlocks are working with lowered overheight legs in
accordance with the point above.
9. For central lubrication :
Make sure grease has not seeped out from the safety valve
(position A). This is a sign that the central lubrication is not working
properly.
10. Check the machine's operating hours - notify the
foreman/supervisor if the machine is close to a service interval.
11. Check if any error codes are active.
See 5.3 Error codes, page 112.
12. Make sure that AdBlue is drained from the hoses when the
machine is turned off. The AdBlue– pump can still be heard for
short time after the engine has been switched off.
The system voltage must not be cut with the battery disconnector
before the pump has stopped.
Only applies to certain engine options.
A Safety valve
B Filler nipple

216 6 Inspection and maintenance – Maintenance
6.2 Maintenance
General
The following maintenance actions are described in this chapter:
– Cleanliness, general, page 218
– Fuel system, general, page 220
– Windscreen washer, general, page 226
– Wiper blades, general, page 227
– Air filter engine, general, page 228
– Cooling system, general, page 229
– Engine oil, general, page 230
– Transmission oil, general, page 231
– Oil, brake system, general, page 232
– Hydraulic system, general, page 233
– Tyres and rims, general, page 235
– Accumulators, general, page 238
– Central lubrication, general, page 239
– Battery and battery disconnector, general, page 240
– Fuses for electrical system, general, page 242
– Lighting, general, page 247
Safety during maintenance

Observe the following when maintenance work is to be performed:
• Always switch off the engine during service work. The only
exception is when service work requires engine power.
• Use stop blocks at the wheels.
• No work may be carried out on the machine without the right
knowledge and skills to do the work correctly. Maintenance
performed incorrectly may be dangerous.
• Always use a hard hat, protective glasses, gloves, work shoes and
other protective items as required by the work situation.
• Read all plates and instructions on the machine and in the
operator's manual before performing any maintenance. Each one
contains important information about handling and maintenance.
• Avoid spills when draining/filling oils, fuel and AdBlue. Use
reservoirs/tanks, pump, hose, etc. for safe handling. Oils, fuel
and AdBlue cause environmental damage. They should be taken
care of by an authorised company. AdBlue is also corrosive
and damages electrical wiring, etc. and must be rinsed away
immediately if spilt.
• Always drain the pressure from the accumulators before working
on the hydraulic system.

6 Inspection and maintenance – Maintenance 217
Cab movement
The cab can be slid forward for better visibility and access in the engine
compartment. Including:
• manual cab movement
• hydraulic longitudinal movement of the cab
• hydraulic vertically adjustable cab
For hydraulic cab movement, the movement is controlled with a

hydraulic function on the panel for hydraulic functions. See chapter 4
Instruments and controls and chapter 5 Handling.
Instructions for manual cab movement
1 Select neutral gear with gear selector and multi-function lever.
2 Apply the parking brake.
3 Close the doors.
4 Remove the pin (position B) from the lock handle.
5 Open the lock handle (position C).
Loosen the lock handle on both sides.
6 Push cab forward.
DANGER
The cab is very heavy and the machine must not be
moved without first securing the cab. It is important
that the locking catches are intact.
Extreme danger! Risk of crushing!
Secure the cab on both sides, with the lock handles
and pins before starting to operate the machine.
A. Position lock handle Replace damaged locking catches.
B. Lock pin
C. Lock handle for securing cab

218 6 Inspection and maintenance – Cleanliness
6.2.1 Cleanliness
Cleanliness, general
Dirt has a negative impact on performance. Experience shows that
clean machines have fewer malfunctions.
The machine should be washed regularly for optimal functionality.

Keep the following in mind when washing:
• Run the hydraulic cylinders to the inner positions.
• Use mild cleaning agents.
Use a degreaser if necessary. Scrub if necessary.
• Use a high-pressure washer, wide water jet.
CAUTION
High-pressure washing of sensitive
components may lead to short-circuiting and
cause malfunction.
Product damage!
Do not use a high-pressure washer on the
cab, radiator, battery compartment, electric
components, control units, connectors, cable
joints, cylinder seals, stub axles, axle seals and
chains.
NOTE
After washing with de-greaser, the hydraulic cylinders should be run
in and out a few times to obtain satisfactory lubrication once again.
WARNING
hydrocarbons.
Low strength! Danger!
Check the surface layer of the roof window and
clean only with washer fluid or mild detergent. Rinse
thoroughly with lukewarm water afterwards. Replace a
damaged roof window that shows cracks or scratches
immediately!

6 Inspection and maintenance – Cleanliness 219
CAUTION
Cleaning agents contain different solvents.
Health-hazardous and highly flammable.
Ensure good ventilation when cleaning the machine.
Avoid skin contact, use protective gloves. If you
get dizzy when using cleaning agents, get fresh air
immediately and contact a doctor. If the cleaning agent
has found its way into your eyes, rinse immediately
with lots of water and contact a doctor immediately.
CAUTION
Cracks or scratches result in reduced strength of the
roof window.
Low strength!
Replace a damaged roof window immediately.
CAUTION
Objects may shoot off when using compressed air for
cleaning.
Risk of injury.
Use protective goggles and protective gloves. Exercise
caution to avoid injury to yourself or those nearby.
For optimum functionality the machine should also be kept clean inside
the cab.
• Plastic material: Vacuum clean, brush/wipe with lightly moistened
rag. Use mild cleaning agent and always wipe down with a lightly
moistened rag and clean water.
• Textile material: Vacuum clean, brush/clean with e.g. furniture or
carpet cleaning agent in accordance with the instructions on the
packaging.

220 6 Inspection and maintenance – Fuel system
6.2.2 Fuel system

Fuel system, general
Fuel filling is located on the left-hand side of the machine.
NOTE
In order to prevent fuel and AdBlue being filled in the wrong tank,
the filler cap for fuel is black and for AdBlue it is blue.
NOTE
Make sure that the area around the tank cap is clean when
refuelling.
WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable and health hazardous.
Fire hazard! Health hazard!
Handle with great care and avoid all possible ignition
sources, for example, cigarettes, sparks. Avoid skin
contact, use protective gloves. In the event of skin
A. Fuel filler orifice contact and spills on clothes, wash the skin and
change clothes.
B. Only Volvo TAD117xVE and Volvo TAD872VE
Filling AdBlue
CAUTION
The quality of the diesel affects the service life of the
engine.
Make sure that correct diesel quality is used.
Incorrect diesel quality will lead to after-treatment
system failure resulting in high repair costs.

6 Inspection and maintenance – Fuel system 221
IMPORTANT
If AdBlue is accidentally poured into the fuel tank this
can lead to the following:
• The engine will not run at full power or not at all.
• Injectors can be damaged.
• Corrosion may arise in the exhaust system between
the turbo and the after-treatment system.
• Expensive repairs.
If fuel is accidentally poured into the AdBlue tank this
can lead to the following:
• The after-treatment system can be seriously
damaged.
• The engine no longer satisfies emission
requirements.
• Expensive repairs.
Fuel
• Always refuel with diesel. For tank volume and fuel quality, see 9
Specifications, page 272.
• Never use additives in the diesel.
• In wintertime, try to fill up immediately after finished operation.
This prevents condensation in the fuel tank. Do not use
anti-condensation agents, for example, alcohol, in the fuel.
• Do not refuel when the engine is running.
• Make sure that the fuel nozzle is connected securely in the filler
pipe (to prevent spills and generation of static electricity).
• Clean around the filler pipe after refuelling and handle used rags,
wiped up fuel, etc. in an environmentally sound manner.

CAUTION
AdBlue can irritate with skin and eye contact and if
inhaled.
Health hazard!
Handle carefully and avoid skin contact, wear
protective gloves. In the event of any contact with
the skin and spillage on clothing, wash the skin with
large quantities of water and change contaminated
clothing and gloves. In the event of eye contact, rinse
thoroughly with water for several minutes and seek
medical advice if necessary. If inhaled, breathe fresh
air and seek medical advice if necessary.
CAUTION
AdBlue spilt on hot components evaporates quickly.
Irritating to the eyes and respiratory system.
Turn your face away. Vaporised AdBlue can act
corrosive to eyes and mucous membranes in the
throat. In the event of eye contact, rinse thoroughly
with water for several minutes and seek medical advice
if necessary. If inhaled, breathe fresh air and seek
medical advice if necessary.
IMPORTANT
Avoid spilling AdBlue on the ground and in
watercourses.
Spillage on the ground must be absorbed with sand or
other absorbent, non-combustible materials.
IMPORTANT
Never fill another AdBlue other than that specified in 9
Specifications.
Risk of damage to the after-treatment system!
Never start the engine if anything other than pure
AdBlue has been filled in the AdBlue tank.

IMPORTANT
Avoid spilling AdBlue on the machine.
AdBlue is highly corrosive and harmful primarily to
wiring and electrical components.
Clean AdBlue from electrical wiring and components
immediately. If a connector has been exposed to
AdBlue solution then it must be replaced immediately
so that the AdBlue solution does not creep further into
the wiring. AdBlue creeps at a speed of 0.6 m/h in the
wiring. Cleaning with water and compressed air is not
sufficient due to AdBlue oxidising the metal itself.
AdBlue
• Always fill with pure AdBlue. For tank volume and AdBlue quality,
see 9 Specifications, page 272.
• Never use additives in the AdBlue.
• In wintertime, try to fill up immediately after finished operation. This
prevents condensation in the AdBlue tank.
• Do not refuel when the engine is running.
Switch off the engine and wait 2 minutes before refilling AdBlue.
When the engine is switched off AdBlue is pumped back into the
tank. If the engine is not switched off before refilling then there
is a risk of overfilling and leakage, with damage to the machine
and the environment as a result when the engine is switched off
the next time.
• Make sure the nozzle for AdBlue is correctly fitted to the filler pipe.
We recommend that filling equipment with automatic shut-off is
always used in order to avoid spills.
• Clean around the filler pipe after refuelling and handle used rags,
wiped up fuel, etc. in an environmentally sound manner.

Fuel prefilter (Volvo engine) and fuel filter (Cummins

engine), instructions
NOTE
The water separator should be drained of water when necessary
or at least every 50 operating hours.
DANGER
The fuel is highly flammable.
Fire hazard! Extreme danger!
Make sure that open flames, sparks, or red-hot/glowing
objects have been extinguished before starting work
on or near the fuel system. Do not smoke near the
machine during work on the fuel system.
1 Turn off the engine and the main system voltage with the battery
disconnector.
2 Position a receptacle under the filter.
Fuel filter Volvo TAD117xVE
3 Drain the water from the filter.

Use your hand to open the drain valve. Turn the valve
anticlockwise until the valve drops down and draining starts, drain
until clear fuel is visible. When closing the valve, turn clockwise
and only tighten the cock by hand.
CAUTION
When closing, do not turn too hard. Overtightening
may damage the threads.
WARNING
Fuel on hands.
Rash and irritation.
Fuel filter Cummins QSM11
Avoid skin contact with the fuel, use gloves.
4 Remove the collection container. Handle the fuel as

environmentally hazardous and fire hazardous waste.

Fuel system, bleeding (engine option Volvo

TAD117x)
The fuel system must be bled, e.g. after replacing the fuel filter, if the
fuel is run empty and after long periods of downtime.
1 Machine in service position, see 7.3 Service position, page 266.
2 Open the hand pump (position 1) by pushing it in and turning
anticlockwise.
3 Bleed the fuel system by pumping at least 250 strokes with the
hand pump.
Pump quickly to maintain the pressure in the pump.
NOTE
Bleeding is complete when a resistance is felt in the pump.
4 Close the hand pump by pushing it in and turning clockwise.

5 Start the engine and allow it to idle for approximately 5 minutes
before increasing the speed.
1. Hand pump

226 6 Inspection and maintenance – Windscreen washer
6.2.3 Windscreen washer

Windscreen washer, general
CAUTION
hydrocarbons.
The strength of the roof window may be affected!
Only use clean water with an antifreeze agent, e.g.
antifreeze fluid.
The washer fluid reservoir (position A) is located to the left of the cab's
front edge.
Low washer fluid level is indicated with the event menu, see Event
menu low washer fluid level, description, page 90.
A. Washer fluid reservoir
Instructions
1 Check the level in the reservoir. Top up with washer fluid as
required. For volume, see 9 Specifications, page 272.
2 Add anti-freeze. Select a suitable concentration (dilution
water/anti-freeze fluid) according to the prevailing outdoor
temperatures.

6 Inspection and maintenance – Wiper blades 227
6.2.4 Wiper blades

Wiper blades, general
Instructions
WARNING
Attempting to manually move the wiper armswill
damage the wiper motor's gear or shaft.
Damage to the wiper motor's gear or shafts.
Never try to manually move the wiper arms.
NOTE
Check the condition of the wiper blades; replace damaged wiper blades
in order to reduce the risk of damage to the windows.
Wiper blades, combined windscreen and roof wipers
Instructions
• Roof wiper: Carefully lift the wiper blade's locking arm and detach
the washer hose from the blade's nozzle. Replace the wiper blade,
lock in the wiper blade and refit the washer hose.
NOTE
If the wiper arm is lifted too much then it may be damaged and
wiper blade contact may be affected.
• Rear wiper: Lift the wiper arm, press in the wiper blade's locking
catch (position B) and replace the wiper blade. Check that the
wiper blade is locked in the correct position.
• Windscreen wipers: Undo the wiper blade's attaching bolt (position
C). Carefully lift the wiper arm to replace the wiper blade. Fit the
attaching bolt (position C).
NOTE
Wiper blades, separate windscreen and roof wipers
If the wiper arm is lifted too much then it may be damaged and
wiper blade contact may be affected.

228 6 Inspection and maintenance – Air filter, engine
6.2.5 Air filter, engine

Air filter engine, general
Instructions
NOTE
Poorly filtered induction air can very quickly result in serious engine
damage.
The filter is changed by the service technician during scheduled

inspection and service. When the machine is used in very dusty air, the
filter may be clogged after a relatively short time.
In the induction system, between the engine and air filter (A), there's an
indicator (B) which shows red when the air filter is clogged.
The air filter has a dust reservoir (position C) which is normally emptied
during operation by vibration in the induction system. It can also be
emptied manually by shaking it.
Instructions
• Check the indicator regularly and contact service as soon as the
indicator shows a red signal.
• The indicator can be reset to zero.
A. Position for air filter reservoir

B. Indicator for change
C. Dust reservoir

6 Inspection and maintenance – Cooling system 229
6.2.6 Cooling system

Cooling system, general
Coolant is filled in the system's expansion tank (position B). The coolant
level with a cold engine must be visible in the sight glass (position C)
on the expansion tank.
Low coolant level is indicated via the event menu, see Event menu low
coolant level engine, description, page 94.
NOTE
A low coolant level may cause engine damage or may cause the
engine to stop.
High coolant temperature is indicated via the event menu, see Event
menu engine coolant temperature, description, page 83.
Instructions
WARNING
The cooling system is pressurised when the coolant is
A. Position of the coolant container (expansion hot. Steam or hot coolant may spray out.
tank) Risk of scalding and burn injuries and incorrect
B. Filling point coolant level.
C. Sight glass Never open the filler cap when the coolant temperature
is higher than the ambient temperature. Always wait
until the coolant has fully cooled down before checking
the level. Incorrect coolant level may cause engine
damage.
WARNING
Glycol and anti-corrosion agents are hazardous to
health.
Health hazard!
Handle with care. Avoid skin contact. Wear protective
glasses and protective gloves. In the event of skin
contact, wash the skin.
CAUTION
Use approved coolant.
Risk of engine damage and invalidated warranty if
unapproved coolant is used.
Only use coolant approved by the engine supplier
when changing and topping up the coolant.
• Allow the coolant to cool to the ambient temperature, use the

operating menus to check the coolant level.
• Check the coolant level in the expansion tank. Fill with coolant
approved by the engine supplier as required. For volume, see 9
Specifications, page 272.

230 6 Inspection and maintenance – Engine oil
6.2.7 Engine oil

Engine oil, general
Instructions
WARNING
protective gloves.
The engine's oil filler pipe (position B) and oil dipstick (position C) are
located under the service cover in front of the cab on the machine's
left-hand side.
Instructions
• Check on the dipstick (position C). Check the oil level when the
engine is warm. The dipstick has a marked area where the oil level
should be. Optimum oil level is in the centre of the area.
NOTE
The oil dipstick is long on certain machines. Wear gloves.
A. Position for filling point • Top up as required with new engine oil (position B). For volume
and quality, see 9 Specifications, page 272.
B. Oil filler pipe
Top up – wait awhile – check.
C. Oil dipstick
NOTE
Work carefully when filling engine oil to prevent other fluids or
particles from contaminating the oil. Other fluids or particles in the
engine oil means a risk of engine damage.

6 Inspection and maintenance – Transmission oil 231
6.2.8 Transmission oil

Transmission oil, general
Instructions
WARNING
protective gloves.
The transmission's oil filler pipe and oil dipstick (position B) are located
under the service cover in front of the cab.
Instructions
• Check the oil level.
Check the oil level with the engine idling and the transmission in
neutral position and at operating temperature (approx. 85 °C in
the display).
The dipstick has three markings. The lowest is marked "COLD"
and is a rough estimate of the level for cold transmission. The top
two are marked "HOT" and are the markings for the maximum,
"MAX", and minimum, "MIN", oil levels at operating temperature.
The oil level must be between "MIN" and "MAX" with a hot
transmission when idling in neutral.
A. Position for filling point and level checking
• Wipe off the oil dipstick before checking.
B. Filling point
C. Oil dipstick NOTE
The oil dipstick is long. Wear gloves.
• Top up as required with new transmission oil (position B). For

volume and quality, see 9 Specifications, page 272).
It is recommended to fill the oil when the transmission is at
operating temperature. Top up – wait awhile – check on the
dipstick.
NOTE
Work carefully when filling transmission oil to prevent other fluids or
transmission oil means a risk of transmission damage.

232 6 Inspection and maintenance – Oil, brake system
6.2.9 Oil, brake system

Oil, brake system, general
Instructions
WARNING
protective gloves.
The tank for the brake system is located on the machine's left side.
Instructions
• Check the oil level (position E).
The level should be in the middle of the sight glass.
• Top up as required with new oil (position C). For volume and
quality, see 9 Specifications, page 272).
• Check that the oil cooler (position B) is not clogged. Clean as
needed.
NOTE
Work carefully when filling brake oil to prevent other fluids or
A. Oil tank for brake system brake oil means a risk of damage to the brake system.
B. Oil cooler
C. Filling point
D. Breather filter
E. Sight glass oil tank

6 Inspection and maintenance – Hydraulic system 233
6.2.10 Hydraulic system

Hydraulic system, general
Instructions
WARNING
protective gloves.
The hydraulic oil tank is located on the machine's right-hand side.

Instructions
• Check the oil level (position E). All hydraulic pistons should be in
retracted position (pushed in).
The level should be at the top of the sight glass.
• Top up as required with new oil (position F). For volume and quality,
016244
see 9 Specifications, page 272.
A. Position for oil cooler • Check that the oil cooler isn't clogged.
B. Position for hydraulic tank Clean as needed.
C. Cleaning filter hydraulic oil

NOTE
D. Filling point, hydraulic oil tank (reserve)
Work carefully when filling engine oil to prevent other fluids or
E. Sight glass, hydraulic oil tank particles from contaminating the oil. Other fluids or particles in the
F. Breather filter engine oil involve a risk of damage to the brake system or working
hydraulics.
G. Filling point, hydraulic oil tank

234 6 Inspection and maintenance – Hydraulic system
Emergency lowering of boom
DANGER
Manual operation entails risks!
Risk of crushing! Risk of roll-over! Extreme danger!
Avoid manual lowering. If manual lowering cannot be
avoided, work very carefully.
As long as there is servo pressure in the hydraulic system, as well as

battery voltage, the boom can be lowered using the control lever in the
cab. In the event that hydraulic functions stop working, emergency
lowering can take place with manual control of the valves.
NOTE
Operate the boom with continuous control of the valves during the
whole boom movement (to use the remaining servo pressure). In
the event of repeated valve operation, the servo pressure is lost
and no functions can be performed.
Instructions
1. Two persons, one on the right and one on the left side of the
machine, position themselves to control the solenoid valve for each
respective lift cylinder (position A).
2. Turn the control knob anticlockwise to open the valve (area C).
A. Knob for operating the solenoid valve lift This releases the pressure in the lift cylinders.
cylinder
B. Valve closed NOTE
C. Valve opens proportionately with knob position Do this to both lift cylinders simultaneously.
D. Valve open (spring-loaded)
3. The boom is lowered slowly.
E. Area where the valve is closed
When the control knob is released the knob returns to closed,
F. Valve fully open (stops in this position) position B.
4. When lowering is complete, check that both knobs are in position B.

6 Inspection and maintenance – Tyres and rims 235
6.2.11 Tyres and rims

Tyres and rims, general
DANGER
Changing tyres is high-risk work.
Extreme danger!
Let service personnel change tyres, they have the
competence and authority to handle tyres!
DANGER
Penetrating objects such as crushed glass, pieces of
wood, metal shavings, etc. and mechanical defects,
such as uneven brake wear, can cause tyre damage.
Risk of tyre explosion! Extreme danger!
Check the tyres at regular intervals for external
damage and tyre pressure.
WARNING
Check-tighten the wheel nuts on a new wheel after 4-5
operating hours.
damage!
Tighten bolted joints crosswise. Contact a service
technician as required.
CAUTION
Spare and replacement tyres must be of brand names
approved by Cargotec.
Risk of overloaded tyres!
Use tyres approved by Cargotec.
IMPORTANT
Wheels, tyres and rims are dimensioned and selected
for each machine type so that maximum wheel loads
and travel speeds are not exceeded. For this reason it
is not permitted to change tyre dimension, tyre make,
tyre type, rim type, or rim make without approval from
Cargotec.

236 6 Inspection and maintenance – Tyres and rims
Changing wheel:
Changing wheels, see Maintenance manual.
DANGER
When changing tyres, deflate first.
Deflate tyres by loosening and removing the valve.
DANGER
Rim damage makes wheel handling extremely
dangerous!
Let service personnel change tyres, they have the
competence and authority to handle tyres!
CAUTION
Remove the sensors for tyre pressure monitoring
before the wheels are removed.
The sensors for tyre pressure monitoring are fitted on
the valves and may be damaged when the tyres are
handled.

6 Inspection and maintenance – Tyres and rims 237
Inflating tyres
Care of compressor for inflating tyres:
• An air filter with water separator should be installed in the line from
the compressor used for inflating tyres. The water filter minimises
the risk of corrosion on wheel rims.
• Drain the water separator regularly.
DANGER
Never stand in front of a tyre when inflating! Do
not exceed prescribed air pressure, which must be
checked at ambient temperature. When changing
tyre or rim version, another tyre pressure may apply,
contact Cargotec. The plate for tyre air pressure
must be replaced with a plate with the applicable tyre
pressure!
000384
Extreme danger!
Always follow instructions for inflating tyres to avoid
serious accidents.
Instructions
Instructions
1. Before inflating, make sure that the rim's lock ring is in the correct
position.
NOTE
If the tyre has been completely deflated, the rim must be dismantled
and checked for damage. Let service personnel change tyres, they
have the competence and authority to handle tyres!
2. On machines with tyre pressure monitoring.

1. Lock ring
Only remove one sensor at a time in order to avoid mixing them
2. Rim edge up. Sensor locations are programmed into the monitoring system;
contact a service technician for reprogramming.
3. Tapered rim
3. Connect the compressor with a locking air-chuck to the nipple on
the tyre.
4. Stand at an angle behind the tyre and remain there until inflating
has been completed. This is to avoid being hit by rim parts in the
event of an explosion.
5. Inflate the tyre to the prescribed pressure, see chapter 9
Specifications. When changing tyre or rim version, another tyre
pressure may apply, contact Cargotec.
6. On machines with tyre pressure monitoring.
Refit the sensor for tyre pressure monitoring.

238 6 Inspection and maintenance – Checking accumulators
6.2.12 Checking accumulators

Accumulators, general
Instructions
The function of the accumulators (position A) is to maintain even brake

pressure and also to maintain brake pressure, and thus braking action,
a short time after eventual loss of hydraulic pressure.
The accumulators are precharged with nitrogen gas.

Instructions
Check for leakage according to the following points if the warning lamp
for low brake pressure (position 33) lights up:
1. Start the engine and let it run until the accumulators are filled.
Warning lamp for low brake pressure (position 33) goes off.
2. Stop the engine and then turn the start key to position I.
3. Press down the brake pedal with long pumping brake strokes, with
a slight delay between each braking action.
4. It should be possible to brake at least eight times before the light
for low brake pressure lights up.
A. Accumulators for brake system 5. Start the engine, let the accumulators charge and repeat the test
a couple of times.
If it is not possible to brake eight times before the warning lamp for
low brake pressure lights up, there is a defect in the accumulators.
Contact service immediately for troubleshooting and action.
WARNING
The machine's hydraulic system includes accumulators
with high pressure.
Always exercise extreme caution when working
with the hydraulic system and avoid unnecessarily
remaining close to hydraulic components or hoses.
The accumulators must be drained prior to work in the
hydraulic system (see Maintenance manual).

6 Inspection and maintenance – Central lubrication 239
6.2.13 Central lubrication

Central lubrication, general
Central lubrication (which replaces most of the manual lubrication)

consists of two pump units, one on the frame and one on the attachment
that lubricates selected lubrication points. The lubricant quantity can be
adjusted according to requirements, contact Cargotec Service.
NOTE
Cleanliness when performing work on the central lubrication system
is extremely important. Dirt and debris can cause disturbances
in the system. Naphtha or light petroleum can be used to clean
the system. Do not use e.g. Tri or other organic solvents such as
alcohol, methanol, acetone or the like.
Instructions
• Maintenance for central lubrication is the filling of lubricant and
A. Safety valve checking that all connected lubrication points receive sufficient
lubricant.
B. Filler nipple
• Fill the reservoir up to the "Max" mark through the filler nipple
(position B).
Lubricating grease must be clean from contaminants and must not
change consistency as it ages.
• If the reservoir has become completely empty and is then filled, the
pump may need to be operated for longer in order to provide all the
lubrication points with a sufficient amount of lubricant.
Operate the pump manually with the menu for machine check, see
Menu for machine check, description, page 210.

240 6 Inspection and maintenance – Battery and battery disconnector
6.2.14 Battery and battery disconnector

Battery and battery disconnector, general
WARNING
Short-circuiting of battery.
Risk of explosion! Fire hazard! Risk of personal injury!
The battery's terminals must not be connected to each
other or to common grounding point (frame).
CAUTION
Always turn off the system voltage at the end of your
shift, when working on the electrical system and when
welding on the machine.
Danger!
Turn off the system voltage with the battery
disconnector. After the engine is turned off, wait a
while before switching off the system voltage. The
A. Battery disconnector diesel engine's control system performs actions,
depending on the model, up to two minutes after the
B. Battery cover
engine is turned off.
The electrical system works with a system voltage of 24 Volt (DC). The
power source consists of two series-connected 12 Volt (DC) batteries
which are charged by an AC alternator with rectifier. The negative
terminal is connected to the body.
The plus terminal is connected to a battery disconnector (position A).
The batteries are located inside of a cover (position B) behind the steps
on the machine's left-hand side.

6 Inspection and maintenance – Battery and battery disconnector 241
Starting with booster battery
WARNING
Handle batteries and connectors with great care during
charging and boosting (jump starting). Do not mix
up the battery terminals! Follow the instructions for
starting with a booster battery!
Danger of short circuit! Warning - risk of hydrogen gas
forming! Danger of sparks and fire! Hydrogen gas is
very explosive!
Batteries must always be equipped with covers over
terminals and connections. Connect positive terminals
first. Then connect the negative terminals in order to
avoid sparks that could ignite the hydrogen gas.
1 Switch off the system voltage with the battery disconnector

(position A).
2 Open the battery cover on the machine's left-hand side.
3 Check that the engine on the machine with booster batteries is
switched off.
4 Check that the booster batteries are connected in series so that
they supply 24 VDC. Do not disconnect the normal cables to the
machine's batteries.
5 Connect in the following order:
a. The red booster cable (+) to the discharged batteries' positive
terminal.
b. The red booster cable (+) to the booster batteries' positive
terminal.
c. The black booster cable (-) to the booster batteries' negative
terminal.
d. The black booster cable (-) to a point some distance from the
discharged batteries, e.g. by the negative cable's connection to
the frame or directly to the engine block.
6 Start the machine containing the booster batteries.
7 Make the system voltage with the battery disconnector.
8 Try to start the engine and then run the engine at increased idling
speed for approx. 10 minutes to charge the batteries.
Do not move the connections during the start attempt - risk of
sparks. Do not lean over any of the batteries.
9 Disconnect the cables in the reverse order as to when connecting
them. One cable at a time! Batteries must always be equipped
with covers over terminals and connections.
As an option, the machine can be equipped with a booster battery start

(auxiliary start) connection of the NATO type.
1 Connect the jumper cable to donor vehicle's booster battery start
(auxiliary start) connection. The auxiliary vehicle's engine must
be switched off.
2 Connect the other end of the jumper cable to the machine's
booster battery start (auxiliary start) connection.
3 Check that the machine's battery disconnector is in the ON
position.
4 Start the auxiliary vehicle and run the engine at high idle for
approx. 5 minutes.
5 Try to start the machine. If the machine does not start, contact
service.

242 6 Inspection and maintenance – Fuses for electrical system
6 When the machine has started, let the auxiliary vehicle idle.
7 Remove the jumper cable from the machine's booster battery start
(auxiliary start) connection and then from the auxiliary vehicle's
booster battery start (auxiliary start) connection.
6.2.15 Fuses for electrical system

Fuses for electrical system, general
The machine's electrical system is fuse-protected in three levels:
• Main fuses
• Distribution fuses
• Fuses
The machine's electrical system is also divided into two electrical

power circuits:
• Battery voltage, i.e. the voltage output in the machine when the
battery disconnector is in position I.
• Ignition voltage, i.e. the voltage output in the machine when the
ignition key lock is in position I provided the battery disconnector
is in position I.
CAUTION
Never use fuses with too high ampere rating.
Risk of cable damage or cable fire!
Follow instructions on the fuse plate for fuse type and
ampere rating.
Fuses on frame
A. Fuses in electronic box cab, F9968
B. Distribution fuses, F9952-2,
C. Distribution fuses, F9954-1
D. Fuses in the battery box, F9952-1
E. Fuses in electronic box frame, F9958

6 Inspection and maintenance – Fuses for electrical system 243
Main fuses
Main fuses
The machine's main fuses are located inside the battery cover for the
batteries on the left-hand side of the machine.
Table Main fuses F9952-1
Fuse number / Size Functions

1 / 100 A Fuses everything that is disconnected
with the main switch.
2 / 50 A Fuses everything that is not
disconnected with the main switch.
Instructions
1. Turn off the system voltage with the battery disconnector.
The engine must be switched off.
See Battery and battery disconnector, general, page 240.
2. Open the battery cover.
3. Check and change main fuses when necessary.
Main fuse in the battery compartment on the frame

Distribution fuses
Distribution fuses
The machine's distribution fuses are located in the electronic box on
the left-hand side of the machine, rear boom mounting and at the front
of the boom.
Table Distribution fuses, ignition voltage F9954-1
Fuse number /
Size Functions
1 / 50 A Frame, Fuse holder (F9958-BK)
2 / 50 A Cab, Fuse holder (F9968-BK and GN),
Control unit KCU (D7901)
3 / 50 A Control unit KFU (D7971) and Control unit
KFU-2 (D7972)
4 / 50 A Control unit KAU (D7911) and Control unit
KAU-2 (D7912)
Table Distribution fuses, battery voltage F9952-2
Fuse number /
Size Functions
1 / 50 A Frame, Fuse holder (F9958-RD)
2 / 50 A Cab, Fuse holder (F9968-RD)
Distribution fuses in electronic box frame
Table Connection block voltage feed attachment X401 and X500
Fuse number /
Size Functions
1 / 50 A Voltage feed attachment
Red or white cable = +24 V from
F9954-1:4b.
2 / 50 A Voltage feed attachment
Black or brown cable = chassis connection.
Instructions
2. Remove the cover from the electronic box on the frame.
3. Remove the plastic cover.
4. Check and change main fuses when necessary.
The fuse plate gives information about each fuse.

6 Inspection and maintenance – Fuses for electrical system 245
Fuses
Fuses
The machine's fuses are located in the electronic box in the cab (F9968)
and in the electronic box on the left-hand side of the machine (F9958).
Table Fuses battery voltage frame F9958-RD
Fuse number / Functions

Size
RD1 / 15A Control unit engine (D7940), Volvo 15 A /
Cummins 15 A
RD2 / 30/10 A Power supply after-treatment system Volvo
TAD117xVE 30 A
Control unit engine (D7940) Cummins 10 A
RD3 / - -
RD4 / - -
RD5 / - -
RD6 / 5 A Control unit, transmission (D7930)

RD7 / 5 A Tyre pressure monitoring
RD8 / 30 A -
Table Fuses ignition voltage frame F9958-BK

Size
BK1 / - -
BK2 / - -
BK3 / 5 A Start interlock

BK4 / - Cooling fan intercooler Volvo
BK5 / - Cooling fan intercooler Volvo
BK6 / 5 A Control unit, transmission (D7930)
BK7 / - -
Fuses in electronic box frame, F9958
BK8 / 5/15 A Horn 5A, loud horn 15 A
Table Fuses options frame F9958-GN

Size
GN1 / - -
GN2 / - -
GN3 / - -
GN4 / - -
GN5 / 10 A Constant-loading functions, timer diesel

heater
GN6 / 20 A Eberspächer (diesel heater)
GN7 / 5 A Electric main switch
GN8 / - -

Fuses battery voltage cab F9968 RD
Table Fuses battery voltage cab F9968 RD

Size
RD1 / 5 A Start up, alcolock, start interlock
RD2 / 15 A Control unit KCU (D7901)
RD3 / - -
RD4 / 5 A Radio
RD5 / 10 A Service, RMI
RD6 / 10 A Customer-specific equipment
RD7 / - -
RD8 / 10 A -
Table Fuses ignition voltage cab F9968 BK

Size
BK1 / 10 A Control unit KPU (D7902), Control unit KID
(D7950), travel direction selector control
lever, inhibitor alcolock, TelliQ (Smartfleet)
BK2 / 10 A Service, RMI , distance warning system

back-up camera
BK3 / 10 A Monitor, back-up camera
BK4 / 5 A Radio
BK5 / 25 A Seat heating, seat belt, ventilation control
driver's seat
BK6 / 10 A 24 V socket cab, electrically operated
mirrors , customer-specific equipment
BK7 / 15 A Work lights
Fuses in electronic box cab, F9968 BK8 / 10 A Searchlight
Table Fuses options cab F9968 GN

Size
GN1 / 25 A Heated rear window
GN2 / 10 A Double windscreen wipers front
GN3 / 10 A Voltage converter 12/24 VDC
GN4 / - -
GN5 / - -
GN6 / - -
GN7 / 20 A Inverter 230 V

GN8 / 10 A Compressor, air suspension driver's seat
, ventilation feed driver's seat

6 Inspection and maintenance – Lighting 247
Instructions
2. Remove the cover on the electronic box on the frame or in the cab.
3. Remove the plastic cover.
4. Check and change fuses when necessary.
The fuse plate gives information about each fuse.
6.2.16 Lighting
Lighting, general
It is important to use the right type of bulb for each respective lighting
point, see 9 Specifications, page 272.
Light bulbs can be changed for the following:

• Interior lighting
• Headlight with bulb (for high/low beam)
Headlights, work lights, direction indicators front, position lights,

combination lamp cluster rear (rear light, brake light & direction
indicator) are complete fittings and are replaced complete.
On machines with headlights with high and low beam, the bulb
can be replaced.
Lamp housing, front and rear

A. Position light
B. Direction indicator, front
C. Headlights
D. Back-up light
E. Brake and tail light
F. Direction indicator, rear

248 6 Inspection and maintenance – Service
6.3 Service
General
It's very important that inspections and service are performed at the
recommended intervals.
Service is performed by Cargotec, or by service technicians authorised

by Cargotec.
CAUTION
Service interval must be followed.
This is to maintain the machine's safety as well as to
meet warranty and service agreements!
Use spare parts and fluids approved by Cargotec in
order to fulfil warranty terms.
Service intervals and actions are described in the maintenance manual.
CAUTION
Undo the connectors from the control units.
Risk of damage to the control units!
When welding on the machine, all control units shall
be disconnected to prevent damage.

6 Inspection and maintenance – Service 249
WARNING
For safety reasons, the following spare parts may only
be replaced with genuine spare parts:
• Brake valve
• Drive axle
• Valve for mini-wheel/joystick steering
• Steering valve (Orbitrol)
• Control valve steering incl. priority valve
• Steering axle
• Steering cylinder
• Steering spindle
• Hub
• Rim
• Lift boom
• Boom nose extension
• Lift cylinder
• Valve block lift cylinder
• Extension cylinder
• Valve block extension cylinder
• Rotation motor unit
• Tilt cylinder
• Twistlock, lift shoe
• Attachment assembly
• Lifting ears
• Control breaker (for hydraulic function)
• Emergency switch
• Cab
• Frame
• Accumulator
• Accumulator charging valve
• All control units

250 7 Transporting the machine
7 Transporting the machine

Safety
DANGER
The machine must be firmly secured for transport! The
machine is heavy and can cause extensive damage in
the event of a fall and similar.
damage!
Follow the instructions in order to secure the machine
during transport.
WARNING
Cab doors must always be closed when operating.
Risk of personal injury and crushing in case of
roll-over and tipping!
Always close the doors during the work shift.
WARNING
The cab is equipped with longitudinal sliding, manual
or hydraulic ( ). The cab must ALWAYS be secured
and locked during transport.
Risk that unsecured cab moves, which results in great
danger!
For manual sliding cab, always make sure that the cab
locks on both sides are locked in their rear position
before transport, and that the locks are secured with
the lock pins,
For hydraulic longitudinal displacement, the cab may
be positioned as desired (locking is automatic) when
stationary.

7 Transporting the machine – Towing 251
7.1 Towing
General
DANGER
The machine cannot be operated or braked if the
hydraulic pressure is lost, e.g., if the engine is off.
Rolling machine! Extreme danger!
If possible, tow with maintained hydraulic pressure.
If it's not possible to have the engine running when
towing, a tow bar must be used! Only tow for short
distances!
CAUTION
Do not try to start the machine by towing.
Causes serious damage to engine and power
transmission!
Start the engine according to instructions in the
operator's manual.
Before taking actions and after finished towing, the parking brake
must be applied and the wheels blocked to prevent the machine from
starting to roll.
Extreme care must be observed during towing work to avoid personal

injuries.
When towing, keep in mind:

• The towing vehicle should be heavier than the vehicle in tow.
• If possible when towing, the engine should be running in order for
brakes and steering to function.
When the engine is switched off, there is no hydraulic pressure for
the steering function and thus the machine's steering function is
severely limited. In addition, transmission lubrication is insufficient.
• The brakes function as long as there is pressure in the
accumulator/accumulators, then the service brake stops
functioning and the parking brake is applied automatically. If it is
necessary to move/tow the machine after that, the parking brake
must be released mechanically, see section 7.1.1 Mechanical
release of parking brake.
• If it is necessary to tow the machine, the propeller shaft must be
released from both transmission and drive axle.
• Only tow for very short distances.

252 7 Transporting the machine – Mechanical release of parking brake
7.1.1 Mechanical release of parking brake

Description
The parking brake is applied automatically by a forceful spring in the
brake cylinder if the pressure in the hydraulic accumulator should drop
below a certain level.
If the machine has to be moved (towed) without sufficient pressure

in the hydraulic accumulator, the parking brake must be released
mechanically (manually).
DANGER
Before starting to work with the parking brake, make
sure that the machine cannot move when the braking
action is released.
Rolling machine! Extreme danger!
Block the wheels to avoid unwanted rolling of the
machine.
CAUTION
The parking brake has high spring force. If the brakes
are opened incorrectly, parts may detach and fly off
with great force.
Follow the instructions.
The parking brake is a disc brake with two brake calipers on the drive
axle's input shaft.
1 Remove the protective cover from the brake caliper (position A).
2 Grip the adjusting screw (position C) and loosen the lock nut
(position B).
3 Note the position of the adjusting screw (position C), for example,
by counting rotations when it is turned.
4 Turn the adjusting screw (position C) until the brake pads release
from the brake disc.
NOTE
If the parking brake has been released mechanically, the parking
brake must always be restored in order to give the machine
5 Restore the parking brake function by turning the adjusting screw

to the same position as in step 3.
Send the machine for service as soon as possible for checking and
adjustment of the parking brake.
6 Refit protective cover on the caliper.
A. Protective cover
B. Lock nut
C. Adjusting screw

7 Transporting the machine – Lifting and transporting the machine 253
7.2 Lifting and transporting the

machine
General
When lifting and transporting the machine, follow the governing safety
regulations.
DANGER
High demands are made of the lifting and transport
equipment, e.g. lifting chains, hooks, etc.
Extreme danger!
Check the equipment and its capacity, lifting slings on
the machine as well as lashing points on the transport
vehicle and machine.
DANGER
Overload of load equipment.
Extreme danger!
Lifting equipment must be dimensioned for the load.
Never walk under hanging loads.
The following action must be taken when the machine is to be

transported:
• Apply parking brake.
• Turn off the system voltage with the battery disconnector.
• Remove any fragile equipment, e.g. rear view mirrors.
Transport of machine on public roads takes place in accordance with

the following:
1 Lift the attachment: see Removing the top lift attachment, page
254.
Lift the boom: see Removing the boom, page 256.
NOTE
Only needed if transport takes place on public roads.
2 Secure the machine for transport on, e.g. a trailer. Note the
machine's weight, see machine plate.
Position the machine, boom and attachment on the transport. See
Lashing down for transport, page 259.
3 Unload the machine from the transport. See Unloading the
machine, page 262.
4 Fit the boom: see Installing the boom, page 263.
Fit the attachment: see Installing the top lift attachment, page 264.

254 7 Transporting the machine – Lifting machine
7.2.1 Lifting machine

Instructions
The machine shall be lifted as follows:
1 Lay two lifting slings in both front lifting eyes on the frame.
2 Lay two lifting slings in both rear lifting eyes on the frame (at the
boom mounting).
3 The lifting device must be adapted so that the lifting point runs
through the machine's centre of gravity.
7.2.2 Transporting the machine

Removing the top lift attachment
WARNING
Pressurised oil system.
Always depressurise the hydraulic system before
starting to work in the hydraulic system.
1 Park the machine with the boom fully retracted in its lowest position
and the attachment in right-hand position.
2 Switch off the engine and open the relief valve for the attachment.
Relief valve attachment opens a connection between the
attachment's pressure feed and tank. This is used to drain the
pressure in the hoses for the attachment before working on the
hydraulic system. The relief valve is located at the trailing edge
of the lift beam in front of the transmission.
3 Turn the start key to position I and activate the hydraulic functions
to depressurise the hydraulic system.
4 Turn the start key to position 0 and switch off the system voltage
with the battery disconnector.
5 Place a collection container under the valve block on the boom
nose to collect any oil spills.
A. Relief valve for attachment

7 Transporting the machine – Transporting the machine 255
6 Mark up and disconnect the attachment's hydraulic connections

from the damping block.
NOTE
Plug all connections immediately to protect the hydraulic system
from contaminants.
7 Release the cable harness for the attachment from the cable
harness on the boom.
Remove the cable harness' clamping from the boom.
NOTE
Plug all connectors with each other. Connectors that cannot be
plugged with other connectors are plugged with sealed dummy
connectors
8 Disconnect the tilt cylinders from the attachment.

Remove the tilt cylinders' shafts and turn aside the tilt cylinders.
If necessary, use a puller to press out the shaft. Refit the shafts
in the tilt cylinder.
9 Remove the collection container, handle the waste oil as
environmentally hazardous waste.
10 Connect lifting equipment securely to the attachment's lifting eyes
11 Adjust the lifting equipment so that the shafts on the rotation bar
are unloaded.
12 Remove the rotation bar's shafts.
Remove the lock bolts and pull out the shaft. If necessary, use two
bolts in the threaded holes to pull out the shaft.
13 Lift aside the attachment. Position it on wooden blocks or similar
so that the twistlocks are not damaged.
14 Refit the rotation bar's shafts in the rotation bar.

256 7 Transporting the machine – Transporting the machine
Removing the boom
11 1 2 10
12
003690
9 8 7 8 6 5 4 3
1. Outer boom 7. Lift cylinder

2. Inner boom 8. Mounting lift cylinder
3. Tilt cylinder right-hand side 9. Rear boom mounting
4. Mounting attachment 10. Front lifting eyes
5. Tilt cylinder left-hand side 11. Rear lifting eyes
6. Extension cylinder 12. Valve block boom nose
DANGER
A lift cylinder weighs approx. 2 tonnes.
Extreme danger!
Use wooden blocks as protection between cab and
lift cylinder when the lift cylinder is lowered or lifted.
Secure the lift cylinders with tensioning straps in
between them.
WARNING
The boom may move when the shafts are removed.
Make sure that the shafts are unloaded. Stand to
the side of the boom attachment so that it provides
protection in the event of any movement.

CAUTION
The boom may drop.
Be certain to compensate for the lift cylinder's support
of the boom by lifting the boom's leading edge with
the lifting equipment.
CAUTION
Short circuit.
Product damage, moisture and dirt.
Use contacts with blind plugs at both ends to insulate
and protect all connectors that are unplugged.
The instruction requires that the top lift attachment has been removed,
see Removing the top lift attachment, page 254.
1 Place a collection container under the hydraulic oil connections at
the boom's rear mounting to collect any spills.
2 Clean, mark up, disconnect and plug the hydraulic hoses at the
boom's rear mounting. Detach the hoses from the hose bracket.
Right-hand side, hydraulic hoses for boom.
Left-hand side, hydraulic hoses for attachment.
NOTE
Plug all connections immediately to protect the hydraulic system
from contaminants.
3 Remove the collection container, treat spills as environmentally

hazardous waste.
4 Mark up and disconnect the cable harness from the boom at the
rear mounting.
NOTE
Plug all contacts to protect them from dirt and moisture.
5 Slide the cab completely forward.

6 Secure the setting of the boom angle sensor, allow the sensor to
remain on the boom but affix the sensor's arm with a cable tie.
7 Connect lifting equipment securely at the front of the boom. Lift the
front of the boom so that the lift cylinders are unloaded.
8 Connect lifting equipment to the lift cylinder.
9 Disconnect the lift cylinders from the boom.
Remove the lock bolt and the shaft. If necessary, use pullers to
pull out the shaft.
CAUTION
Angle sensor
The bearings are lubricant-free and must not be
lubricated.
Product damage.
The slide surface of the bearings is specially treated
and must not be lubricated. When fitting the shafts,
exercise additional caution and ensure that the
lubricant does not come into contact with the slide
surface of the bearings. After assembly, apply
anti-corrosion protection to the bearings externally
with a thin layer of Teflon spray.
10 Carefully lower each lift cylinder so that it rests against the edge
on the lower mounting.
Use wooden blocks as protection between cab and lift cylinder
when the lift cylinder is lowered or lifted. Secure the lift cylinders
with tensioning straps in between them.
11 Refit the shaft in the boom's bearing.
12 Connect the lifting equipment securely in the lifting eyes in the
boom's trailing edge. Lift slightly to unload the boom's rear
bearings.
13 Remove the shafts for the boom mounting.
14 Lift away the boom, lower the front part and place it on a secure
surface, e.g. wooden blocks.
15 Depressurise the tilt cylinders.
Loosen the hydraulic hoses' connections at the valve block on
the boom nose.
Place a collection container under the valve block to collect any
oil spills.
NOTE
The tilt cylinders must be drained to allow the rear part of the
boom to be laid down.
16 Lower the rear part of the boom and place it on a secure surface,
e.g. wooden blocks.
17 Tighten the tilt cylinders' hydraulic hoses at the valve block on
the boom nose.
18 Remove the collection containers, handle the waste oil as
Valve block boom nose

Lashing down for transport

The instruction requires that the top lift attachment and boom have
been removed, see Removing the top lift attachment, page 254 and
Removing the boom, page 256.
When transporting the machine, boom and attachment must be

transported separately. The machine must be transported on a trailer
that is wide enough to support the drive axle's inner wheel.
1 Reverse the machine up on the trailer.
2 Apply parking brake.
3 Turn off the system voltage with the battery disconnector.
4 Machine with vertically adjustable cab:
On machines with vertically adjustable cab, lower the cab frame,
see Lowering the frame for vertically adjustable cab, page 261.
5 Secure the front part of the machine adequately in the front of the
frame and in the intended attachment points on the trailer.
Cross the chains when securing for optimal stability.
Lashing down machine, front
6 Secure the rear part of the machine adequately in the rear of the
frame and in the intended attachment points on the trailer.
7 Fold in the rear view mirrors and remove protruding parts, such as
the rotating beacon, in order to prevent damage during transport.
Lashing down machine, rear

8 Place the boom's rear part on anchored pallets or similar.

Secure the boom's rear part adequately in the boom's lifting eyes
and in the intended attachment points on the trailer.
Lashing down boom, rear
9 Secure the boom's front part adequately in the boom's lifting eyes
and in the intended attachment points on the trailer.

10 Place the attachment on wooden blocks or similar to protect the

twistlocks.
Secure both sides of the attachment adequately in the attachment
lifting eyes and in the intended attachment points on the trailer.
Lashing down of attachment
Lowering the frame for vertically adjustable cab
1 Empty the cab of all loose objects and pack them away safely.
2 Remove the ladder from the cab frame and refit the brackets on
the frame.
3 Connect lifting equipment to the top of the cab frame. Adjust the
lifting equipment so that the cab frame is secured from tipping
over backwards.
4 Remove the diagonal stay behind the cab frame.
Connect lifting equipment to the diagonal stay and lift so that the
shafts are unloaded. Remove the shafts and lift the stay aside.
CAUTION
The cab frame may tip over.
Risk of personal injury and product damage.
Allow the lifting equipment on the cab frame to be
connected until the rear mounting is fully secured.
Exercise caution and adapt the lifting equipment on
the cab frame so that the cab frame does not start
unwanted movement.
5 Refit the upper shafts to the diagonal stay in the cab frame.
Diagonal stay, cab frame
6 Carefully tilt the cab frame backward until the bracket on the
left-hand side of the cab frame is in the centre of the rear bracket
for the diagonal stay. Install the rear mounting's shaft in order to
secure the parts.
Rear bracket, diagonal stay.

Unloading the machine

1 Machine with vertically adjustable cab:
Reset the cab frame, see Resetting the frame for vertically
adjustable cab, page 262.
2 Remove the load safety catch from the machine.
3 Extend and adjust the rear view mirrors, and reset protruding parts,
such as the revolving beacon, that were removed during transport.
Resetting the frame for vertically adjustable cab
1 Connect lifting equipment to the top of the cab frame.

2 Remove the shaft at the rear mounting of the cab frame.
Raise the lifting equipment so that the shaft at the rear mounting
of the cab frame is unloaded.
3 Carefully move the cab frame up to vertical position.
CAUTION
The cab frame may tip over.
Risk of personal injury and product damage.
Allow the lifting equipment on the cab frame to be
Rear bracket, diagonal stay. connected until the rear mounting is fully secured.
Exercise caution and adapt the lifting equipment on
the cab frame so that the cab frame does not start
unwanted movement.
4 Install the diagonal stay behind the cab frame.

Connect the lifting equipment to the stay and lift it into place so that
the shafts can be fitted.
5 Install the ladder on the cab frame.
6 Replace the equipment that has been emptied out from the cab.
Diagonal stay, cab frame

Installing the boom
WARNING
Pressurised oil system.
Always depressurise the hydraulic system before
starting to work in the hydraulic system.
The instruction requires that top lift attachment and boom are not
assembled, i.e. are separate.
1 Place the cab in the front position.
2 Switch off the engine and open the relief valve for the attachment.
3 Turn the start key to position I and activate the hydraulic functions
to depressurise the hydraulic system.
4 Turn the start key to position 0 and switch off the system voltage
with the battery disconnector.
5 Connect lifting equipment at the leading edge and trailing edge of
the boom.
6 Lift the boom into place over the machine.
7 Adjust the boom's position so that the holes for the boom's
bearings in the boom and frame are lined up.
NOTE
If sensor boom angle is still on the boom, fit the sensor's arm in
the lock screw without turning the sensor's arm.
8 Fit the rear shafts for the boom's bearing.

9 Disconnect the lifting equipment from the boom's trailing edge.
10 Lower the boom's leading edge so that it is horizontal.
11 Connect lifting equipment to one of the lift cylinders.
12 Align the lift cylinder's upper mounting in the boom.
The figure shows the valve open
Lift the lift cylinder into place, if necessary adjust the angle of the
boom.
CAUTION
The bearings are lubricant-free and must not be
lubricated.
Product damage.
The slide surface of the bearings is specially treated
and must not be lubricated. When fitting the shafts,
exercise additional caution and ensure that the
lubricant does not come into contact with the slide
surface of the bearings. After assembly, apply
anti-corrosion protection to the bearings externally
with a thin layer of Teflon spray.
13 Fit the lift cylinder's shaft.

14 Lower the boom and disconnect the lifting equipment from the
boom.
15 Place a collection container under the hydraulic oil connections at
the boom's rear mounting to collect any spills.

16 Connect the boom's hydraulic hoses to the machine.
NOTE
Replace the O-rings. Check that the O-rings are in the correct
position.
17 Connect the cable harness to the boom.

18 If the machine is equipped with position sensor for boom angle, fit
the bracket and sensor boom angle.
19 Grease the boom's rear bearings with lubricating grease EP2.
20 Check that the tilt cylinders' hoses are securely tightened.
21 Remove the collection containers, handle the waste oil as
Installing the top lift attachment
CAUTION
Do not overfill!
Leakage and environmental damage!
The hydraulic oil level is checked with the boom
completely lowered and retracted.
The instruction requires that the boom is mounted on the machine, see
Installing the boom, page 263. The boom must be in lowered position.
1 Remove the rotation bar's shafts from the rotation bar.
2 Clean and grease the bearing surfaces for mounting and tilt
cylinders on the attachment with lubricating grease EP2.
3 Connect lifting equipment securely to the attachment's lifting eyes.
4 Lift the attachment into position. Align the attachment so that the
holes for the shafts in the boom line up with the holes for the shafts
in the rotation bar.
5 Clean and grease the attachment's mounting pins with lubricating
grease EP2 before installing.
6 Fit the attachment's mounting pins and fit the lock bolts.
7 Clean and apply aluminium paste, e.g., Loctite 8150, on the tilt
cylinders' link bearings and shafts.
8 Connect the tilt cylinders to the attachment.
Align the tilt cylinder and press in the pin. Fit the lock bolt. If
necessary, loosen the hydraulic connections on the tilt cylinder to
enable adjustment of the tilt cylinder's length.
9 Remove the plugs and connect the attachment's hydraulic hoses
to the valve block on the boom nose.

NOTE
Replace the O-rings. Check that the O-rings are in the correct
position.
10 Connect the attachment's cable harness to the cable harness on

the boom.
Fit the cable harness' clamping from the boom.
11 Grease the attachment's bearing with lubricating grease EP2.

12 Switch on the system voltage with the battery disconnector.
13 Start the engine.
14 Check that the hydraulic connections are sealed tightly.
15 Check the attachment's functions.
16 Check the oil level in the hydraulic oil tank with the lift cylinders
completely down and the extension cylinder completely in. The oil
level should be at the top of the sight glass. Top up if necessary.
17 Check the angle sensor:

a. Contact service technician.
b. Use the menu for machine check to check the sensor, see
Menu for machine check, description, page 210.
• Lower the boom to the lowest position. Check that the
value (d) is 0° ± 0.2°.
• Raise the boom to its maximum angle and check that the
value (d) is within the tolerances, see below.
Max. lifting height Maximum boom angle
Menu for checking the scale 5 containers 60.3° ± 0.2°
d. Shows boom angle in degrees. 6 containers 62.0° ± 0.2°
18
On machines with extended tilt function, calibrate the tilt function,
see separate instructions.
19 Check the overload system.
Lift a loaded container approx. 1 metre. Operate the boom out and
check that the overload system is activated.

266 7 Transporting the machine – Service position
7.3 Service position

General
Service position is used for service, maintenance and other situations
when the machine needs to be secured.
Service position entails:

• The machine is parked, i.e. parking brake applied.
• Boom fully retracted and lowered to horizontal position.
• Engine off.
• System voltage switched off with battery disconnector.

7 Transporting the machine – Long-term storage 267
7.4 Long-term storage

General
Short-term storage is storage from 3 days up to 2 weeks.
Long-term storage is storage for more than 2 weeks.
Short-term storage
NOTE
Always store the machine in a dry and protected location indoors.
Prepare for short-term storage

1 Wash the machine externally and clean inside the cab.
2 Perform the daily inspection, see 6.1 Daily inspection, page 213.
3 Fill the fuel tank to full in order to avoid condensation.
4 Fill the AdBlue tank to full in order to avoid condensation, see
AdBlue, page 223.
5 Check that the engine covers are intact and fitted correctly.
6 Park the machine in service position, see 7.3 Service position,
page 266.
7 Depressurise the brake and hydraulic systems, see Maintenance
manual.
8 Check the coolant level and the coolant's freezing point, see
Maintenance manual.
9 Close the cab windows and doors.
10 Turn off the system voltage with the battery disconnector, see
Battery and battery disconnector, general, page 240.
11 Disconnect the cables from the battery and trickle charge the
battery during the entire storage period.
If very low temperatures are expected during the storage period,
remove the batteries and store them in a warmer location.
Reset after short-term storage

1 Check that there are no visible signs of leakage on or around the
machine.
2 Connect the battery cables to the battery.
3 Check the engine oil level, see Engine oil, general, page 230.
4 Check the coolant level, see Cooling system, general, page 229.
5 Check the oil level in the drive axle, see Maintenance manual.
6 Check the oil level in the hydraulic oil tank, see Hydraulic system,
general, page 233.
7 Check the level in the brake system, see Maintenance manual.
8 Check the oil levels in the rotation motors, see Maintenance
manual.
9 Check the oil level in the spreading motor, see Maintenance
manual.
10 Close the valves that were opened to drain the pressure in the
hydraulic system, see Maintenance manual.
11 Start the engine and allow it to run at idle until it is warm (normally
3 to 5 minutes).
12 Check that gauges, warning lamps and monitors are working
correctly.
13 Check that the function of the transmission, brakes, steering and
electric systems is correct.
14 Check, without load, that all load handling functions are working
correctly.

268 7 Transporting the machine – Long-term storage
Long-term storage
CAUTION
Always complete all measures for resetting the
machine and engine.
When preparing the machine and engine for long-term
storage, drain the oil from the engine and seal the
engine openings.
If the machine is started without being reset, there is
a great risk of extensive damage to the engine and
machine.
NOTE
Always store the machine in a dry and protected location indoors.
Prepare for long-term storage

1 Wash the machine externally and clean inside the cab.
2 Perform the daily inspection, see 6.1 Daily inspection, page 213.
3 Park the machine in service position, see 7.3 Service position,
page 266.
4 Drain the fuel tank completely in order to avoid condensation.
5 Drain the AdBlue tank to empty in order to avoid condensation.
6 Depressurise the brake and hydraulic systems, see Maintenance
manual.
7 Clean the piston rod surfaces that are exposed. Treat with rust
preventive.
8 Repair any damage from leaks, see Maintenance manual.
9 Check the coolant level and the coolant's freezing point, see
Maintenance manual.
10 Cover exhaust outlet, air intake and crankcase ventilation, if fitted.
11 Set up a sign in the cab stating to remove the cover over exhaust
outlet, air intake and crankcase ventilation, if fitted.
Also write that the parking brake is released and that the engine is
drained of oil.
12 Close the cab windows and doors.
13 Turn off the system voltage with the battery disconnector, see
Battery and battery disconnector, general, page 240.
14 Disconnect the cables from the battery and trickle charge the
battery during the entire storage period.
If very low temperatures are expected during the storage period,
remove the batteries and store them in a warmer location.
15 Drain and fill with new oil in the transmission and axles.
NOTE
If the machine has only operated for a short time since the last
scheduled oil change for the transmission and axles, skip this
step.
16 Prepare the engine for long-term storage, adapted according

to the intended storage time, in accordance with the engine
manufacturer's instructions.
17 Release the tension in or remove the drive belts, alternator belt
and the belt for the A/C compressor.
18 Check that the engine covers are intact and fitted correctly.
19 Support the wheel axles on jack stands to avoid load on the tyres.

7 Transporting the machine – Long-term storage 269
20 Release the parking brake mechanically, see 7.1.1 Mechanical

release of parking brake, page 252.
Reset after long-term storage

1 Check that there are no visible signs of leakage on or around the
machine.
2 Reset the parking brake, see 7.1.1 Mechanical release of parking
brake, page 252.
3 Remove the jack stands from under the wheel axles.
4 Check that the tyre pressure is correct.
5 Connect the battery cables to the battery.
6 Remove the cover over exhaust outlet, air intake and crankcase
ventilation, if fitted.
7 Reset the engine in accordance with the engine manufacturer's
instructions for resetting an engine after long-term storage.
8 Check the coolant level, see Cooling system, general, page 229.
9 Check the oil level in the drive axle, see Maintenance manual.
10 Check the oil level in the hydraulic oil tank, see Hydraulic system,
general, page 233.
11 Check the oil level in the brake system, see Maintenance manual.
12 Check the oil levels in the rotation motors, see Maintenance
manual.
13 Check the oil level in the spreading motor, see Maintenance
manual.
14 Wipe off the rust preventive from the piston rod surfaces.
15 Tension the drive belts, alternator belt and the belt for the A/C
compressor.
16 Fill the fuel tank with fuel.
17 Fill the AdBlue tank with AdBlue.
18 Close the valves that were opened to drain the pressure in the
hydraulic system, see Maintenance manual.
19 Start the engine and allow it to run at idle until it is warm (normally
3 to 5 minutes).
20 Check the engine oil level, see Engine oil, general, page 230.
21 Check the transmission oil level, see Transmission oil, general,
page 231.
22 Calibrate the transmission, see Maintenance manual.
23 Check that gauges, warning lamps and monitors are working
correctly.
24 Check that the function of the transmission, brakes, steering and
electric systems is correct.
25 Check, without load, that all load handling functions are working
correctly.

270 8 Environment and standards
8 Environment and
standards
General
The ever-increasing industrialisation of our world is having a significant
impact on our global environment. Nature, animals and people are
subjected daily to risks in connection with various forms of chemical
handling.
There are still no fully environmentally safe chemicals, such as oils and
coolants, available on the market. Therefore, all who handle, perform
service on or repair machines must use the tools, assisting devices and
methods necessary to protect the environment in an environmentally
sound manner.
By following the simple rules below, you will contribute to protecting

our environment.
Recycling
Conscientious recycling of the machine is the starting point for the life
cycle to come full circle, and for being able to recycle and make use of
material in new products. According to calculations by Cargotec, the
machine is more than 90% recyclable by weight.
Environmentally hazardous waste

Components such as batteries, oils, and various chemicals and other
items that may constitute environmentally hazardous waste must be
handled and taken care of in an environmentally safe and sound
manner.
Discarded batteries contain substances hazardous to personal health

and the environment. Therefore, handle batteries in an environmentally
safe manner and according to national regulations.
Oils and fluids

Oils freely discharged cause environmental damage and can also be a
fire hazard. Therefore, when emptying and draining oils or fuel, take
appropriate action to prevent unnecessary spills.
Waste oils and fluids should always be taken care of by an authorised

disposal company.
Pay close attention to oil leaks and other fluid leaks! Take immediate
action to seal the leaks.
Air conditioning
The refrigerant in the air conditioning for the cab adds to the
"greenhouse effect" if released into the open air. Special training is
required for all service work on the air conditioning. Many countries
also require certification by a governing authority for such work. When
scrapping an air conditioning unit, the refrigerant shall be taken care
of by a certified company.
Working in a contaminated area

The machine must be equipped for work in contaminated areas
(environmentally polluted or health-hazardous area) before work is
started. Also, there are special local rules in force for such handling
and when servicing such a machine.

8 Environment and standards – Environment and standards 271
Declarations
The machine does not contain asbestos.
The machines contains lead in batteries and in electric cabling.
If the machine is equipped with air conditioning then refrigerant of type

R134a is used.
Standards
CE marking
Machines for the EU/EEA market are CE marked. This means that
upon delivery the machine fulfils the applicable "Essential Health
and Safety Requirements" specified in the EU Machine Directive,
2006/42/EC, as well as other EU directives relevant to this machine
type. For more information, see section 2.2 CE marking.
ANSI/ITSDF marking
Versions of this machine for North America are ANSI/ITSDF marked.
This means that, when delivered, the machine fulfils the basic safety
requirements specified in ANSI/ITSDF B56.1. For more information,
see section 2.3 ANSI/ITSDF marking.
EMC, electromagnetic interference

The EU's EMC directive regarding "Electromagnetic compatibility",
2014/30/EU, gives a general description of the standards that may be
required of a machine from a safety aspect, where the limit values have
been established in international standards. A machine or device that
meets these standards should be CE marked.
Cargotec machines are specially tested with regards to electromagnetic

interference in accordance with harmonised standard EN12895.
The machine's CE marking and declaration of conformity also cover
the EMC directive. If other electronic equipment is installed on the
machine, it must be CE marked and tested on the machine with regards
to electromagnetic interference. It must also be approved by Cargotec.
Exhaust emissions
Machines for the EU/EEA market fulfil EU\qs Exhaust directive
97/68/EC and 2004/26/EC, which means that the engine's exhaust
emissions have been limited according to the requirements.
Machines for the North American market fulfil EPA\qs and CARB\qs
exhaust regulations, which means that engine exhaust emissions have
been limited according to the requirements.
Noise emissions
The sound pressure level in the cab is measured in accordance with
EN 12053 with measurement uncertainty σR=2.5 dB.
Vibration standard
Vibration emitted by the machine is measured according to harmonised
standard EN 13059, where the level of vibration varies depending on
with which type of tyres and driver's seat the machine is equipped. See
section 9 Specifications.

272 9 Specifications
9 Specifications
Data
The machine's weights and dimensions vary depending on how the
machine is equipped. Detailed information regarding this is given in the
product specification and data sheet for the machine in question.
1 Engine Volvo TAD1151VE Volvo TAD1171VE Volvo TAD1172VE Cummins QSM11
Power acc. to ISO 3046 (net 265 kW between 265 kW between 285 kW between 277 kW between
power) 1500-1900 rpm 1500-1900 rpm 1500-1900 rpm 1700-1800 rpm
Torque ISO 3046 1785 Nm between 1785 Nm between 1938 Nm between 1830 Nm between
1000-1400 rpm 1000-1400 rpm 1000-1400 rpm 1100-1400 rpm
Environment classification Stage 3A / Tier 3 Stage 4 / Tier 4f Stage 3A / Tier 3
EU/EPA
Max. rotation speed 2000 rpm 2000 rpm
Number of cylinders 6 cylinders 6 cylinders
Alternator, output 28 V / 150 A) 28 V / 100 A)
System voltage, voltage – 24 V (2x12 V / 145 Ah) 24 V (2x12 V /
capacity 145 Ah)
2 Transmission ZF 5WG261 ZF 5WG311

No. of gears, forward - reverse 5 – 3 5 – 3
3.3 Power transmission, Kessler AxleTech

drive axle
Drive axle, type Kessler D102 AxleTech PRC 7545
4 Brakes
Footbrake system – wheel Wet Disc Brake – drive wheel
affected
Parking brake system – wheel Spring brake - drive wheel
affected
5. Steering
Steering system Hydraulic servo
6. Wheels DRG420 DRG450 DRG450

Dimension, front and rear 18.00-25/36 18.00-25/40 18.00-33
Tyre pressure, also see pressure 1.0 MPa
plate
Tyre type, front and rear Inflated with air. Spare and replacement tyres must be of brand
names approved by Cargotec.

9 Specifications – Specifications 273
9 Cab
Equivalent sound pressure level LpAZ 72 dB(A)
in cab Measured according to EN12053 with measurement uncertainty σR=2.5 dB.
Measurement value with standard engine.
Whole body vibrations in the cab 0.5 m/s2
Measured according to EN13059 with measurement uncertainty
k=0.3 x measured value.
Lamp Output (W) Socket

Direction indicator, front - LEDs are replaced complete
Tail lights, brake lights & direction indicators rear - LEDs are replaced complete
Position lamps - LEDs are replaced complete
Headlights - LEDs are replaced complete
Headlights with high and low beam 75/70 P43t-38 (H4)
Back-up light - LEDs are replaced complete
Work lights - LEDs are replaced complete
Revolving beacon - LEDs are replaced complete
Flashing beacon LED - LEDs are replaced complete
Interior lighting - Replaced complete
Volumes
Any deviation from this table must be approved in writing by Cargotec.
1.2 Engine, fuel system Volvo TAD1151VE Volvo TAD117xVE Cummins QSM11
Fuel tank, volume 550 l
Fuel quality EN590
ASTM D 975 No 1-D
ASTM D 975 No 2-D
CAUTION
Use only the fuel of approved quality.
Risk of engine damage, warranty invalidated.
Only fuel of a quality that is approved by the engine supplier may
be used.
AdBlue tank, volume - 35 l -
AdBlue quality - AdBlue, according to ISO -

standard 22241.

274 9 Specifications – Specifications
1.7 Engine, cooling system Volvo TAD1151VE Volvo TAD117xVE Cummins QSM11
Coolant volume Total: 45 l Total: 45 l Total: 38 l
Coolant filling point Volvo Penta Coolant VCS, ready-mixed. ES Compleat, Premix
See Oils and lubricants, recommendation, page 278.
CAUTION
Use approved coolant.
Risk of engine damage and invalidated warranty if unapproved
coolant is used.
Only use coolant approved by the engine supplier when changing
and topping up the coolant.
1.8 Engine, lubrication Volvo Cummins QSM11

system
Oil volume incl. filter Total: 37 l Total: 39 l
Oil type, quality See Oils and lubricants, recommendation, page 278.
2.6 Transmission, ZF 5WG261 ZF 5WG311

lubrication system
Oil volume incl. filter Total: 50 l Total: 57 l
3.3 Power transmission, Kessler D102 AxleTech PRC 7545

drive axle
Oil volume, differential Total: 72 l Total: 50 l
Oil volume, hub reduction Total: 2x12 l Total: 2x10 l
4 Brakes
Oil tank brake system, volume 148 l
7 Load handling Spreading (positioning) motor Rotation motor

Oil volume, hydraulic motor 2.3 l 3.7 l
attachment
9 Frame, body, cab and

accessories
Refrigerant air conditioning R134a
Volume refrigerant 2000 g
Lubricant air conditioning ZXL100PG
Volume, lubricant 0.3 l
Washer fluid 3.5 l

9 – 275
10 Common hydraulics
Oil volume, hydraulic oil tank 600 l
Oil volume, hydraulic system 900 l (total, incl. tank)
Lift capacity and dimensions

Lift capacity (tonnes)
Container 8'6” Container 9'6”

Model H4 H5
Row 1 Row 2 Row 3 Row 4 Row 1 Row 2 Row 3 Row 4 (mm) (mm)
DRG420- - -
42* 25* 12* 42* 25* 12* 15100 18200
60S5
DRG450- - -
45* 27* 13* 45* 27* 13* 15100 18200
60S5
DRG450- - -
45* 30* 15* 45* 30* 15* 15100 18200
60S5M
DRG450- - -
45* 35* 18* 45* 35* 18* 15300 18300
60S5X
DRG450- 43*/42* - -
25* 10* 40*/45 25* 10* 14900 18200
60C5 /45
DRG450- 43*/42* - 41*/44/ -
32* 15* 32* 15 15100 18300
60C5X /45 45
DRG450- - -
45* 32* 16* 45* 32* 16* 15100 18200
65S5
DRG450- - -
45* 36*/38 21* 45* 37*/38 21* 15300 18300
65S5X
DRG450- 38*/(38*) - -
45* 21*/(29*) 45* 38*/(41*) 21*/(29*) 15100 18300
65S5XS /(41)
DRG450- 43*/42* - -
28* 13* 40*/45 28** 13* 14900 18200
65C5 /45

Container 8'6” Container 9'6”

Model H4 H5
Row 1 Row 2 Row 3 Row 4 Row 1 Row 2 Row 3 Row 4 (mm) (mm)
DRG450- 43*/42* - -
33*/34 17* 41*/44 34* 17* 15100 18300
65C5X /45
DRG450- 34*/(36*) - -
42*/45 17*/(24*) 41*/45 34*/(38*) 17*/(24*) 14900 18200
65C5XS /(38)
DRG450- 42**/44 - -
32* 16* 43*/45 32** 16** 16200 19250
65S6 */45
DRG450- 34**/36
42**/45* 35*/38 21* 12 43*/45 21** 12* 16300 19350
65S6X */38
DRG450-
42**/45* 32**/33* 18** 10** 36**/45* 33** 18** 10** 17700 20800
65S6HC
DRG450- - -
45* 39*/41 23* 45* 41* 23* 15100 18300
70S5X
DRG450- - -
45* 39*/41 23*/(31*) 45* 41* 23*/(31*) 15100 18300
70S5XS
DRG450- - -
45* 36*/38 20* 43/45* 38* 20* 14900 18300
70C5X
DRG450- - -
45* 36*/38 20*/(27*) 43*/45 38* 20*/(27*) 14900 18300
70C5XS
DRG450- 23**/ 23**/
35**/38* 36**/39*
70S6H- 38**/45 (29**)/ 14*/(19*) 36**/45* (30**)/ 14*/(19*) 17800 20900
/41 /41
CXS (31*) (31*)
DRG450- - -
45* 43*/45 26*/(34*) 45 45* 26*/(34*) 15200 18400
75S5XS
DRG450- - -
45* 40*/45 24*/(34*) 45* 41*/45 24*/(34*) 15000 18400
75C5XS
DRG450- 27**/ 27**/
35**/38* 40**/43*
75S6H- 40**/45* (30**)/ 17*/(23*) 38**/45* (32**)/ 17*/(23*) 17800 20900
/41 /45
CXS (32*)/(35) (35*)
( ) = Support jacks down

Dimensions (mm)
Operation width Slewing radius Main dimensions

Service
Model Ground weight
A1-20' A2-40' R1-20' R3-40' Lm L H3 clear- Tyres (kg)
ance
DRG420-60S5 11200 13600 8100 9400 8000 11200 4600 250 18.00-25/36 65500
DRG450-60S5 11200 13600 8100 9400 8000 11200 4600 250 18.00-25/40 67400
DRG450-60SM 11200 13600 8100 9400 8000 11200 4600 250 18.00-25/40 69400
DRG450-60S5X 11200 13600 8100 9400 8100 11200 4600 300 18.00-33 77500
DRG450-60C5 11200 13600 8100 9400 8000 11200 4600 250 18.00-25/40 73500
DRG450-60C5X 11200 13600 8100 9400 8100 11200 4600 300 18.00-33 81800
DRG450-65S5 11600 13600 8500 9400 8500 11700 4600 250 18.00-25/40 69500
DRG450-65S5X 11600 13600 8500 9400 8600 11700 4600 300 18.00-33 77300
DRG450-65S5XS 11600 13600 8500 9400 8600 11700 4700 300 18.00-33 80300
DRG450-65C5 11600 13600 8500 9400 8500 11700 4600 250 18.00-25/40 73500
DRG450-65C5X 11600 13600 8500 9400 8600 11700 4600 300 18.00-33 81300
DRG450-65C5XS 11600 13600 8500 9400 8600 11700 4700 300 18.00-33 83500
DRG450-65S6 11900 13900 8500 9450 8500 12000 4500 250 18.00-25/40 70500
DRG450-65S6X 11900 13900 8500 9450 8600 12000 4600 300 18.00-33 77500
DRG450-
12300 14150 8500 9450 8600 12700 4700 250 18.00-25/40 73500
65S6HCXS
DRG450-70S5X 12100 13600 9000 9400 9100 12200 4700 300 18.00-33 78800
DRG450-70S5XS 12100 13600 9000 9400 9100 12200 4700 300 18.00-33 80300
DRG450-70C5X 12100 13600 9000 9400 9100 12200 4700 300 18.00-33 83300
DRG450-70C5XS 12100 13600 9000 9400 9100 12200 4700 300 18.00-33 84800
DRG450-
12800 14350 9000 9500 9100 13200 4700 300 18.00-33 84400
70S6HCXS
DRG450-75S5XS 12500 13600 9400 900 9600 12700 4750 300 18.00-33 82400
DRG450-75C5XS 12500 13600 9400 9400 9600 12700 4750 300 18.00-33 88400
DRG450-
13300 14350 9400 9500 9600 13700 4750 300 18.00-33 86400
75S6HCXS

Oils and lubricants, recommendation

The service intervals specified by Cargotec in the maintenance manual
only apply if oils are selected in accordance with the table below. The
table indicates recommended viscosity for different oil types, and
grades, depending on the outdoor temperature.
Any deviation from this table must be approved in writing by Cargotec,

and may mean changed service intervals.
°C -40 -30 -20 -10 0 +10 +20 +30 +40

Oil type, quality °F -40 -22 -4 +14 +32 +50 +68 +86 104
1.8 Engine, lubrication system
Volvo TAD11xxVE: VDS-4 SAE 15W40 (engine oil)
SAE 10W30 (engine oil)
Cummins QSM11 : API CH-4 or ACEA E5 SAE 15W40 (engine oil)

2.6 Transmission, lubrication system

API: CD/CE/CF-4/CF/CG-4/ CH-4/CI- SAE 10W, 10W/30, 10W/40
4/SF/SG/SH/SJ/SL
SAE 15W/30, 15W/40
ACEA: Categories A, B, E
SAE 20W/20, 20W/40
VDS-4
SAE 30
3.3 Power transmission, drive axle

API GL-5 SAE 80W140
SAE 75W90
4 Brakes (UTTO oil 2)

GM Allison C-4 SAE 5W30 (transmission oil)
John Deere J20 C, D
Caterpillar TO-4
7 Load handling
Oil hydraulic motors, attachment, hypoid oil SAE 80W140
API GL-5
SAE 75W90
10 Common hydraulics
DIN 51524 Part 3 HVLP ISO VG 68
ISO VG 46 HV
ISO VG 32
1 Only applies to synthetic or semi-synthetic engine oil.

2 The oil in the brake system has to meet one of the quality requirements.

ACEA = Association des Constructeurs Européenne d'Automobiles
API = American Petroleum Institute
CES = Cummins Engine Standard
VDS = Volvo Drain Specification
WARNING
Change interval for engine oil requires that the sulphur
content in the fuel does not exceed 0.5%.
Higher sulphur content in the fuel damages the engine
and after-treatment system!
Only use fuel with a sulphur content that does not
exceed 0.5%.
NOTE
Oil filters must be changed in connection with oil change.
Lubricating grease
Use a universal grease type EP in accordance with NLGI Grade 2 (EP2)
for all lubrication points except for lifting equipment and slide plates.
For central lubrication, only universal grease type EP in accordance

with NLGI Grade 2 (EP2) without molybdenum disulphide may be used.
For lifting equipment use a universal grease type EP in accordance

with NLGI Grade 2 (EP2) with 3-5% molybdenum disulphide mixture.
For slide plates use a lubricant approved by Cargotec. Obtained from

Cargotec Spare Parts Department. 0.65 kg cartridge for grease gun
part. no. 923110.0360 and 5 kg tin part. no. 923595.0003.
NOTE
Select lubricant class according to the prevailing climate.
Contact grease
Use contact grease part no. 923836.0552. Applies for sealed
connectors.
Sealant silicone
Use silicone part. no. 923107.0308.
Silicone adhesive
Use silicone adhesive part. no. 923854.0100.
Adhesive system for window panes

Only use PU polymer recommended by Cargotec.

Unit explanations
Unit Abbreviation
Newton metre Nm
Kgf/m kpm
Kilo pascal kPa
Mega pascal MPa
Kilowatt kW
Kilojoule kJ
British thermal unit Btu
Calorie ca
Inch in
Feet ft
Yard yd
Mile mile
Centimetre cm
Metre m
Kilometre km

Conversion SI-units
Recalculation Recalculation
SI-unit factor Non-SI factor SI
Torque
Nm x 10.2 = kg·cm x 0.8664 = lb·in
Nm x 0.74 = lbf·ft x 1.36 = Nm
Nm x 0.102 = kg·m x 7.22 = lb·ft
Pressure (Pa = N/m2)
kPa x 4.0 = in.H2O x 0.249 = kPa
kPa x 0.30 = in.Hg x 3.38 = kPa
kPa x 0.145 = psi x 6.89 = kPa
bar x 14.5 = psi x 0.069 = bar
kp/cm 2 x 14.22 = psi x 0.070 = kp/cm2
N/mm 2 x 145.04 = psi x 0.069 = bar
MPa x 145 = psi x 0.00689 = MPa
Power (W = J/s)
kW x 1.36 = hp (cv) x 0.736 = kW
kW x 1.34 = bhp x 0.746 = kW
kW x 0.948 = Btu/s x 1.055 = kW
W x 0.74 = ft·lb/s x 1.36 = W
Energy (J = Nm)
kJ x 0.948 = Btu x 1.055 = kJ
J x 0.239 = calorie x 4.19 = J
Speed and acceleration
m/s2 x 3.28 = ft/s2 x 0.305 = m/s2
m/s x 3.28 = ft/s x 0.305 = m/s
km/h x 0.62 = mph x 1.61 = km/h
Horsepower/torque
Bhp x 5252 rpm= TQ (lb·ft) TQ x rpm 5252 = bhp
Temperature
°C = (°F – 32)/1.8 °F = (°C x 1.8) + 32
Flow factor
l/min (dm3 /min) x 0.264 = US gal/min x 3.785 = litre/min

Conversion table length

Unit cm m km in ft yd mile
cm 1 0.01 0.00001 0.3937 0.03281 0.01094 0.000006
m 100 1 0.001 39.37 3.2808 1.0936 0.00062
km 100000 1000 1 39370.7 3280.8 1093.6 0.62137
in 2.54 0.0254 0.000025 1 0.08333 0.02777 0.000015
ft 30.48 0.3048 0.000304 12 1 0.3333 0.000189
yd 91.44 0.9144 0.000914 36 3 1 0.000568
mile 160930 1609.3 1.6093 63360 5280 1760 1
1 mm = 0.1 cm – 1 mm = 0.001 m
Conversion table area

Unit cm2 m2 km2 a ft2 yd2 in2
cm2 1 0.0001 - 0.000001 0.001076 0.000012 0.155000
m2 10000 1 0.000001 0.01 10.764 1.1958 1550.000
km2 - 1000000 1 10000 1076400 1195800 -
a 0.01 100 0.0001 1 1076.4 119.58 -
ft2 - 0.092903 - 0.000929 1 0.1111 144.000

yd2 - 0.83613 - 0.008361 9 1 1296.00
in2 6.4516 0.000645 - - 0.006943 0.000771 1
1 ha = 100 a – 1 mile2 = 259 ha = 2.59 km2
Conversion table volume

Unit cm3 = cc m3 l in3 ft3 yd3
cm3 = ml 1 0.000001 0.001 0.061024 0.000035 0.000001
m3 1000000 1 1000 61024 35.315 1.30796
dm3 (l) 1000 0.001 1 61.024 0.035315 0.001308
in3 16.387 0.000016 0.01638 1 0.000578 0.000021
ft3 28316.8 0.028317 28.317 1728 1 0.03704
yd3 764529.8 0.76453 764.53 46656 27 1
1 gal (US) = 3785.41 cm3 = 231 in3 = 0.83267 gal (UK)
Conversion table weight

Unit g kg t oz lb
g 1 0.001 0.000001 0.03527 0.0022
kg 1000 1 0.001 35.273 2.20459
t 1000000 1000 1 35273 2204.59
oz 28.3495 0.02835 0.000028 1 0.0625
lb 453.592 0.45359 0.000454 16 1
1 tonne (metric) = 1.1023 ton (US) = 0.9842 ton (UK)

Conversion table pressure

Unit kp/cm 2 bar Pa = N/m2 kPa lbf/in2 lbf/ft2
kp/cm 2 1 0.98067 98066.5 98.0665 14.2233 2048.16
bar 1.01972 1 100000 100 14.5037 2088.6
Pa = N/m2 0.00001 0.001 1 0.001 0.00015 0.02086
kPa 0.01020 0.01 1000 1 0.14504 20.886
lbf/in2 0.07032 0.0689 6894.76 6.89476 1 144
lbf/ft2 0.00047 0.00047 47.88028 0.04788 0.00694 1
kg/cm2 = 735.56 Dry (mmHg) = 0.96784 atm

284 10 Terminology
10 Terminology
Explanations
Term Description
Accumulator Reservoir that stores (accumulates) pressure for, i.e. hydraulic functions.
AdBlue AdBlue contains deionised water mixed with 32.5% urea.
Attachment Part of the machine that grips the load when lifting.
Anti-corrosion agent Prevents oxidation, in simple terms, rustproofing.
Working hydraulics All load handling functions, that is, lift and lower, tilt, side shift, spreading (extension)
and levelling.
Wheelbase Distance between drive axle and steering axle.
Bar Unit to express pressure.
Battery disconnector Cuts off power supply from battery.
Boom Lifting member moveable vertically and longitudinally. Bracket for attachment.
Bottom lift attachment Vertically adjustable “lift legs” for load handling. Grab the load from underneath.
CAN Controller Area Network - Network for communication between the control units.
CAN bus The network between the control units in the machine.
Central lubrication An automatic system for lubrication of a preset number of lubrication points.
Daily inspection Actions that should be performed daily to ensure the machine's functionality.
Decitonne Tenth of a tonne, measure of machine's lift capacity.
Displacement The oil volume that the pump can supply per pump revolution.
Display "Window" showing digital information, i.e. on steering wheel panel in the cab.
Operating time Number of hours machine has been in operation, shown on hour meter in cab.
Drive axle Driving axle that receives the torque from the drivetrain.
Drivetrain Parts in the machine involved in power transmission; engine, torque converter,
transmission, propeller shaft and drive axle with differential and hub reduction.
ECC Electric Climate Control – Air conditioning system with thermostat-controlled cooling,
dehumidification and heating.
Electrolyte level Fluid level in battery cells.
Expansion tank Tank for coolant.
Fixed displacement Non-adjustable volume (capacity) in a pump.
FMI Fault Message Identifier – The part of the error code indicating the type of error.
Main fuse Located by battery. Breaks the current to all systems in the whole machine.
Hydraulic oil Oil for hydraulic system. See specifications in operator's manual.
Hydraulic oil pump Pump in hydraulic system.
Hydraulic system System that uses oil pressure to transfer power to different functions.
Hanging load Lifted load.
Indicator Manual "sensor", for example, shows that a filter is clogged and needs to be changed.
KAU Kalmar Attachment Unit - Control unit KAU (D7911) is fitted on the attachment and
operates components on the attachment.
KCU Kalmar Cab Unit - Control Unit KCU (D7901) is fitted in the cab and is the control unit
that controls the start-up and shutdown of the machine's electrical system.

10 Terminology – Terminology 285
Term Description
KFU Kalmar Frame Unit - Control unit KFU (D7971) is fitted on the inside of the left-hand
frame member above the drive axle. The control unit operates components in the frame
and on the boom.
KID Kalmar Information Display - Control unit KID (D7950), the display in the cab.
KPU Kalmar Panel Unit - Control unit KPU (D7902) is fitted in the right-hand switch panel in
the cab and operates switches and controls in the cab.
KST Kalmar Service Tool - Computer program for service, calibration, setting and
programming of the machine's control units.
Piston rod Rod that is pushed into the piston's cylinder barrel and is acted upon by the hydraulic
pressure.
Refrigerant Fluid/gas in air conditioning. Must only be handled by authorised trained personnel.
LC Load Centre - Horizontal distance from the front edge of the drive wheel to the centre
of the attachment.
LLMC LLMC (Longitudinal Load Moment Control), see overload system.
Lift capacity Indicates machine's maximum lift capacity.
Lifting point Attaching point for lift device when lifting an object.
Low-emission engine Engine with low emissions of hazardous substances. Manufactured in accordance
with regulations.
Solenoid valve An electro-magnetically controlled valve. See also proportional valve.
Control valve Valves that can be used to control something, for example, to release pressure and thus
lower a boom or a fork.
Machine model Machine type. Specified, for example: DRG 420-450. See also type designation.
Environmental waste Used oils, filters, etc., must be handled according to governing national laws and
regulations.
Torque converter Hydraulic, variable clutch.
Counterweight Weights adapted to the machine's lift capacity to constitute an opposing load when lifting.
Hub reduction Type of final drive (often next to drive wheel) that reduces rpm and increases torque
from the drivetrain.
Node An end point or switching point in a data network. A node on the machine is the same
thing as a control unit on one of the machine's CAN buses.
Node number Each control unit (node) has a Kalmar-unique number used for identification and fault
reporting on the CAN bus.
OHC Over Height Container – Container with parts or load protruding over the holes for
twistlocks. To lift this type of container there are special attachments with lowerable
extensions for twistlocks.
Pilot oil pressure A low control pressure to, for example, a valve.
Planetary gear Type of transmission with gears in constant engagement.
Product alternative One of several alternatives is selected for a machine, e.g. engine option.
Progressive steering Quick steering wheel movements give greater steering angles.
Proportional valve An electro-magnetically controlled valve. If a voltage is applied, the valve is activated
in proportion to the voltage amplitude. In simple terms, infinitely variable valve, as
opposed to on/off valve. For example, found on transmission's valve housing.
Reachstacker Machine with special lift boom and top lift attachment for containers.
Recirculation Circulation in a closed system.
Control unit Electronic box that controls the machine's functions. The control units communicate
with each other using the CAN buses.

286 10 Terminology – Terminology
Term Description
SCR Selective Catalytic Reduction – Exhaust technology which means that AdBlue is added
to the exhaust gases in order to reduce the amount of nitrogen oxides (NOx). The urea
in AdBlue breaks down into ammonia, which in the SCR catalytic converter, reacts
with nitrogen oxide (NOx) as harmless nitrogen and water vapour is formed. Available
for Volvo stage 3B/4i engines.
Serial number Unique machine designation. On the machine plate.
Service position How machine should be safely positioned before service may be started.
Servo A small movement by the user results in a large angle, i.e. servo steering.
Servo pressure A low control pressure to control a higher pressure, for example, to a valve.
Side shift Parallel sideways movement of attachment.
Levelling Attachment is tilted, for example if load stands on uneven ground.

SPN Suspect Parameter Number – Is a unique number for machine components. Used in
circuit diagrams and error codes.
Spreading (positioning) Widening of attachment.
Dust reservoir The air filter collects the coarsest particles in a dust reservoir, which is emptied
automatically during operation.
Steering axle Wheel axle with steering.
Buzzer Acoustic alarm to catch the operator's attention.
Option Extra equipment for machine.
Tilting Load is leaned forward or backward.
Top lift Attachment. See attachment.
Transmission oil Oil for transmission and torque converter. See specifications in operator's manual.
Securing machine for transport Actions before transporting machine.
Twistlocks Four locking pins, one in each corner of the attachment, pushed down in corresponding
holes in container and twisted to lock the container when lifting.
Type designation Indicates machine type and capacity. See also machine model.
Maintenance Periodic maintenance actions so that machine functions safely and for a long service life.
UTTO-oil Universal Tractor Transmission Oil.
Variable pump Pump with adjustable flow rate.
Variable displacement Adjustable volume (capacity) of a pump.
Valve slide Moveable part in valve. Determines oil's path.
Rotation bar Rotating unit on attachment, rotates attachment in relation to lift boom.
Wet brakes Brake discs in oil bath.
Overload system A warning system, LLMC (Longitudinal Load Moment Control). The system is used for
stationary load handling, to avoid jeopardising the machine's forward stability. LLMC is
not designed to control lateral stability or stability when operating.

11 Index – Index 287
Index Event menu operator identification . . . . . . . .

Event menu overheight legs in intermediate position.
.
.
.
.
95
96
Event menu overload . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Event menu overload drive axle . . . . . . . . . . . 82
A Event menu overload steering axle . . . . . . . . . . 82
About the documentation kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Event menu parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
About the operator's manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Event menu person close to machine . . . . . . . . . 85
Air filter, engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Event menu person in work area . . . . . . . . . . . 81
ANSI/ITSDF marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Event menu preheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Event menu radio control function activated . . . . . . 97
Event menu raise/lower cab temperature . . . . . . . 91
Event menu raise/lower fan speed . . . . . . . . . . 91
B Event menu release the parking brake . . . . . . . . . 91
Back-up camera and distance warning . . . . . . . . 99 Event menu rotation stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Battery and battery disconnector . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Event menu seat belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
Event menu service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Event menu side shift stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
C Event menu speed limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
CE marking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Event menu speed limitation for overheight lift . . . . . 96
Central lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Event menu speed limitation, load position . . . . . . . 96
Checking accumulators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Event menu speed limitation, warm-up mode . . . . . . 96
Cleanliness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Event menu start interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Control for load handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Event menu support jacks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Event menu tilt lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 Event menu travel direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Customer settings via display . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Event menu twistlocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Event menu tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Event menu, boom in incorrect position . . . . . . . . 97
Event menu, cab in incorrect position . . . . . . . . . 97
D Event menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Daily inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111, 213
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Driver's seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69 F
Fire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
E Fire extinguishing system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Foreword . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Fuel system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Engine operating menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Functions for load handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Environment and standards . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270 Fuses for electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Error code indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Error code information on display . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Error code tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 G
Error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Event menu AdBlue end . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Gearshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Event menu air filter air conditioning system . . . . . . 90
Event menu applied parking brake . . . . . . . . . . 97
Event menu arm rest . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 H
Event menu automatic lowering of support jacks . . . . 95 Handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
Event menu automatic spreading 20'–40' . . . . . . . 87 Heating / Air conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . 71, 165
Event menu automatic start function. . . . . . . . . . 95 Hydraulic system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Event menu automatic stop function . . . . . . . . . . 94
Event menu battery charging . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Event menu brake temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 I
Event menu contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
Event menu control breaker . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93 Identification of the machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Event menu engine coolant temperature . . . . . . . . 83 Ignition key lock and start and stop button for the
Event menu heating rear view mirrors/rear windscreen . . 92 engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Event menu height limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Inspection and maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . 5, 212
Event menu incorrect tyre pressure . . . . . . . . . . 80 Instruments and controls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Event menu intermittent wiper . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Event menu levelling lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Event menu load centre . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 K
Event menu load receipt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Keep in mind . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Event menu low accumulator pressure . . . . . . 80, 85
Event menu low AdBlue level. . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Event menu low coolant level engine . . . . . . . . . 94
Event menu low fuel level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 L
Event menu low washer fluid level . . . . . . . . . . 90 Lifting and transporting the machine . . . . . . . . . . 253
Event menu no operator in seat. . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Lifting load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Event menu oil temperature hydraulics . . . . . . . . 84 Lifting machine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Event menu oil temperature transmission . . . . . . . 83 Lifting tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Event menu open door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Light panel on boom . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

288 11 Index – Index
Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 S
Load handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60, 170
Long-term storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Safety and emergency equipment. . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Service brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
M Service position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Smartfleet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Mechanical release of parking brake . . . . . . . . . 252 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Menu for active error codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206 Starting engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Menu for inactive error codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Menu for machine check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Menu for machine settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Stopping the engine - parking . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Menu for services and settings . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Menu for statistics and history . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Multi-function lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
T
O Terminology . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
The event menu parking brake not activated and no
Oil, brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 operator in the driver's seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Operating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Operating menu electrical system . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Transmission and hydraulics operating menu . . . . . . 76
Operating menu load centre monitoring . . . . . . . . 77 Transmission oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Operating menu load counter. . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Transporting load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Operating menu scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76 Transporting the machine . . . . . . . . . . . 250, 254
Operating menu system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Travel direction selector and parking brake . . . . . . . 57
Operating menu trip computer work shift . . . . . . . . 75 Tyres and rims . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Operating menu tyre pressure monitoring . . . . . . . 78
Operating menus . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Optional equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 U
Overview description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Unloading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
P V
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Vehicle Data Interface (VDI) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Personnel proximity system . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
W
Warming up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
R Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Radio control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 While operating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Reading instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Windscreen washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Running-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

Declaration of Conformity
We, Cargotec Sweden AB, SE-340 10 Lidhult, (Registration No. 556014-5418) herewith
declare that the machine,
Type Reachstacker
Model DRG450-65S5
Serial No A114.XXXXX
Year of construction 2013
Engine Volvo TAD1171VE
is manufactured in conformity with the requirements in

- The Machinery Directive 2006/42/EC
- The Electro Magnetic Compatibility Directive 2004/108/EC

- the harmonised standard EN 1459 Safety of industrial trucks
– Self propelled variable reach trucks.
Name
Position Head Of Counterbalanced Products
Authorized to compile the technical file
InfoString: 2A / KAT / / R / GB / 20130613 / 161727
Place, Date of Issue Signature
Blnk.lxf
last page
Cargotec Sweden AB
Cargotec improves the efficiency of cargo flows by offering solutions for Torggatan 3
the loading and unloading of goods on land and at sea – wherever cargo SE-340 10, Lidhult, Sweden
is on the move. Cargotec’s main daughter brands for cargo handling
Hiab, Kalmar and MacGregor are global market leaders in their fields. tel. +46 372 260 00
Cargotec’s global network offers extensive services that ensure the fax +46 372 263 90
continuous, reliable and sustainable performance of equipment. www.cargotec.com

FILE 20220926 171007 DRG420-450 Operators Manual English

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

FILE 20220926 171007 DRG420-450 Operators Manual English

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Reachstacker 42 – tonnes

Operator’s manual DRG 420 – IDRG03.02GB

This Operator's manual contains information that you must keep in

Operator's manual, purpose

Cargotec will not accept any responsibility for machine modifications

About machine version

Cargotec reserves the right to make changes to specifications and

Duplication of the content in this manual, in whole or in part, is strictly

All duplication by any means, such as copying, printing, etc., is

Operator’s manual DRG 420 – IDRG03.02GB

1.1.1 Reading instructions

Read the operator's manual

Read the operator's manual

Read the Maintenance manual

refers to important information in the Maintenance manual.

Read the Maintenance manual

IDRG03.02GB Operator’s manual DRG 420 –

See the machine card for complete specifications of the machine's

Operator’s manual DRG 420 – IDRG03.02GB

1.2 About the documentation kit

There is supplementary documentation that can be ordered for the

Always indicate publication number when ordering. The publication

IDRG03.02GB Operator’s manual DRG 420 –

1.3 Inspection and maintenance

Maintenance described in this operator's manual can be performed by

Operator’s manual DRG 420 – IDRG03.02GB

The safety information in this operator's manual is intended for your

Important to read the operator's manual

In addition, you will obtain a lot of valuable information that makes

The operator's manual should always remain in the machine. If it is lost

Ask your foreman or supervisor if there is anything in the text you do

IDRG03.02GB Operator’s manual DRG 420 –

Operator’s manual DRG 420 – IDRG03.02GB

2.1 Safety and emergency equipment

The machine may be equipped with the following safety equipment:

1. Revolving beacon. 13. Switch in driver's seat.

10. External rear view mirrors. 16. Back-up light.

IDRG03.02GB Operator’s manual DRG 420 –

As proof that the requirements are fulfilled, the machine is provided

For additional information, see standards under chapter 8 Environment

Operator’s manual DRG 420 – IDRG03.02GB

2.3 ANSI/ITSDF marking

This machine is ANSI/ITSDF marked. This means that upon delivery it

For additional information, see standards under chapter 8 Environment

IDRG03.02GB Operator’s manual DRG 420 –

2.4 Keep in mind

For machines with SCR-system (emission control with AdBlue):

During work shifts

Operator’s manual DRG 420 – IDRG03.02GB

IDRG03.02GB Operator’s manual DRG 420 –

Operator’s manual DRG 420 – IDRG03.02GB

IDRG03.02GB Operator’s manual DRG 420 –

Operator’s manual DRG 420 – IDRG03.02GB

IDRG03.02GB Operator’s manual DRG 420 –

Operator’s manual DRG 420 – IDRG03.02GB

IDRG03.02GB Operator’s manual DRG 420 –

Fire prevention measures

Make it a habit to make a visual inspection of the engine and engine

Action after fire

Operator’s manual DRG 420 – IDRG03.02GB

3.1.1 Identification of the machine

A machine card is supplied together with the spare parts catalogue.

The machine card must be updated when the machine is modified

IDRG03.02GB Operator’s manual DRG 420 –